Allice Messtechnik R&S ZND User Manual Download Page 555

Page: 555 / 1252

GUI reference

R&S

ZND

555

User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─ 61

Print...

Allows you to print the contents of the open tab. Opens a "Print Preview" dialog for
printer and paper setup.

Create R&S Support Information

Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support
for fault diagnosis; see

Chapter 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support"

on page 1180.

Remote command:

DIAGnostic:DEVice:STATe
SYSTem:DFPRint?

Setup tab

Displays the channel and trace settings of the active recall set and the main character-
istics of the instrument, including its IP address.

Setup softtool

www.allice.de

Allice Messtechnik GmbH

Summary of Contents for R&S ZND

Page 1: ...R S ZND Vector Network Analyzers User Manual 1173955702 Version 61 íÇ2 www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 2: ...29 02 requires R S ZND K1 not compatible with R S ZND K5 and R S ZND K8 R S ZND K8 Frequency range extension to 8 5 GHz for bidirectional instrument order no 1328 5412 02 requires R S ZND K5 not compatible with R S ZND K1 and R S ZND K6 R S ZND K7 Extended Power Range order no 1328 5335 02 R S ZND K19 1 mHz Frequency Resolution order no 1326 8089 02 R S ZND K210 EAZY De embedding EZD based on IEEE...

Page 3: ...chures 22 2 2 7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment OSA 22 2 2 8 Application notes application cards white papers etc 22 3 Getting started 23 3 1 Preparing for use 23 3 1 1 Lifting and carrying 23 3 1 2 Unpacking and checking 23 3 1 3 Choosing the operating site 23 3 1 4 Setting up the product 24 3 1 5 Considerations for test setup 26 3 1 6 Connecting the analyzer to the AC supply 27 3 1 ...

Page 4: ...ts 74 4 1 1 Global persistent settings 74 4 1 2 Recall sets 75 4 1 3 Traces channels and diagrams 75 4 1 4 Sweep control 77 4 1 5 Data flow 82 4 2 Screen elements 86 4 2 1 Display elements of a diagram 86 4 2 2 Dialogs 97 4 2 3 Trace formats 100 4 3 Measurement results 108 4 3 1 S parameters 109 4 3 2 Reference impedances 110 4 3 3 Impedance parameters 112 4 3 4 Admittance parameters 116 4 3 5 Wav...

Page 5: ...1 4 7 2 Bidirectional measurements 100 kHz to 4 5 GHz for R S ZND 201 4 7 3 Bidirectional measurements 100 kHz to 8 5 GHz for R S ZND 201 4 7 4 Frequency range extension to 8 5 GHz for bidirectional R S ZND 201 4 7 5 Time domain analysis 202 4 7 6 Distance to fault measurements 209 4 7 7 Frequency resolution 1 mHz 211 4 7 8 Eazy de embedding based on IEEE 370 211 4 7 9 In situ de embedding 213 4 7...

Page 6: ...5 2 8 Stability tab 259 5 2 9 Power Sensor tab 260 5 2 10 External DLL tab 261 5 3 Format softtool 265 5 4 Scale softtool 271 5 4 1 Scale Values tab 271 5 4 2 Scale Coupling tab 274 5 4 3 Zoom tab 274 5 5 Trace Config softtool 276 5 5 1 Traces tab 276 5 5 2 Mem tab 281 5 5 3 All Mem All Data tab 284 5 5 4 Math tab 285 5 5 5 Time Domain tab 291 5 5 6 Time Gate tab 296 5 5 7 Distance to Fault tab 29...

Page 7: ...filter tab 349 5 7 7 Set by Marker tab 353 5 7 8 Info Field tab 355 5 7 9 Marker Coupling tab 355 5 8 Stimulus softtool 357 5 8 1 Stimulus tab 357 5 8 2 Power tab 359 5 8 3 Time Domain X Axis tab 359 5 9 Power Bw Avg softtool 361 5 9 1 Power tab 361 5 9 2 Bandwidth tab 361 5 9 3 Average tab 362 5 10 Sweep Softtool 364 5 10 1 Sweep Params tab 364 5 10 2 Sweep Type tab 367 5 10 3 Trigger tab 377 5 1...

Page 8: ... tab 483 5 13 7 Balanced tab 486 5 13 8 Ground Loop tab 489 5 13 9 Differential Match tab 491 5 13 10 Config tab 493 5 13 11 Delta L tab 494 5 14 File softtool 501 5 14 1 Recall sets tab 502 5 14 2 Favorites tab 506 5 14 3 Print tab 507 5 14 4 Printer Setup dialog 508 5 14 5 Trace Data tab 509 5 14 6 More tab 510 5 14 7 Configure Additional Simulation Data dialog 511 5 15 Applic softtool 514 5 15 ...

Page 9: ...ng manual and remote control 593 6 2 Messages 594 6 2 1 Device messages commands and device responses 594 6 2 2 SCPI command structure and syntax 594 6 2 3 SCPI parameters 598 6 3 Basic remote control concepts 600 6 3 1 Traces channels and diagram areas 600 6 3 2 Active traces in remote control 601 6 3 3 Initiating measurements speed considerations 602 6 3 4 Addressing traces and channels 603 6 4 ...

Page 10: ...Common commands 624 7 3 SCPI command reference 625 7 3 1 CALCulate commands 626 7 3 2 CONFigure commands 811 7 3 3 CONTrol commands 819 7 3 4 DIAGnostic commands 828 7 3 5 DISPlay commands 830 7 3 6 FORMat commands 856 7 3 7 HCOPy commands 857 7 3 8 INITiate commands 863 7 3 9 INSTrument commands 866 7 3 10 MEMory commands 867 7 3 11 MMEMory commands 869 7 3 12 OUTPut commands 906 7 3 13 PROGram c...

Page 11: ...programs 1153 8 2 2 Trace and diagram handling 1153 8 2 3 Using markers 1162 8 2 4 Data handling 1164 8 2 5 Calibration 1168 8 2 6 Fixture modeling 1175 9 Error messages and troubleshooting 1177 9 1 Errors during firmware operation 1177 9 1 1 Asynchronous errors 1178 9 1 2 Errors during measurement 1178 9 2 Errors during firmware installation update 1179 9 3 Collecting information for technical su...

Page 12: ...erfaces and connectors 1190 12 3 1 Rear panel connectors 1190 12 3 2 LAN interface 1192 12 3 3 GPIB interface 1193 12 3 4 Handler I O universal interface 1196 12 4 Showroom mode 1204 12 5 ENA emulation commands 1204 Glossary Frequently used terms 1212 List of commands 1218 Index 1240 www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 13: ...he Rohde Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards To use the products safely follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits Intended use and limits are described in the product documenta...

Page 14: ...ury If you mount products in a rack ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer Always install the prod ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack Connecting to power The product is an overvoltage category II product Connect the product to...

Page 15: ...he product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage Electrical hazard Indicates live parts Risk of electric shock fire personal injury or even death Hot surface Do not touch Risk of skin burns Risk of fire Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground This connec tion protects you against electric shock if an electric p...

Page 16: ...nformation R S ZND 16 User Manual 1173 9557 02 61 1 3 Korea certification class A 이 기기는 업무용 A급 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 Korea certification class A www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 17: ...ic S parame ter data Activate deactivate Simulation Noise from the analyzer GUI deactivated per default See Chapter 4 7 22 R S ZNXSIM on page 228 Unidirectional R S ZND now support automatic calibration OSM at port 1 Trans Norm and One Path Two Ports with source port 1 De embedding of virtual networks combined with scalar power calibration See Chapter 5 11 3 3 Power Meter Transmission Coefficients...

Page 18: ...etter accuracy the Compression Point trace statistic is now calculated using the a wave instead of the stimulus axis if possible New Arbitrary Power tab in Port Settings dialog gives access to power conver sion settings See Arbitrary Power tab on page 444 Marker values for wave and ratio traces in complex diagrams polar coordinates Optional display of X axis grid labels in cartesian diagrams with ...

Page 19: ...ment DELete ALL did not delete all port assignments Subsequent port assignment definitions failed Communication via VXI 11 did not work after a firmware update from firmware ver sion 3 0 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe OFF did not disable the display of information popups Marker format dB Mag Phase Incorrect magnitude calculation for certain trace formats Time sweeps Inapplicable error popup Sweep time...

Page 20: ...e found the marker info field was hidden permanently SENSe Ch CDLL STATe DllName Boolean did not accept boo lean ON µ1 and µ2 in Stability parameter selection combo box erroneously prepended with Å CALCulate Ch DATA CHANnel ALL failed if between measurement and data retrieval a lower numbered channel was deleted Mouse wheel scrolls in dialogs were propagated to the diagram area with unde sired sid...

Page 21: ...of the user manual are available as help in the R S ZND The help offers quick context sensitive access to the complete information for the instrument and its firmware The user manual is also available for download or for immediate display on the Inter net 2 2 3 Service manual Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications module replace ment and repair firmware update trouble...

Page 22: ...hure datasheet ZND 2 2 7 Release notes and open source acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software 2 2 8 Application notes application cards white papers etc These documents deal with...

Page 23: ... Lifting and carrying the product on page 13 3 1 2 Unpacking and checking 1 Unpack the R S ZND carefully 2 Retain the original packing material Use it when transporting or shipping the R S ZND later 3 Using the delivery notes check the equipment for completeness 4 Check the equipment for damage If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged contact Rohde Schwarz 3 1 3 Choosing the operating...

Page 24: ...t on a bench top To place the product on a bench top 1 Place the product on a stable flat and level surface Ensure that the surface can support the weight of the product For information on the weight see the data sheet 2 CAUTION Foldable feet can collapse See Setting up the product on page 14 Always fold the feet completely in or out With folded out feet do not place any thing on top or underneath...

Page 25: ...uct on page 14 2 NOTICE Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack To mount the R S ZND in a rack 1 Use an adapter kit to prepare the R S ZND for rack mounting a Order the rack adapter kit R S ZZA KN5 order number 1175 3040 00 b Mount the adapter kit Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter ...

Page 26: ...ctor Requirement RF cables PORT 1 PORT N Double shielded BNC cables various Double shielded DB 25 USER PORT Double shielded GPIB Standard cable Handler I O Standard cable DVI D Monitor 2 ferrite cores LAN At least CAT6 S FTP USB Standard cables length 3m Signal input and output levels Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to a...

Page 27: ... to the AC power connector and in the data sheet 3 If necessary also ground the product using the grounding terminal The maximum power consumption and the typical power consumption of the individual analyzer models are listed in the data sheet 3 1 7 Switching the instrument on and off To switch on the R S ZND 1 Switch the AC power switch to position I On The AC power switch is located in the upper...

Page 28: ... power source 3 1 8 Standby and ready state The standby toggle key is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel In standby state the right amber LED is on The standby power only supplies the power switch circuits In this state it is safe to switch the AC power off and disconnect the instrument from the power supply In ready state the left green LED is on and all modules are power suppli...

Page 29: ...nistrator In the factory configuration 894129 is preset as a password for both users To protect the analyzer from unauthorized access it is recommended to change the preset pass words To switch from one user account to another log off from Windows and then log on again The switch user functionality is disabled on the R S ZND Service packs and updates Microsoft regularly creates security updates an...

Page 30: ...3 1 10 Minimizing the VNA application With a minimized VNA application you can access your analyzer s Windows desktop or run other applications To exit the default full screen mode of the VNA application deselect SYSTEM DIS PLAY View Bar Title Bar Task Bar Then use the standard Windows titlebar functions to minimize maximize close the application window To start the VNA application with a minimize...

Page 31: ...1 Connecting a monitor A standard monitor can be connected to the DVI D connector on the rear panel of the R S ZND No extra configuration is required Safety aspects The monitor must be connected while the instrument is switched off or in standby mode Otherwise correct operation cannot be guaranteed Select SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Hard Key Panel On from the menu bar of the VNA application window to ...

Page 32: ...nting SYSTEM PRINT the analyzer checks whether a printer is connec ted and turned on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed Printer driver installation If necessary the printer driver installation is initiated using the operating system s Add Printer Wizard The wizard is self explanatory A printer driver must be installed only once A great variety of printer drivers is available o...

Page 33: ...or another instru ment For both connection types you can use either crossover or straight through patch cables The IP address information is displayed in the SYSTEM SETUP Remote Set tings softtool tab 3 2 Instrument tour This chapter gives an overview of the control elements and connectors of the R S ZND and gives all information that is necessary to put the instrument into opera tion and connect ...

Page 34: ...nual operation on page 40 The following sections contain further useful information about manual control of the instrument Refer to the other sections in chapter Chapter 3 3 Operating the instrument on page 40 to learn how to handle traces and diagrams and how to use menus keys and softtools Refer to Chapter 4 2 1 Display elements of a diagram on page 86 to obtain information about the results in ...

Page 35: ...CALE settings define how traces are scaled The TRACE CONFIG settings store traces to the memory and perform mathemat ical operations on traces The LINES settings define limits for the measurement results visualize them in the diagrams and activate deactivate the limit check The MARKER settings position markers on a trace configure their properties and select the format of the numerical readout Mar...

Page 36: ...ile the cursor is placed on a data input field in a dialog or in the Help navigation pane The keys 0 to 9 enter the corresponding numbers The function of the and keys depends on the data type of the active input field In numeric input fields the keys enter the decimal point and a negative sign for the entered numeric value Multiple entries have not effect In character input fields the keys enter a...

Page 37: ...keypad are used to navigate within the touchscreen and the help system to access and control active elements The Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys are used to Scroll up and down in lists e g among menu items in a list of keywords in the Help table of contents or in the Help index Navigate between table rows in diagrams Press OK to toggle between navigation mode and data entries Increase and decrease ...

Page 38: ...For a measurement example refer to Chapter 3 4 2 Reflection S parameter measurement on page 72 With 2 test ports full two port measurements are possible see Chapter 4 3 1 S parameters on page 109 However to use port 2 of a R S ZND as driving port you need one of the bidirec tional measurements options R S ZND K5 for a R S ZND without extended frequency range option R S ZND K1 R S ZND K6 for a R S ...

Page 39: ...connector used as an input and output for low volt age 3 3 V TTL control signals See Chapter 12 3 1 1 USER PORT on page 1190 EXT TRIG IN and EXT TRIG OUT are two BNC connectors for 5 V TTL external trigger signals See Chapter 5 10 3 Trigger tab on page 377 REF OUT is a BNC output for the internal reference frequency of the R S ZND Use this connector to synchronize other instruments to the analyzer...

Page 40: ...frontpanel keys via locally connected keyboard and mouse see Chapter 3 1 11 Connecting external accessories on page 31 or via Remote Desktop see also Chapter 12 1 2 Remote operation in a LAN on page 1186 Alternatively it can be remote controlled via the GPIB interface or a LAN connection Manual operation and remote control are described to their full extent in the GUI refer ence and Command refere...

Page 41: ...cting Display View Bar Hard Key Panel On from the main menu The following table shows possible touchscreen operations with the corresponding mouse operations Touchscreen Mouse Typical task Tap control element for a short time Click control element left mouse button Select button or tab Tap for an extended time tap and hold Click right button Open context menu Tap twice double tap Double click left...

Page 42: ...nal R S ZND 3 Select a control element e g Z S11 The diagram immediately reflects your selection The active trace shows the mea surement results for the selected measured quantity A control element with three dots e g SYSTEM SETUP Setup System Con fig opens a dialog containing a group of related settings a wizard or additional information Operating the instrument www allice de Allice Messtechnik G...

Page 43: ...he diagram immediately reflects your selection The active trace shows the mea surement results for the selected measured quantity At the same time the related softtool tab is opened Using context menus Context menus are another alternative for quick access to instrument settings 1 Touch and hold right click the measured quantity section in the trace info for a couple of seconds until the context m...

Page 44: ... left unidirectional R S ZND right bidirectional R S ZND 2 Select S Parameter to open the Meas S Params softtool tab left unidirectional R S ZND right bidirectional R S ZND 3 Select Z Sij Z S11 Operating the instrument www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 45: ... several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function Using a function key on the virtual hardkey panel to open the related softtool rec ommended provides all settings Using the menus and submenus of the menu bar alternative to the previous method Using the context menus of certain display objects for important actions in the context of this object Using the icons in the toolbar above the...

Page 46: ...lt the analyzer GUI is shown in full screen mode covering the whole screen and hiding the Windows taskbar However you can toggle the full screen mode using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Title and Task Bar On If full screen mode is switched off the main application window of the vector network analyzer application provides a standard Windows title bar 3 3 2 2 Toolbar The toolbar above the diagram area co...

Page 47: ...rash icon or an arbitrary trace drag drop its trace info field to the trash icon Or delete all markers of a trace drag drop the marker info field to the trash icon These icons provide the following actions from left to right Print the current diagrams to a bitmap file same as SYSTEM FILE Print To File By default all diagrams are printed no matter if displayed or not However you can also choose to ...

Page 48: ...ow the diagram area As in any Windows application menus can be controlled with the touchscreen or a mouse A short tap left mouse click expands a menu or submenu If a menu com mand has no submenu assigned a short tap left mouse click opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command When a sub menu is selected the R S ZND displays the corresponding softtool Overview of menu functions The File m...

Page 49: ...h the network analyzer and its operation You can toggle the visibility of the menu bar using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Menu Bar 3 3 2 5 Menu structure All menus show an analogous structure A menu command with a right arrow expands a submenu with further related set tings Example Marker expands a submenu with marker related properties A menu command with three dots appended calls up a dialog providin...

Page 50: ... S ZND it is hidden by default You can display the Hard Key panel using one of the following methods Select SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Hard Key Panel Select Display View Bar Hard Key Panel On from the menu bar Select Hard Key from the context menu of the softtool panel 3 3 2 7 Status bar The status bar shows the active channel the current channel s sweep averaging counter e g Ch i Avg 9 10 or Ch i Av...

Page 51: ... is too fast to be monitored e g because the number of sweep points is low You can hide show the sta tus bar using SYSTEM DISPLAY View Bar Status Bar 3 3 3 Working with dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way The settings are visualized if possible An example is shown below All dialogs are operated in a similar way To open ...

Page 52: ...nt results as traces in rectangular diagrams Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace The following section presents some of the graphical tools the R S ZND pro vides for trace and marker handling For further reference Refer to Chapter 4 Concepts and features on page 74 to learn more about traces channels and screen elements 3 3 4 1 Adding n...

Page 53: ...ether you want to add a new diagram The highlighted area indicates the target diagram 3 In the dialog box that is opened when you release the New Trace icon select the S parameter to be measured left bidirectional R S ZND right unidirectional R S ZND The R S ZND generates a new trace for the selected S parameter Operating the instrument www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 54: ...rker icon from the toolbar to the desired position in the target diagram The marker appears on the target diagram s active trace The marker info field dis plays the stimulus value x axis value and response value y axis value at the marker position The response value varies as the analyzer continues performing sweeps Active trace alternative control elements The trace line of the active trace in th...

Page 55: ...ines and disable the limit check drag and drop the PASS FAIL message onto the Delete icon The limit line itself is not deleted you can re use it any time The context menu of some display elements also provides the Delete function Undo function If you happen to delete a display element unintentionally you can restore it using the Undo toolbar icon 3 3 4 4 Using drag and drop You can drag and drop m...

Page 56: ...several pre defined positions Delete See Chapter 3 3 4 3 Deleting display elements on page 55 3 3 5 Entering data The analyzer provides dialogs with various types of input fields where you can enter numeric values and character data Data entry with a mouse and an external keyboard is a standard procedure known from other Windows applications However there are various other ways to enter data 3 3 5...

Page 57: ...t of the current cursor position Press ENTER to complete an entry Press ESC to discard the entries made 3 To enter letters other than G M or K you can also use one of the methods descri bed in the following sections Chapter 3 3 5 3 Using the analyzer s on screen keyboard on page 58 Chapter 3 3 5 4 Using the Windows on screen keyboard on page 58 3 3 5 2 Using the numeric editor The Numeric Editor i...

Page 58: ...l 3 3 5 3 Using the analyzer s on screen keyboard The on screen Keyboard allows you to enter characters in particular letters without an external keyboard It is available for all text input fields in the analyzer GUI 1 Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog 2 Double tap click the input field to open the on screen keyboard 3 Select character buttons to compose the input str...

Page 59: ...ing the graphical zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram zoom win dow to fill the entire diagram area The sweep points are not affected The graphical zoom function is only supported for cartesian trace formats For inver ted Smith and polar diagrams it is not available To activate the graphical zoom Select the Zoom Config icon in the toolbar above the diagra...

Page 60: ...cal direction In general the zoom window covers only a part of the sweep range the horizontal distance between the sweep points increases The reduced display range is indicated in an additional zoom line in the channel info area Use the Zoom Reset icon to restore the original diagram Alternatively you can drag and drop the Zoom label from the additional channel info line onto the toolbar but ton O...

Page 61: ...oom the stimulus range keeping the number of sweep points constant use the Zoom Config toolbar icon and select Mode Stimulus Zoom Then use the Zoom Select icon to narrow the sweep range and adjust the vertical scaling Refer to the R S ZND Help or User Manual for details 3 3 6 2 Setting the sweep range The sweep range for all related channels is displayed in the channel info area at the bottom of e...

Page 62: ... the Ref Value are indicated in the scale section of the trace info In the example below a Scale Div of 10 dB and a Ref Value of 0 dB is used To change such a scale parameter use one of the following methods Open the TRACE SCALE Scale Values softtool tab and proceed from there Tap and hold with a mouse right click the scale section in the trace info and select a setting from the context menu Selec...

Page 63: ...ter from the context menu Select the parameter from the Trace Scale menu Use the Set by Marker functions see Chapter 3 3 6 6 Set by marker on page 63 3 3 6 6 Set by marker The Set by Marker functions are a convenient tool for scaling in particular magnify ing diagrams without entering explicit numeric values You simply place a marker to a trace point and use the marker values to change the sweep r...

Page 64: ... trace towards the upper diagram edge leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div and the overall vertical scale unchanged Analogously select Min Marker to move the trace towards the lower diagram edge or select Ref Val Marker to move the trace towards the Ref Value You can also use marker values in the Numeric Editor see Chapter 3 3 5 2 Using the numeric editor on page 57 3 3 6 7 Enlar...

Page 65: ...the receiver and source settings measurement bandwidth source power 6 Perform a calibration 3 4 1 Transmission S parameter measurement In a transmission measurement the analyzer transmits a stimulus signal to the input port of the device under test DUT and measures the transmitted wave at the DUT s output port The trace settings allow you to select the measured quantities and display formats depen...

Page 66: ...e sweep range and other parameters After a system preset the display shows a diagram with a dB magnitude scale and the S parameter S21 is selected as a measured quantity This S parameter is the forward transmission coefficient of the DUT It is defined as the ratio of the transmitted wave at the DUT s output port port no 2 to the incident wave at the DUT s input port port no 1 The R S ZND automatic...

Page 67: ...trace leaving an appropriate display margin Tip Refer to Chapter 3 3 6 Scaling diagrams on page 59 to learn more about the different methods and tools for diagram scaling 3 4 1 3 Calibrating the instrument Calibration system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic reprodu cible errors from the measurement results E g in the current test setup the connect ing cables between the an...

Page 68: ...ombination Port 1 P1 and Port 2 P2 and the calibration type Trans Norm Make sure to define port 1 as the source port Tip For a unidirectional R S ZND only port 1 can be the source port Hence cali brations that require both ports as driving port are not available 4 Select Next to proceed to the next page of the Calibration Setting wizard 5 Select the test port connector type and gender here N 50 Ω ...

Page 69: ...get indicates the standard measurements that make up a Trans Norm calibration Select Through mm to initiate the measurement of the connected Through stan dard Measuring the isolation between ports 1 and 2 is optional Skip it for now Performing measurements www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 70: ... display and analyze the measure ment data For instance you can use markers to determine maxima and minima on the trace and change the display format to obtain information about the group delay of the transmitted wave 1 Select TRACE MARKER Markers Mkr 1 This places marker M1 to its default position center of the sweep range A marker symbol triangle appears on the trace a marker info field in the u...

Page 71: ...essories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN Refer to Chapter 3 1 11 Connecting external accessories on page 31 and Chapter 12 1 2 Remote operation in a LAN on page 1186 to obtain information about the necessary steps 1 Activate the SYSTEM FILE Trace Data softtool tab 2 In the Trace Data softtool tab select Export ASCII to open the Export Data ASCII Files di...

Page 72: ...ata Only one analyzer test port is required for reflection measure ments In principle a reflection measurement involves the same steps as a transmission mea surement Note the following differences The basic test setup for reflection measurements involves a single DUT and ana lyzer port For instance you can connect the input of your DUT to port 1 of the ana lyzer as shown below VNA 1 DUT 1 You can ...

Page 73: ... measurements For instance you can display the measured reflection coefficient S11 in a Smith chart to obtain the complex input impedance at port 1 Proceed as described in Chapter 3 1 7 Switching the instrument on and off on page 27 to shut down your analyzer Performing measurements www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 74: ...n of results To ensure that the instrument resour ces are easily accessible and that user defined configurations can be conveniently implemented stored and reused the instrument uses a hierarchy of structures Global resources can be used for all measurements irrespective of the current measurement session A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system chan nel trace a...

Page 75: ... contains setup instructions i e information on how to measure how to process the measurement results and how to display the processed results It does not contain any trace or result data 4 1 3 Traces channels and diagrams The analyzer arranges displays or stores the measured data in traces which are assigned to channels and displayed in diagrams To understand the functions of the instrument and q...

Page 76: ...s can be accessed via the keys in the TRACE section of the virtual hardkey panel They complement the Channel settings accessible via the STIMULUS and CHANNEL sections Each trace is assigned to a channel The channel settings apply to all traces of the channel 4 1 3 2 Channel settings A channel contains hardware related settings which specify how the network analyzer collects data The channel settin...

Page 77: ...th no traces are not indicated in the diagrams but can be accessed via the Channel Manager dialog In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined In remote control each channel contains an active trace See also Chapter 6 3 Basic remote control concepts on page 600 4 1 4 Sweep control A sweep is a series of consecutive measurement...

Page 78: ...Chapter 4 3 1 S parameters on page 109 For a complete two port S parameter measurement e g S11 S21 S12 S22 the analyzer needs to interchange the roles of the source and receive ports Each sweep point requires two partial measurements To improve the accuracy it is possible to insert a delay time before each partial mea surement To use port 2 of a R S ZND as driving port you need the suitable bidire...

Page 79: ...event starts n partial sweeps over all sweep points Trigger event starts m complete measurements at consecutive sweep points Sweep Segment Trigger event starts n partial sweeps over the next segment Trigger event starts complete mea surements at all consecutive sweep points in the segment Point All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one after another All partial measurements ...

Page 80: ...ning In the current implementation setup based pipelining calculations are synchronized to the end of the sweep sequence when all channels of the active setup are swept the firmware waits until all data has been calculated before starting the next sweep sequence With active pipelining the measurement result e g a pass fail will be available when the next measurement is already running Depending on...

Page 81: ...T STOP CENTER and SPAN depends on the sweep type Table 4 1 Function of STIMULUS keys Sweep type START unit STOP unit CENTER unit SPAN unit Lin Freq Start Frequency Hz Stop Frequency Hz Center Frequency Hz Span Frequency Hz Log Freq Start Frequency Hz Stop Frequency Hz Segmented Power Start Power dBm Stop Power dBm CW Frequency Hz CW Frequency Hz CW Mode CW Frequency Hz Number of Points CW Frequenc...

Page 82: ...he measurement The other sweep parameters e g the Sweep Time are set via CHANNEL SWEEP Sweep Params Time The stimulus hardkeys define the fixed stimulus frequency CW Frequency and the total sweep time Stop Time of the measurement The other sweep parame ters e g the Number of Points are set via CHANNEL SWEEP Sweep Par ams The sweep time is entered in seconds and must be positive The selected sweep ...

Page 83: ...quantities without wave de embedding SYSTEM ERROR CORRECTION Factory 0 a b 1 2 3 Data access points 0 Raw wave quantities 1 Factory calibrated S parameters 2 S parameters 3 Balanced symmetric S parameters a b apply cal pool data copy to cal pool S parameters no conversion CMRR Converted impedances Converted admittances Stability factors Traces Channel data flow for all traces of the channel Trace ...

Page 84: ...ing remains in the wave quantity conductance domain and calculates all de embedding steps in one multiplication step without unnecessary matrix inversions With wave de embedding the computation time does not depend on the number of embedding and or de embedding steps but is constant 4 1 5 2 Trace data flow The diagram below illustrates the processing stages the channel measurement data run through...

Page 85: ...data 5 Export complex data with trace math 6 Export formatted data SHIFT RESPONSE TIME DOMAIN GATE TRACE FORMAT SMOOTH SHIFT HOLD Formatted TRACE MATH DISPLAYED QUANTITY 6 5 Trace data flow for individual traces Requires Time Domain option Before entering this block converted impedances and converted admittances are re converted to S parameters and converted back after the block Basic concepts www...

Page 86: ...mber of traces which can be assigned to different channels Most diagram settings are arranged in the Display softtool hardkey SYSTEM DIS PLAY To assign traces and channels to diagrams use the control elements on the Trace Config Traces and Channel Config Channels softtool tabs hardkeys TRACE TRACE CONFIG and CHANNEL CHANNEL CONFIG Diagrams can contain A title optional The diagram number or label M...

Page 87: ... be either a data trace a memory trace or a mathematical trace see Trace types on page 87 Trace types The analyzer uses traces to display the current measurement result in a diagram It is also capable of storing traces to the memory recalling stored traces and defining mathematical relations between different traces There are three basic trace types Data traces show the current measurement data an...

Page 88: ...The measured quantity e g an S parameter or a ratio appears on a colored background The source port for wave quantities and ratios is indicated in brackets The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisio...

Page 89: ...a symbol e g a triangle a crossbar or a line on the trace which can be a data trace or a memory trace At the same time the coordinates are displayed in a marker info field or in a table Each marker can be defined as a normal marker M reference marker R or delta marker ΔM A normal marker M1 M2 determines the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace The reference marker R defines the referenc...

Page 90: ...ds Drag the marker symbol to the desired position Cartesian diagrams only Activate the Markers tab of the Marker softtool TRACE MARKER and enter the related stimulus value numerically Use the functions on the Marker Search softtool tab to move the marker to a spe cific position If the marker position is adjusted using the roll key the mouse or the cursor keys it always remains within the sweep ran...

Page 91: ...ies Marker Format To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to the reference marker activate the delta mode TRACE Marker Marker Properties Delta Mode Info Table If you wish to reserve the full diagram space for traces you can drag drop the marker info field to the info table The info table is hidden by default To display it open the Display softtool SYSTEM DISPLAY activate its Confi...

Page 92: ...sponse dφ z dω where ω denotes the stimulus frequency Real Real part of z Re z x Imag Imaginary part of z Im z y SWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 z dB Mag Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two lines 20 log z dB arctan Im z Re z Lin Mag Phase Magnitude of z unconverted and phase in two lines z arctan Im z Re z Real Imag Real and imaginary part of z in two lines x y R j X or R j X ser...

Page 93: ...igned to dif ferent traces at the same stimulus value It connects the markers of a set of traces Marker coupling can be enabled either for all traces in the active recall set that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace or for all traces in a channel or for all traces in a diagram that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace When marker coupling is enabled the same markers ...

Page 94: ...ions can be activated repeatedly to find all possible search results Moreover the analyzer provides a Tracking mode where the search is repeated after each sweep Multiple peak search Multiple peak search allows you to find multiple local minima maxima at once Markers 1 to 10 are assigned to the peaks detected from the start frequency towards the stop frequency Multiple peak search uses its own sea...

Page 95: ... the trace value is equal to the maximum minimum value minus plus n dB Upper Edge is the closest frequency above the maximum or minimum where the trace value is equal to the maximum minimum value minus plus n dB The Quality Factor 3 dB is the ratio between the Center frequency and the 3 dB Bandwidth it does not depend on the selected bandwidth factor The Quality Factor BW is the ratio between the ...

Page 96: ...lues behind the color legend show the constant stimulus value which is either the power of the internal signal source for frequency sweeps and time sweeps or the CW frequency for power sweeps and the measurement band width BW Stop indicates the highest value of the sweep variable e g the highest frequency measured corresponding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram Open a segment s context menu...

Page 97: ... Use whatever method is most convenient 4 2 2 Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way All softkeys with three dots behind their labeling as in Balanced Ports call up a dialog The dialogs of the analyzer have an analogous structure and several common control elements Dialogs are controlled in the usual way For an introductio...

Page 98: ...nced Ports dialog Immediate settings can be undone using UNDO 4 2 2 2 Common dialogs Open Dialog The Open File dialog is used to open various file types cal kit data limit lines sweep segment lists Depending on the context the dialog is displayed with different caption default direc tory Traces in the above screenshot and file type filters Context specific options Import Data to New Mem in the abo...

Page 99: ... toggle button Look in specifies the drive and directory in which the data is stored The icons to the right of the pull down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system place the cursor on the icons to obtain Whats this help File name specifies a filename to save the current data The analyzer adds the extension in the Files of type field Files of type selects a particular file type fo...

Page 100: ...nv Smith The VNA firmware allows arbitrary combinations of trace formats and measured quan tities However to extract useful information from the measured data it is important to select a trace format which is appropriate for the analysis of a particular measured quantity see Chapter 4 2 3 3 Measured quantities and trace formats on page 108 4 2 3 1 Cartesian trace formats Cartesian trace formats as...

Page 101: ...sion of complex to real quantities Among the measured quantities the R S ZND supports only Stability factors and Power Sensor results are real All other measured quantities are complex The following table shows how real response values are calculated from complex measurement values z x j y where x y z are functions of the sweep variable The formulas also hold for real measurement values y 0 Trace ...

Page 102: ...ed as a polygonal chain in the complex plane The stimulus axis is not visible However the stimulus value for a given trace point can be displayed using a marker The difference between the different complex trace formats Polar Smith and Inv Smith is the coordinate system that is used for the representation of the response val ues and that is graphically overlaid to the formatted trace Polar For Pol...

Page 103: ...s and phase angles The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Z infinity I 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is one its phase is 180 deg Smith For Smith traces the response values are interpreted as reflection coefficients Sii and represented in terms of their corresponding complex impedance Z Sii R Sii j X Sii In ...

Page 104: ...m represents Z Z0 1 which is the reference impedance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection points between the hori zontal axis and the outer circle the impedance is zero short and infinity open The outer circle corresponds to zero resistance purely imaginary impedance Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower half of the diagram cor...

Page 105: ...he circle with Γ 1 is mapped to the imaginary axis of the Z plane The circles for the points of equal resistance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Z infinity The arcs for the points of equal reactance also belong to circles intersecting at Z infinity open circuit point 1 0 centered on a straight vertical line Examples for special points in the Smith chart The magnitude of the reflecti...

Page 106: ...nstruction The inverted Smith chart is point symmetric to the Smith chart The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance real admittance The center of the diagram represents Y Y0 1 where Y0 is the reference admittance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection points between the horizo...

Page 107: ...inary parts of Γ According to the two equations above the graphical representation in an inverted Smith chart has the following properties Real reflection coefficients are mapped to real admittances conductances The center of the Γ plane Γ 0 is mapped to the reference admittance Y0 whereas the circle with Γ 1 is mapped to the imaginary axis of the Y plane The circles for the points of equal conduc...

Page 108: ...ent complex num bers with zero imaginary part The following table gives an overview of recommended display formats Complex dimensionless quan tities S parameters and ratios Complex quantities with dimensions Wave quantities Z parameters Y parameters impedances admittan ces Real quantities Stability Factors Lin Mag ON ON default for Z parameters Y param eters impedances admittances ON default dB Ma...

Page 109: ... linear equation Meaning of 2 port S parameters The four 2 port S parameters can be interpreted as follows S11 is the reflection coefficient of DUT port 1 i e the ratio between outgoing wave b1 and incident wave a1 in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2 S11 b1 a1 if a1 0 and a2 0 S21 is the forward transmission coefficient defined as the ratio between outgoing wave b2and incident wave a1...

Page 110: ...bed so far number the output and input ports of a DUT the parameters are referred to as single ended S parameters The S parameter description can also be used to differentiate between different propagation modes of the waves at the output and input ports This results in the so called mixed mode S parameters The analyzer measures either single ended or mixed mode S parameters 4 3 2 Reference impeda...

Page 111: ...of raw and renormalized wave quanti ties a0i b0i and a1i b1i S0 and S1 are defined as follows 1 12 11 1 1 12 11 0 02 01 0 0 02 01 n n n n a a a S b b b a a a S b b b The renormalized wave quantities a1 and b1 and the S matrix S1 can be calculated from S0 and the reference impedances Z0i Z1i according to two alternative waveguide circuit theories 1 Traveling waves In the model of Marks and Williams...

Page 112: ...ces The converted impedance parameters Zij 1 i j n describe the input impedances of an n port DUT with fully matched outputs The analyzer converts a single measured S parameter Sij to determine the corresponding converted impedance under the assumption that each of the other ports is terminated with its respective reference impedance Z0k matched circuit parameters As a result converted impedances ...

Page 113: ... impedances Zii depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference impedances are calculated Table 4 4 Calculation of Converted Reflection Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Series transmission impedance A two port transmission parameter Zij i j can describe a pure serial impedance between the two ports U0 I1 I2 U1 U2 U0 Z0j Zij Z0i The calculation formula of a converted seri...

Page 114: ... transmission impedance Zij depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference impedances are calculated Table 4 6 Calculation of Converted Parallel Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Shunt thru measurements The shunt thru method is used for measuring very low impedances A typical applica tion are measurements on power distribution network PDN components such as ...

Page 115: ...s the measured and j the stimulated port The Z parameters for a two port are based on a circuit model that can be expressed with two linear equations 2 22 1 21 2 2 12 1 11 1 I Z I Z V I Z I Z V Meaning of Z parameters The four 2 port Z parameters can be interpreted as follows Z11 is the input impedance defined as the ratio of the voltage V1 to the current I1 measured at port 1 forward measurement ...

Page 116: ...d admittances are the inverse of the Converted impedances 4 3 4 2 Y parameters The Y parameters describe the admittances of a DUT with output ports terminated in a short circuit voltage 0 The analyzer provides the full set of Y parameters including the transfer admittances i e the complete n x n Y matrix for an n port DUT This means that Y parameters can be used as an alternative to S parameters o...

Page 117: ...e S Z and Y matrices represent fixed ratios of complex wave amplitudes As long as the assumption of linearity holds the S Z and Y parameters are independent of the source power The network analyzer provides two additional sets of measurement parameters which have an unambiguous meaning even if the DUT is measured outside its linear range Wave quantities provide the power of any of the transmitted ...

Page 118: ...t connected to DUT port i bi Src Port j denotes the wave outgoing at DUT port i when DUT port j is stimula ted bi is detected at the measurement receiver of the VNA port connected to DUT port i In a standard forward S parameter measurement a1 Src Port 1 is the incident wave and b1 Src Port 1 is the reflected wave at DUT port 1 With a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectiona...

Page 119: ...es see Chap ter 4 3 5 1 Wave quantities on page 117 Given a source port k any ratio between wave quantities ai Src Port k and bj Src Port k can be measured Examples b2 a1 Src Port 1 is the ratio of the outgoing wave at DUT port 2 and the incident wave at DUT port 1 i e DUT port 1 ist stimulated This corresponds to the forward transmission coefficient S21 b1 a1 Src Port 1 is the ratio of the outgoi...

Page 120: ...ulate the ratio A possible application is the comparison of different detector settings for a particular trace Error Messages The analyzer generates a warning if the selected measurement time for the AVG detectors is too long At the same time bit no 15 in the INTegrity HARDware status register is set Reduce the measurement time and or reduce the IF bandwidth until the warning disappears A warning ...

Page 121: ...r the effect of a test fixture it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters Differential and common mode parameters can be evaluated with a single test setup With a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 balanced measurements are not possible 4 3 6 1 Balanced port configurations Defining a balanced log...

Page 122: ...lanced port Log VNA port A balanced port configuration is defined in two steps First select the pairs of physical ports that you want to combine to form balanced ports Second define the two refer ence impedances for the differential and common mode at each balanced port Both steps can be done in a single Balanced Ports dialog The most commonly used bal anced port configurations and impedances are ...

Page 123: ...utput and a2 0 S mout min 12 is the mixed mode reverse transmission coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b1 mode mout reverse measurement with matched input b1 in the figure above and a1 0 to a2 mode min S mout min 22 is the mixed mode output reflection coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b2 mode mout reverse measurement with matched input b2 in the figure ab...

Page 124: ... and 4 forming balanced logical port 2 This means that the ratio S21 S41 of the physical transmission coefficients of an ideal balun equals 1 This ratio is called imbalance it is a measure for the deviation of the balun from ideality The general definition of the transmission imbalance between two differ ent ports at least one of them balanced is given below For a DUT with two balanced ports e g a...

Page 125: ...anced port Log NWA port Balanced port Log NWA port Physical port c Logical port j balanced Physical port d Logical port i balanced Physical port a Physical port b Imbji Sca Scb Sda Sdb for i j CMRRji Sddji Sccji Differential Imbalance A differential imbalance can also be calculated if the second balanced DUT port is connected to two single ended logical ports DUT Balanced port Balanced port Log NW...

Page 126: ...s μ1 and μ2 The μ1 and μ2 factors both provide a necessary and sufficient condition for uncondi tional stability The conditions μ1 1 or μ2 1 are both equivalent to unconditional stability This means that μ1 and μ2 provide direct insight into the degree of stability or potential instability of linear circuits References Marion Lee Edwards and Jeffrey H Sinsky A New Criterion for Linear 2 Port Stabi...

Page 127: ...es Some of the operations e g the time domain transform require additional software options see Chapter 4 7 Optional extensions and accessories on page 200 The R S ZND can also check whether the measured values comply with specified lim its and export trace data using different file formats 4 4 1 Limit check A limit line restricts the allowed range for some or all points of a trace i e for a certa...

Page 128: ...aces few restrictions on the definition of limit line segments The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order e g the Start Stimulus value of segment no n does not have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of segment no n 1 Overlapping segments are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area is rela ted to the tight...

Page 129: ...ation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps While Show Limit Line is active the diagrams display all limit line segments Exception In a segmented frequency sweep with point based x axis gaps between the segments are minimized To facilitate the interpretation the R S ZND displays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion the ti...

Page 130: ...ler than the Start Stimu lus value of range no n 1 Overlapping ranges are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area is related to the tighter limit the pass test involves a logical AND operation Gaps between ranges are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate ripple limit range Ripple limit ranges can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range however the limits are only...

Page 131: ... by its center coordi nate in the diagram and its radius Depending on the diagram type circle limit can serve different purposes With a circle limit line centered on the origin of a polar diagram you can check whether the magnitude of the measurement results exceeds a limit defined by the radius of the limit line With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram Z infinity y...

Page 132: ...7 02 61 With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram Y infinity you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance Im Y sus ceptance falls below a limit Operations on traces www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 133: ...limit and is stored in the directory shown in the Save Limit Line and Recall Limit Line dialogs The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of the list Example of a limit line file The limit line is described by the limit line file Operations on traces www allice de Allice M...

Page 134: ...he entries of all editable columns of the list Example of a ripple limit file The ripple limit list is described by the ripple limit file Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R S ZNx and R S ZVx families use the same file format Ripple limit files can be interchanged without restriction 4 4 2 Trace files The R S ZND can store one or several data or memory traces to a file or load a...

Page 135: ...ork ports The following displays an s1p export file in Version 1 1 ZNx format HZ S RI R 50 00 Rohde Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer Rohde Schwarz ZND 2Port 1328517092100019 3 20 Created UTC 12 24 2020 5 20 26 PM My Comment freq Hz re S11 im S11 1 000000000000000E5 4 797521848131441E 1 3 884969211858050E 2 4 259950000000000E7 4 775411290143956E 1 3 449207594050335E 2 1 3 4 5 2 6 1 option line 2 VNA...

Page 136: ...sets the reference resistance to the real part of this impedance Other wise it sets it to 50 With the exception of the opening symbol and the value following R option line parameters can appear in any order If a parameter is missing the default value is assumed Comments Comments can be used for any kind of documentation purpose e g to describe the network parameter data and how they were generated...

Page 137: ...zation of S parameters on page 141 For the Version 2 0 export format the port impedances are currently not written to the renormalization information comment Instead the real parts of the port impedances appear as arguments of the Reference keyword Network data table header These comment lines indicate the content of the Network parameter data table right below it As the first column of the data t...

Page 138: ...balanced ports the port assignment looks like in the following example Port Assignments Nominal Port Actual Test Port 1 D1 2 2 C1 2 The s1p Active Trace export which allows to dump an arbitrary S parameter trace to an s1p file explicitly mentions the exported parameter Trace info Nominal Param Actual Exported Buffer S11 S21 User comment The analyzer s trace export function allows you to insert a c...

Page 139: ...ported S parameter data were renormalized with port specific impedances the real parts of these impedances are listed as arguments of the Reference keyword Overrides the common reference impedance of the Option line on page 135 Note currently ignored during import Mixed Mode Order Mixed Mode Order D1 2 C1 2 Required if a balanced port is involved In the example to the left nominal port 1 is the di...

Page 140: ...tandard n 1 f N11 n 2 f N11 N21 N12 N22 n 3 4 f N11 N12 N13 N21 N22 N13 N31 N32 N33 Similar matrix arrangement for n 4 n 4 For n 4 the max four parameters per data line restriction applies It is over come by wrapping the matrix row at multiples of four network parameter values For n 9 this logic results in the following arrangement f N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N21 N95 N96 N97 N98 N99 The ...

Page 141: ...anced Params during export Export of balanced symmetric S parameters must be enabled If you want to export balanced S parameters make sure that all these parameters are mea sured and that for each involved balanced port both physical ports are part of the export This type of export can be initiated from the GUI by using the s n p Port or snp Free Config functions of the Trace Data tab or by the re...

Page 142: ...r output format Re Im lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase respectively The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog imTrace1 second response value of first trace im Trace_Name for output for mat Re Im ang Trace_Name for output formats lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog reTrace2 first response value of sec...

Page 143: ...mat if you want to import and process the trace data in Matlab 4 4 3 Memory mapped trace data transfer The VNA firmware uses the Named Shared Memory Windows feature to share trace data with other processes running on the instrument Such processes or applications can read trace data directly from the shared memory which is much faster than using SCPI commands Multiple traces can be written to the s...

Page 144: ...w this offset Its size depends on whether the first trace data block contains formatted real or unformatted complex values c Use SYSTem DATA MEMory OFFSet to query the offset of the last added trace 3 Create the named shared memory buffer SYSTem DATA MEMory COMMit ShMemName The name must be unique Before the COMMit you can use SYSTem DATA MEMory CATalog to query the names of existing shared memory...

Page 145: ...data 3 The system error correction data is used to correct the measurement results of a DUT that is measured instead of the standards Calibration is always channel specific because it depends on the hardware settings in particular on the sweep range This means that a system error correction data set is stored with the calibrated channel The analyzer provides a wide range of sophisticated calibrati...

Page 146: ...ally enabled as single ended logical ports An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement i e the port is not required by any trace of the related channel is disabled 4 5 1 Calibration types The analyzer provides a wide range of calibration types for one two or more ports The calibration types differ in the number and types of standards used the error terms i e the type of systematic error...

Page 147: ... match Transmission track ing High Reflection and transmission mea surements classi cal 12 term error correction model TOM 2 port Open Match at both ports Through between all port pairs All Reflection tracking Source match Directivity Load match Transmission track ing High Reflection and transmission mea surements TSM 2 port Short Match at both ports Through between all port pairs All Reflection t...

Page 148: ...asure the required parameters with best accuracy Normalization reflection transmission 148 Reflection OSM calibration 149 One Path Two Ports Calibration 149 TOSM and UOSM calibration 150 Adapter removal 151 TOM calibration 152 TSM calibration 152 TRM calibration 153 TRL calibration 153 TNA calibration 155 Full n Port calibration with reduced number of Through connections 156 Complementary isolatio...

Page 149: ...A reflection OSM calibration is more accurate than a normalization but is only applica ble for reflection measurements 4 5 1 3 One Path Two Ports Calibration A one path two ports calibration combines a reflection OSM full one port calibration with a transmission normalization The fully calibrated port is termed the node port This calibration type requires a Short an Open and a Match standard to be...

Page 150: ...hrough must be measured in both directions so the number of standard measurements calibration sweeps is 8 The calibration provides 10 error terms no isolation terms are available With a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 both TOSM and UOSM calibration are unavaila ble Manual TOSM calibration supports Complementary isolation measu...

Page 151: ...must include as a minimum the standards that are used for one port calibration The through connection between test ports with different connector types must be made using adapters The problem here is that unlike Through standards adapters are usually not character ized i e their delay time transmission phase is unknown If the adapter fulfills the reciprocity condition S21 S12 it can serve as Unkno...

Page 152: ...n electrical length that can be different from zero an Open and a Match The characteristics of all standards must be fully known the Match can have non ideal characteristics With a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 TOM calibration is not available 4 5 1 7 TSM calibration A TSM Through Short Match calibration requires a low refle...

Page 153: ...t is needed The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero its phase must be roughly known 90 deg The magnitude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports TRL calibration is especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology e g test fixtures on wafer measurements where it is difficult to design and connect ...

Page 154: ...measured standards for a two port calibration is shown below For a TRL calibration with 1 Line the Reflect standard at both ports the Through and one Line standard must be measured For a TRL calibration with 2 Lines a second Line standard must be measured in addition For a TRM extension the Reflect and Match standards at both ports and the Through must be measured See also Chapter 4 5 2 3 Sliding ...

Page 155: ...ractice TRL is only practicable above a threshold frequency c0 18 llong lthr where llong denotes the lon gest electrical length of the used Line standards and lthr the electrical length of the Through The analyzer assumes lthr llong and uses c0 18 llong as the frequency threshold E g for a line with llong 16 666 cm the threshold frequency is 100 MHz At frequencies below this threshold frequency TR...

Page 156: ...or the mathematically inclined the graph constructed from the calibration ports as nodes and the measured Throughs as edges must be connected If an external switch matrix is configured and you want to calibrate three or more test ports that are all on the same submatrix then an extra Through measurement is required Complement the minimum set of n 1 Throughs as explained above by an additional Thro...

Page 157: ...esponse of the calibration standards i e their S parame ters must be known or predictable within a given frequency range The standards are grouped into several types Open Through Match correspond ing to the different input quantities for the analyzer s error models The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties The circuit model depends on several pa...

Page 158: ...reflection symmetric stan dard two port Offset parameters The offset parameters have the following physical meaning The delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard The electrical length is equal to the delay times the speed of light in the vacuum It is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane For a waveguide with...

Page 159: ...ite impedance value Moreover no loss or offset loss can be set Offset parameters and standard types Offset parameters are used to describe all types of standards except the Sliding Match and the Attenuation The Sliding Match is a one port standard with variable load parameters sliding load and unspecified length The reference impedance is fixed and equal to the characteristic impedance of the conn...

Page 160: ...be an idealized calibration kit for each connector type see below Make sure to use universal or individual parameter sets if you need to obtain high pre cision results The precision of the calibration kit parameters determines the accuracy of the system error correction and of the measurements The R S ZND displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set to calibrate a channel Calibra...

Page 161: ...and further corrects this match point fol lowing I Kása s circle fitting algorithm To obtain the reflection coefficient for a perfectly matched calibration standard the Slid ing Match must be measured at least at 3 positions which should be unequally spaced to avoid overlapping data points Increasing the number of positions to 4 to 6 can improve the accuracy Moreover using the predefined load posi...

Page 162: ...rent import file formats are supported R S ZVA specific binary cal kit files calkit R S ZVR specific binary cal kit files ck cal kit files in Key sight specific ASCII formats csv prn Importing older R S ZVR cal kit files On loading some older R S ZVR specific ck files e g the R S ZV Z23 cal kit file the R S ZND generates the message File does not comply with instrument calibration kit file format ...

Page 163: ...Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets Each cal group is stored in a separate file named CalGroup_name cal The cal group name can be changed in the Calibration Manager dialog One of the available cal groups can be set as Preset User Cal i e the user correction data that should be restored after a user de...

Page 164: ...ibration unit so that the analyzer can calculate the error terms and apply the calibration without any further input Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration because There is no need to connect several standards manually The number of connec tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports Invalid calibrations due t...

Page 165: ...tialized the new hardware When the unit is connected for the first time this may take longer than in normal use The unit is ready to be used see Chapter 4 5 5 2 Performing an automatic calibra tion on page 166 Recommended use The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R S ZND network ana lyzers following the procedure described above You can also connect the unit before switching on...

Page 166: ...before starting the calibration Refer to the specifications of the calibration unit for details To ensure best accuracy the analyzer automatically reduces the source power to 10 dBm If the test setup contains a large attenuation deactivate Auto Power Set ting for Cal Unit in the Calibration tab of the System Config dialog Ensure an input power of 10 dBm at the ports of the calibration unit please ...

Page 167: ...work ana lyzer must be properly calibrated with the reference plane at the input ports of the modified cal unit to be characterized The procedure involves the following steps 1 Perform a calibration of your network analyzer using the test setup and the calibra tion type you wish to perform with your calibration unit 2 Connect the calibration unit to the network analyzer 3 Access the Characterize C...

Page 168: ...line calibration system ICS R S ZN Z3x allows recalibrating a running measurement setup without mechanically changing it For each DUT port an inline calibration unit ICU is inserted between the corresponding VNA test port and the DUT The ICU remains within the signal path throughout the measurement low loss through path and on request of the VNA performs a full one port calibration OSM in situ For...

Page 169: ... Z3x product pages at https www rohde schwarz com product NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3 Firmware integration The control connection between R S ZND and ICC is established via USB After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC Calibration www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 170: ...ugh into the ICU s OSM standards is necessary because the ICU remains in situ For this reason during ICU characterizations the Through measurement is mandatory Workflow 1 Configure the ICS as required connecting all the ICUs to the ICC via CAN bus 2 Connect the ICC to the VNA via USB 3 Perform user characterizations of the connected ICUs optional a Attach the cabling adapters that are required to ...

Page 171: ...ored characterization It requires an R S calibration unit Cal validation works with at most 4 calibrated ports and with 2 and 4 port calibration units Calibration validation provides an automated single click basic mode and an advanced mode for detailed validation and adjustment of limit tolerances reporting and SCPI automation Basic mode When Cal Validation is launched for the first time it runs ...

Page 172: ...ough the connected ports p 1 4 in ascending order measuring Spp for the Open Short and Match standard It then compares the measured Spp values with the corresponding reflection S parameters of the cal unit s factory characterization The on screen feedback indicates success PASS failure FAIL or provides a warning about undetected ports Calibration www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 173: ...en the different calibration stages assignments It can also cause a loss of accuracy because only a subset of all possi ble through connections is measured To calibrate n test ports with an m port calibration unit m n the calibration unit has to be reconnected at least n m times Each of these re connections is described by its port assignment i e the mapping of calibration unit ports to test ports...

Page 174: ...eneric conditions stated above with unordered Throughs the number of assignments must be as small as possible Additional condition The cal unit port assigned to a given test port must be the same in all assignments Again this minimizes the number of port reconnec tions between the calibration stages Same as for One Path Two Port calibrations using the test port with the lowest number as node port ...

Page 175: ...gnment 3 1 Cal Unit Port 1 2 Cal Unit Port 2 3 Cal Unit Port 3 4 Cal Unit Port 4 Cal Unit Port 4 5 Cal Unit Port 1 6 Cal Unit Port 2 7 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 3 8 Cal Unit Port 1 9 Cal Unit Port 2 4 5 6 Scalar power calibration The purpose of a scalar power calibration is to ensure accurate source power levels and power readings at a particular position calibration plane in the test setup Sc...

Page 176: ...ce power calibration A source power calibration ensures accurate power levels of the generated waves at an arbitrary calibration plane in the measurement path Typically the calibration plane corresponds to the input of the DUT In a frequency sweep the power at the calibration plane is maintained at a constant Cal Power value The source power calibration eliminates frequency response errors in the ...

Page 177: ...r meter is no longer used for these repeated calibration sweeps everything is based on the previously calibrated reference receiver This speeds up the calibra tion procedure but does not impair its accuracy Tip Since version 3 0 of the analyzer firmware it is also possible to perform the source flatness calibration using a power meter without previously calibrating the reference receiver 3 After t...

Page 178: ... Smaller IF bandwidths are maintained during the calibration sweep larger bandwidths are restored after the sweep The analyzer measures the power at each sweep point compares the result with the nominal power of the source and com piles a correction table An acoustic signal indicates the end of the calibration sweep At the same time a checkmark symbol next to the calibrated source indicates the st...

Page 179: ...for all larger stimulus values PCa l i o x S Like PCa l i o x but only a source flatness calibration is available PCa l i o x R Like PCa l i o x but only a receiver calibration is available PCal Off The power calibration is no longer applied e g deliberately turned off in the Calibra tion Use Cal softtool panel A lower label in the list has priority over the higher labels e g if the power calibrat...

Page 180: ...ort and the DUT 2 Perform the measurement with the additional two port Practical example On wafer measurements The power sensor cannot be directly connected to the input of the DUT The transmission coefficients of the wafer probe are used for the power meter correction B Two port at power meter during calibration Test and measurement procedure 1 Perform the calibration with the additional two port...

Page 181: ...rent ports and cali bration types using remote control In this case for each port to be calibrated a different set of calibration standards might be required For each of these standards only a subset of the available chan nels might have to be swept See SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes on page 954 This advanced mode of parallel calibration is available via remote control only 4 5 8 Joinin...

Page 182: ...m It is a measure for the length of the transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane For a line with permittivity εr and mechanical length Lmech the delay and the electrical length are calculated as follows In the CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Offset softtool tab Delay Electrical Length and Mech Length are coupled parameters When one of them is changed the other two are adjusted ...

Page 183: ... minimized across a configurable frequency range If Delay is the selected trace format the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered on zero In phase format the Auto Length corrected trace shows the deviation from linear phase Length and delay measurement related settings Auto Length is suited for length and delay measurements on transmission lines 1 Connect a non dispersive cable...

Page 184: ...sweep must be active The measured quantity must be an S parameter ratio wave quantity a converted impedance or a converted admittance The effect of Auto Length on S parameters wave quantities and ratios is to eliminate a linear phase response as described above The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affected Converted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corre sponding Auto Len...

Page 185: ...bled Calculation of loss parameters The loss is assumed to be given in terms of the DC loss LossDC the reference fre quency fref and the loss at the reference frequency Loss fref The formula used in the Auto Loss algorithm is similar to the formula for manual entry of the loss parameters see Chapter 4 6 1 2 Definition of loss parameters on page 182 The result is calculated according to the followi...

Page 186: ...t fixture connection are traced back to quantities that are commonly used to characterize transmission lines Use this correction type if your test fixture connections have suitable properties in the considered frequency range The electrical length is approximately constant The loss varies due to the skin effect Direct Compensation provides a frequency dependent transmission factor The phase of the...

Page 187: ...is assigned to a particular port The delay parameters affect the phase of all measured quantities related to this port the loss parameters affect their magnitude An offset at port 1 affects the S parameters S11 S21 S12 S31 Some quan tities like the Z parameters depend on the whole of all S parameters so they are all more or less affected when one S parameter changes due to the addition of an offse...

Page 188: ...over it is possible to combine several port pairs in an arbi trary order port pair de embedding Single ended and or balanced port de embedding can be combined with ground loop de embedding A ground loop models the effect of a non ideal ground con nection of the DUT Transformation networks can be defined by a set of S parameters stored in a Touchstone file or by an equivalent circuit with lumped el...

Page 189: ...ces of real test fixtures There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated matching circuits for each type of DUT Calibration can be performed at the DUT s ports If necessary e g for compensat ing for the effect of a test fixture it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters 4 6 2 2 Deembedding a DUT Deembedding and embedding are inverse operations A deemb...

Page 190: ...pacitor connected in parallel with a resistor an inductor connected in series with a resistor The 2 port transformation networks comprise all possible combinations of 2 basic blocks where either one block represents a serial and the other a shunt element or both represent shunt elements In the default setting the resistors are not effective since the serial resistances are set to 0 Ω the shunt res...

Page 191: ...d as a capacitance C in parallel with a conductance G 4 6 2 4 Circuit models for 4 port networks The lumped element 4 port transformation networks for de embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor An inductor L connected in series with a resistor The transformation networks comprise various combinations of 3 basic circuit blocks ...

Page 192: ... S parameters They are named Serial 2 port Shunt C Serial 2 port Shunt L Shunt L Serial 2 port Shunt C Serial 2 port The following networks are composed of two serial Cs or Ls as seen from the analyzer test port followed by a shunt C or L They are named Serial Cs Shunt L Serial Ls Shunt C Serial Cs Shunt C Serial Ls Shunt L The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L as seen from the ana...

Page 193: ... single ended physical ports A simple circuit which can be modeled using port pair de embedding is a circuit e g a resistance between two ports of a DUT To obtain the circuit in the following figure select port pair 1 2 and the Serial Ls Shunt L transformation network with all inductan ces set to zero L1 L2 L3 0 H and R1 R2 0 Ω To model a general de embedding network for ports 1 and 2 select port ...

Page 194: ...s calculated after single ended deembedding and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding It is possible to combine a sequence of port sets for deembedding embedding each port set having its own transformation network The effect of port set de embedding depends on the port sets themselves but also on their order The same physical ports can be used repeatedly in different port set...

Page 195: ...analyzer s and the DUT s ground reference A typ ical and often unavoidable source of ground loops is the parasitic inductance of the ground contacts In contrast to the 2 port de embedding networks the ground loop represents a single wire connection that can be described by a one port S matrix On the other hand the ground loop de embedding algorithm for an n port DUT involves matrix operations whic...

Page 196: ...ing algorithms to calculate and remove these effects from the mea surements leaving only the result for the area of interest Instead of asking the user to define the fixture by parametrizing one of the given lum ped circuit models or by somehow providing a suitable snp file the firmware of the R S ZND now also provides integration for third party tools that model the test fixture from measured dat...

Page 197: ...o calculate the fixture deembedding files After a final confirmation the calculated deembedding files s2p for single ended ports s4p for balanced ports are used for deembedding the DUT at the respective logical port s Test Coupons The test fixture consists of a set of lead ins DUT Figure 4 12 DUT with Test Fixture balanced The fixture modeling tools require test coupons for the lead ins to the DUT...

Page 198: ...l support assumes symmetrical lead ins and lead outs 4 6 2 10 Combining Several de embedding networks The R S ZND allows you to select a combination of networks to be numerically added removed at different layers 2 port networks at single ended physical ports 4 port networks at pairs of single ended physical ports 4 port networks at balanced logical ports 1 port ground loop networks 2 port differe...

Page 199: ...mbedding the DUT s ground connection can be deembedded from a single 1 port network 5 Ground Loop Embedding the DUT s ground connection can be embedded in a sin gle 1 port network 6 Balanced Embedding every balanced logical port can be embedded in a single 4 port network 7 Port Set Embedding every port set can be embedded in a sequence of 4 port net works 8 Single Ended Embedding every physical po...

Page 200: ...d in the Options tab of the Info dialog SYSTEM SETUP Setup Info For a complete list of options accessories and extras refer to the product brochure or to the Options section of the R S ZND product pages on the Internet The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation The use of external power meters and switch matri ces does not re...

Page 201: ...e without option R S ZND K1 Recalibration Required Although this is a software option the R S ZND has to be recalibrated at Rohde Schwarz service to comply with the specifications of the data sheet 4 7 3 Bidirectional measurements 100 kHz to 8 5 GHz for R S ZND Option R S ZND K6 Software option R S ZND K6 enables bidirectional measurements for a R S ZND with extended frequency range i e with optio...

Page 202: ...omain transformation including many examples refer to the application note 1EP83 which is available on the R S internet at http www rohde schwarz com appnotes 1EP83 Trace selection Select a reflection parameter Sii to perform a time domain reflectometry TDR mea surement e g to detect cable faults To measure the impedance of a network you can select a converted impedance parameter Z Sii Select a tr...

Page 203: ...sponse resolution is more than doubled Together with the DC value the condition of equidistant sweep points implies that the frequency grid must be har monic Due to the symmetry of the trace in the frequency domain the time domain result is harmonic See also Chapter 4 7 5 4 Harmonic grid on page 204 Two different types of response are available in low pass mode see below Table 4 15 Comparison of b...

Page 204: ...istics Table 4 16 Properties of frequency windows Window Side lobe sup pression Relative impulse width Best for No Profiling Rect angle 13 dB 1 Low First Side lobe Hamming 43 dB 1 4 Response resolution separation of closely spaced responses with compara ble amplitude Normal Profile Hann 32 dB 1 6 Good compromise between pulse width and side lobe suppression Steep Falloff Boh man 46 dB 1 9 Dynamic ...

Page 205: ... that the number of sweep points and their relative spacing is maintained If the start frequency of the sweep is sufficiently above the fmin the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased If the start frequency of the sweep is close to fmin then the sweep points can have to be shifted towards higher frequencies If the last sweep point of...

Page 206: ... of harmonic grids have different advantages and drawbacks Note that for a bandpass transformation the grid parameters have the following effect A wider sweep range i e a larger bandwidth increases the time domain resolu tion A smaller frequency gap extends the unambiguous range A larger number of points increases the sweep time With default analyzer settings the differences between the grid types...

Page 207: ...ds tradeoff between side lobe suppression and edge steepness Time gated frequency domain trace The trace in the frequency domain depends on the state of the Time Gate If the gate is disabled the frequency domain FD trace corresponds to the mea sured sweep results before the time domain transformation If the gate is enabled the displayed frequency domain trace is calculated from the time domain TD ...

Page 208: ... posed in standard ANSI C63 25 EMC Test Site Validation EMC test sites for radiated emission measurements rely on free space conditions to minimize the influence of reflections on the received signal Practically near free space conditions are achieved by shielded enclosures fully lined with RF absorbing material Site validation determines deviations from free space conditions that must meet the ac...

Page 209: ...VSWR published on the Rohde Schwarz internet site 4 7 6 Distance to fault measurements Option R S ZND K3 With option K3 Distance to Fault the R S ZND can locate faults and discontinuities on cables and transmission lines Faults produce peaks on the impulse response in the time domain that is calculated from the measured reflection S parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation The distance b...

Page 210: ...asured is inversely proportional to the fre quency span The smaller the frequency span the longer the maximum distance between the calibrated reference plane and the fault to be located However a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu tion The R S ZND can automatically determine a suitable number of sweep points for a given maximum distance to fault Auto Number of Po...

Page 211: ...ed on IEEE 370 Option R S ZND K210 EaZy deembedding EZD is an implementation of the IEEE algorithm for generating deembedding files from a symmetrical 2x thru measurement Option R S ZND K210 allows you to model a test fixture using the EZD fixture model ing tool and to deembed selected ports using the generated touchstone files The EZD fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps 1 Measure one...

Page 212: ...17 Fixture modeling EZD Balanced Ports dialog For general information about fixture de embedding see Chapter 4 6 2 9 Fixture modeling and deembedding on page 196 Option R S ZND K210 can be ordered with a new instrument or retrofitted at Rohde Schwarz service Optional extensions and accessories www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 213: ... in insertion loss or 8 points per wavelength 2 The 2x Thru s return loss must be smaller than its insertion loss 3 The 2x Thru s insertion loss must be relatively linear with a few wavelengths at the highest frequency 4 Use a 4 port 2x Thru if strong far end crosstalk FEXT is present 5 Use a complete DUT w fixture file for extraction Source In Situ De Embedding ISD User s Guide November 11 2018 4...

Page 214: ...content dam www public us en documents guides delta l plus methodology for electrical characterization guide pdf https ieeexplore ieee org document 7048423 The R S ZND uses the Clear Signal Solutions AITT DL implementation of the Delta L v4 0 algorithms see https clearsig com clearsig tools Delta It allows you to per form 1L one line length analysis Typically used for high volume manufacturing rel...

Page 215: ...ludes an SNMP agent and a REST service with HTTP endpoints So you can access the health and usage information via LAN using the SNMP protocol or the REST protocol Accessing the data does not interfere with remote control via SCPI commands or with measurement execution Reference information for both protocols is available on the R S ZND at the address http instrument api hums v1 documents name inte...

Page 216: ...l Devices via GPIB The R S ZND B10 can also be used control external devices via GPIB An additional USB to IEC IEEE adapter is only needed if you want to control the R S ZND via GPIB at the same time 4 7 15 Handler I O universal interface Option R S ZN B14 A network analyzer that is equipped with a Handler I O Universal Interface can inter act with an external part handler The digital control sign...

Page 217: ...the data sheet 4 7 18 USB to IEC IEEE adapter R S ZVAB B44 Hardware option R S ZVAB B44 order no 1302 5544 03 comprises an adapter and driver software for controlling external devices via IEEE 488 IEC 625 GPIB The driver software is installed on the network analyzer Connect the USB port of the adapter to any of the master USB connectors on the front or rear panel of the analyzer Connect the GPIB p...

Page 218: ...so pro vide accurate results for signals at inaccurate or unknown frequencies A typical example is a mixer measurement with an unknown LO signal and therefore unknown IF output frequency VNA 1 2 RF LO IF USB ports Power meter sensor Control connection e g USB Power calibration An external power meter can measure the exact signal power at an arbitrary point in the test setup reference plane and thu...

Page 219: ... analyzer and the power sensor must be disconnected see tips below R S power sensors and power meters auto matically detect the presence of any significant input power This aborts zeroing and generates an error message Zeroing can take a few seconds depending on the power meter model refer to the documentation of your external power meter for more infor mation Repeat zeroing During warm up after s...

Page 220: ... unbal anced ports connected to a 2 port analyzer via a 2x6 matrix e g a R S ZN Z8x base unit without extensions For each stimulus port 5 sweeps are required to measure the resulting b waves 6 5 30 sweeps in total Furthermore each additional sweep requires at least one matrix switching procedure This involves command processing and physical switching and hence can take some time to complete For me...

Page 221: ...t part of a recall set However a recall set will contain information about the required matrices and their RF connections At the time the recall set is loaded the R S ZND checks whether the same matrix setup is still active If not a wizard will guide the user through the matrix configuration 4 7 20 3 RF connections and matrix connectivity Depending on the design of the switch matrix and the RF con...

Page 222: ...21 22 23 24 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 4 19 Unconnected right submatrix With the same extension type connecting one of two submatrix VNA ports enables reflection measurements for the corresponding matrix test ports However as long as a second connection between the VNA and this submatrix is missing intra submatrix transmission measurements are still impossible Right 2x12 submatrix full cros...

Page 223: ...sical paths where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes These paths may have different characteristics in particular if the corresponding matrix routes differ in the number of semiconductor or mechanical switching functions that have to be traversed Example For switch matrix ZV Z82 09 every test port can be reached via two different routes traversing either one or two ...

Page 224: ...ed 2x6 modules The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP4T SP3T SP3T 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 4 23 Routes and priorities See the data sheet of the respective switch matrix for details on the available routes Optional extensions and accessories www allice de Allice Mes...

Page 225: ... in measurement precision The R S ZND allows you to select which optimization should be performed 4 7 20 5 Multiple paths and calibration With switch matrices a signal loss of up to 25 dB is possible so full calibration is a must For a high number of test ports manual calibration is time consuming and error prone so automatic calibration with auto detection is recommended During calibration correc...

Page 226: ... custom functionality measurements device control The plug in interface allows the external software to interact with the firmware before and after a change of the channel drive port sweep segment sweep point The plug in then can perform arbitrary actions and eventually return data to the VNA firmware as custom traces as input values for math functions for the calculation of other traces To calcul...

Page 227: ...ower supply is switched OFF 4 7 21 2 Technology The plug in interface is a traditional C style DLL interface Suitable DLLs can be com piled using different platforms such as C or MATLAB A plug in is installed in the firm ware as a zip file containing the external DLL and possibly additional files to be kept with the DLL An SDK for external DLLs is provided with the analyzer firmware on the Rohde S...

Page 228: ...ation step serves all active external DLLs When custom traces are requested the firmware asks the related DLLs which input traces they need to calcu late their traces During the calculation the requested inputs are provided to the DLL which then calculates its requested traces Due to its position all internal trace types are allowed as inputs External types are also allowed if no circular dependen...

Page 229: ...s Simulation Measurements InputBufferGroupSimulation s4p This Touchstone file contains the 16 S parameter traces of a 4 port network 4x4 S matrix measured at 1193 points in the frequency range from 0 GHz to 70 GHz The S Matrix simulates a linear network DUT connected to VNA ports 1 to 4 For 2 port VNAs the left upper 2x2 submatrix is used For instruments with N 4 ports on the VNA and connected swi...

Page 230: ...nce over the data of the setup specific and default simulation data Again the previously mentioned replication logic applies 3 Load port and channel specific S parameter data from file For the related ports they take precedence over channel specific setup specific and default simulation data To determine Sij at a channel frequency the firmware interpolates between the two closest frequencies of th...

Page 231: ...noise can be activated or deactivated from the analyzer GUI Make sure to deactivate Simulation Noise before exporting traces to file see Chapter 4 4 2 Trace files on page 134 Otherwise the exported results comprise an artificial random component Optional extensions and accessories www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 232: ...ontrol commands For a general overview of the analyzer s capabilities and their use refer to Chapter 4 Concepts and features on page 74 5 1 Function Keys and Softtools Most of the Function keys serve as openers for an associated softtool in the analyzer GUI By default the following opener logic is applied If the associated softtool is not displayed pressing the hardkey opens the associated softtoo...

Page 233: ...TIMULUS START Alt Shift J Stimulus softtool Selects an input field corresponding to the start stop center or span of the active channel s current sweep type Activates the corresponding tab on the Stimulus softtool STIMULUS STOP Alt Shift K STIMULUS CENTER Alt Shift F STIMULUS SPAN Alt Shift H CHANNEL PWR BW AVG Alt Shift L Power Bw Avg softtool default CHANNEL SWEEP Alt Shift M Sweep Softtool defa...

Page 234: ...e quantities to be measured and displayed Access TRACE MEAS Background information For a detailed description of all measurement results of the R S ZND refer to Chap ter 4 3 Measurement results on page 108 Efficient trace handling To select a result and display it as a trace you can simply drag and drop the corre sponding button into a diagram area See also Chapter 3 3 4 Handling diagrams traces a...

Page 235: ...ngle ended unbalanced S parameters are referred to as S out in where out and in denote the output and input logical port numbers respectively If entered manually out and in must be expressed using the same number of dig its I e for out 10 and in 9 you can specify S out in as S1009 or S010009 but not as S109 For a channel setup with n single ended ports n2 single ended S parameters can be measured ...

Page 236: ...agrams are arranged as an 2 x 2 matrix The reflection coefficients Sii appear in the diagrams on the main diagonal the trans mission coefficients Sij i j occupy the other diagrams By default reflection coeffi cients are displayed in Smith diagrams transmission coefficients in Cartesian dia grams dB Mag scale See also Format softtool Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND uni...

Page 237: ... setup of the analyzer according to the port configuration of your DUT Then connect the DUT to the selected analyzer ports This step corresponds to the Predefined Config tab of the Balanced Ports dia log see Predefined Config tab on page 239 2 Define the port impedances Assign reference impedances to all physical and balanced test ports selected in the previous step The reference impedances can be...

Page 238: ...andwidths and source powers have been selected according to the following criteria The large measurement bandwidth Fast Sweep ensures that the noise of an S21 trace at minimum source power and 0 dB attenuation is smaller than 0 1 dB The default source power for a passive DUT ensures that the analyzer receiver is in its linear range no compression if a passive DUT with 0 dB attenuation is measured ...

Page 239: ...ion Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 6 Unbalance balance conversion on page 120 Chapter 4 3 6 1 Balanced port configurations on page 121 Chapter 4 3 2 Reference impedances on page 110 Predefined Config tab The Predefined Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog provides the most com monly used logical port configurations of the analyzer This tab is hidden if a switch matrix is configured...

Page 240: ...nced port only port 1 in use single ended reflection measurement For a uni directional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 the balanced port configuration is not available Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar Logical Port Config tab The Logical Port Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog allows you to configure logic...

Page 241: ...ith the physical ports select Identity 1 1 For balanced ports the lower of the two physical port numbers is selected To number the logical ports consecutively from top to bottom select Aligned 1 2 3 Remote command SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar User Config tab The User Config tab of the Balanced Ports dialog defines a new balanced port con figuration For a unidirectional R S ZND...

Page 242: ...r Reference Impedance tab The Reference Impedance tab of the Balanced Ports dialog allows you to define or redefine the impedances of the logical ports Background information Refer to Chapter 4 3 2 Reference impedances on page 110 By default the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe dance of the connector type assigned to the port However it can be defined as an arbit...

Page 243: ...ts The default value for the differential mode is Z0d 100 Ω 2 Z0 The default value for the common mode is Z0c 25 Ω Z0 2 Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 only single ended mode is available Remote command SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZCOMmon SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDIFferent Connector Allows you t...

Page 244: ...ios tab left bidirectional R S ZND right unidirectional R S ZND The More Ratios button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities b i a j Source Port j Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2 port wave quantities a1 a2 b1 and b2 The predefined wave quantities can all be obtained with the same test setup where a 2 port DUT is connected betw...

Page 245: ...also measure arbitrary ratios for other source ports see Chap ter 5 2 2 2 More Ratios dialog on page 245 Tip In the trace list the source port is indicated in brackets b2 a1 P1 denotes the ratio b2 a1 with source port 1 Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 ratios for source port 2 are not available Remote command CALCula...

Page 246: ...ll down list and the port number assignment right pull down list of the wave that forms the numerator of the ratio Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name B2 A1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine Trace_Name B2 A1 Denominator Selects the type left pull down list and the port number assignment right pull down list of the wave that forms the denominator of the ratio Remote command CALCul...

Page 247: ...ine SENSe Ch SWEep DETector TIME 5 2 3 Wave tab Selects wave quantities as measured quantities Background information Refer to Chapter 4 3 5 Wave quantities and ratios on page 117 5 2 3 1 Controls on the Wave tab left bidirectional R S ZND right unidirectional R S ZND The More Wave Quantities button opens the More Wave Quantities dialog which allows to select an arbitrary wave quantity e g for dif...

Page 248: ...rd S parame ter measurement this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT reverse measure ment b2 Source Port 2 is the wave received at physical port 2 In a standard S parame ter measurement this wave is fed to the output port port 2 of the DUT reverse measurement Tip In the trace list the source port is indicated in brackets For example a1 P1 denotes the wave a1 with source port 1 The analyzer ca...

Page 249: ...port for the stimulus signal Port 1 or Port 2 for a bidirectional R S ZND For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidir ectional operation on page 80 only port 1 may serve as source and hence this con trol is disabled The analyzer places no restriction on the combination of source ports and port num bers of the measured wave quantity For example it is possible to...

Page 250: ...the results points from the raw measure ment data For details refer to Chapter 4 3 5 3 Detector settings on page 119 Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine SENSe Ch SWEep DETector TIME 5 2 4 Z Sij tab Selects converted impedances as measured quantities The impedances are calcula ted from the measured S parameters Background information Refer to the following s...

Page 251: ...terminated at port 2 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement Z22 is the input impedance at port 2 of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at port 1 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit impedance measured in a reverse reflection measurement Z12 and Z21 denote the forward and reverse converted transfer impedances respectively Use t...

Page 252: ...1 Balanced Ports Opens a dialog to configure the logical ports of the analyzer See Chapter 5 2 1 3 Balanced Ports dialog on page 239 5 2 5 Y Sij tab Selects converted admittances as measured quantities The admittances are calcula ted from the measured S parameters Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 4 Admittance parameters on page 116 Chapter 4 3 4 1 Converted admitt...

Page 253: ...t is terminated at port 2 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit admittance measured in a forward reflection measurement Y22 is the input admittance at port 2 of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at port 1 with the reference impedance Z0 matched circuit admittance measured in a reverse reflection measurement Y12 and Y21 denote the forward and reverse converted transfer admittances respectiv...

Page 254: ... Y and Z parameters as measured quantities Both Y and Z parameters can serve as an alternative to S parameters for characterizing a linear n port network Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 3 Impedance parameters on page 112 Chapter 4 3 4 Admittance parameters on page 116 Chapter 4 3 3 2 Z parameters on page 115 Chapter 4 3 4 2 Y parameters on page 116 For a unidirec...

Page 255: ...se transfer admittance defined as the ratio of the current I1 to the voltage V2 reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit V1 0 Y22 is the output admittance defined as the ratio of the current I2 to the voltage V2 measured at port 2 reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit V1 0 Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure Trace_Name Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 CALCulate ...

Page 256: ...This tab is only enabled if a switch matrix is configured The Imbal CMRR measurements require at least two logical ports are available at least one of them balanced Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 3 6 Unbalance balance conversion on page 120 Chapter 4 3 6 3 Imbalance and common mode rejection on page 124 5 2 7 1 Controls on the Imbal CMRR tab The following buttons ...

Page 257: ... a measured quantity for the active trace The buttons are available if either logical port 1 or logical port 2 or both is defined as a balanced port A yellow font color indicates that currently the other logical port number is undefined and the physical port with the same number is marked as unused If you select it as the measured quantity the port is automatically enabled as a single ended port w...

Page 258: ...ced port Balanced port Log NWA port Physical port c Logical ports j k single ended Physical port d Logical port i balanced Physical port a Physical port b Imbalance 1 Imbalance 2 Imbalance 1 selects the balanced logical port i as the input the single ended logical ports j and k as the output and calculates the following imbalance parameter Imbjk i Sca Sda Scb Sdb Imbalance 2 selects the balanced l...

Page 259: ...tor calculation is based on 2 port reflection and transmission S parameters so that the input and output port numbers must be different The pull down list contains all possi ble physical single ended port combinations For an analyzer with n ports provides n n 1 stability parameters Stability parameters are expressed as K out in μ1 out in and μ2 out in where out and in denote the logical output and...

Page 260: ...gured See Configured Devices on page 571 The bordered label below displays the type and serial number of the selected power meter Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure TraceName PmtrD1 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName PmtrD1 Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the selected power meter The power meter must be disconnected from the RF power see Chapter 4 7 19 1 Zero...

Page 261: ...n Refer to Chapter 4 7 21 External DLLs on page 226 5 2 10 1 Controls on the External DLL tab Configuration Perm Settings Opens the External DLL Configuration Dialog Measurement The Measurement section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug ins Each external DLL ext_dll_name dll that provides at least one custom trace type adds a measurement button ext_dll_name with dotted left borde...

Page 262: ...vate the respective plugin in the current channel An active plugin can be used to create traces and or can be made Permanent Remote command SENSe Ch CDLL STATe Permanent Loaded DLLs table Defines the task that is selected via Task Type and further defined via Additional Input on page 263 as permanent A permanent task can interact with the firmware even if it currently does not provide any traces e...

Page 263: ...urely informative It reports the version of the DLL as specified by its developer Interface Version is the version of the plug in SDK that was used to compile the DLL more precisely the version of the interface RsVnaCustomDllInterface h against which it was compiled This version can change the DLL handling of the analyzer firm ware Add Remove Allows you to add remove custom plugins to from the ana...

Page 264: ... Definition Dialog Specifies a custom trace that is provided by an external DLL Access External DLL tab Measurement section buttons Figure 5 1 Trace Definition dialog In the VNA firmware the following string represents the measured quantity Cu P Src Port lowercase_ext_dll_name Task Type Additional Input This string is displayed in the trace info and in the Trace Manager You can also use it to spec...

Page 265: ...n is provided with additional informa tion about the source and receive impedance recimp 50 srcimp 50 to calculate the PAE trace correctly The Additional Input is the last part of the trace identifier Cu P Src Port lowercase_ext_dll_name Task Type Additional Input 5 3 Format softtool The Format softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area Access TRACE FORMAT...

Page 266: ...s a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a com plex measured quantity in the range between 180 degrees and 180 degrees Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The phase of the complex quantity C i e φ C arctan Im C Re C appears on the vertical axis φ C is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep refer ence pha...

Page 267: ... horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis In contrast to the Smith chart the scaling of the axes is linear Application Reflection or transmission measurements see example in Polar on page 102 Tip The axis for the sweep variable is lost in polar ...

Page 268: ...tificial jumps of the trace but can entail a relatively wide phase range if the sweep span is large Application Phase measurements e g phase distortion deviation from linearity Tip After changing to the Unwr Phase format use the Auto Scale Trace function to rescale the vertical axis and view the entire trace see Auto Scale Trace on page 272 Remote command CALCulate Chn FORMat UPHase Lin Mag Select...

Page 269: ...nary part Im C of the complex quantity C Re C j Im C appears on the verti cal axis also scaled linearly Application The imaginary part of an impedance corresponds to its reactive portion Positive negative values represent inductive capacitive reactance Tip alternative formats It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part The magnitude c...

Page 270: ...mpensate for a frequency dependent delay in the test setup a system error correction is required Note The delay for reflection factors corresponds to the transmission time in forward and reverse direction see Length and delay measurement related settings on page 183 Remote command CALCulate Chn FORMat GDELay Aperture Points Defines an aperture Δf for the group Delay calculation The value is entere...

Page 271: ...e Chn MARKer DEFault FORMat 5 4 Scale softtool The Scale softtool allows you to define how the active trace is displayed in its current format Access TRACE SCALE hardkey 5 4 1 Scale Values tab Provides the functions for diagram scaling The Scale Values settings are closely related to the Format and Display settings The Scale Values settings depend on the current trace format diagram type because n...

Page 272: ...s of the vertical divisions so that the trace fits onto approx 80 of the vertical grid The reference value is chosen to center the trace in the diagram In circular diagrams Polar Smith Inv Smith the analyzer recalculates the values of the radial divisions so that the diagram is confined to approx 80 of the outer circumference The reference value is set to the value of the outer circumfer ence Auto...

Page 273: ...f Value defines the value of the outer circumference Changing Ref Value enlarges or scales down the dia gram leaving the center unchanged The unit is U units for all circular diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RLEVel Ref Pos Defines the position of the reference line in a Cartesian diagram The reference line is indicated by an arrowhead symbol at the right edge of the d...

Page 274: ...ager dialog Couple All Traces Couple Trc To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace To Trace to all traces to the active trace Remote command n a Decouple All Traces Decouple Trc Assigns independent scale settings to all traces to the active trace Remote command n a 5 4 3 Zoom tab Provides graphical and stimulus zoom functions for cartesian diagrams The graphical zoom magnifies a p...

Page 275: ...o initiate the selection of a paraxial rectangular zoom area Its label changes according to the selected zoom mode Remote command n a Zoom Select Stim Zoom Select Prepares the analyzer GUI for the selection of a paraxial rectangular zoom area The effect of the subsequent selection depends on the current zoom mode as indica ted on the button label In Mode Graphical Zoom button label Zoom Select the...

Page 276: ...ou can move the zoomed part of the trace by moving the zoom area or use the numerical input fields Max Min Start Stop to do so Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM STATe Max Min Start Stop Defines the coordinates of the graphical zoom window for the active diagram Max and Min define the response axis range Start and Stop define the stimulus axis range The input fields are only enable...

Page 277: ...tive recall set as the active trace in its channel and diagram At the same time it sets the trace s diagram and channel as the active Dia gram Channel Tip You can also select an item in a trace list or a trace line in a diagram to make the related trace the active one This function is disabled if only one trace is defined Add Trace Creates a trace in the active Diagram Channel and makes it the Act...

Page 278: ...remove the corresponding On flags in the Trace Manager see Chapter 5 5 1 3 Trace Manager dialog on page 279 Use the undo function to restore a trace that was unintentionally deleted Remote command CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALL Diagram Channel Displays the active diagram and channel i e the diagram and channel of the Active Trace All...

Page 279: ...re ments Restores the previous channel trace diagram configuration Same functionality as the 5 5 1 2 New Trace dialog The Trc tool bar button allows you to create a trace in the active channel Tap click the Trc button to duplicate the active trace equivalent to Add Trace Drag the respective button onto the diagram area to create the trace in any other existing diagram or in a new one After the but...

Page 280: ... is assigned Scale indicates and controls the scale coupling of the related trace A trace s scaling can either be uncoupled Scale empty or coupled to another trace s scaling Rules for trace names The analyzer can define mathematical relations between different traces and calculate new mathematical traces User Def Math The trace names are used as operands in the mathematical expressions and must be...

Page 281: ...Lete Couple All Channels Decouple All Channels Couple All Channels assigns all traces to the channel of the active trace deleting all other now unused channels The analyzer displays a confirmation dialog box before deleting the unused channels Decouple All Channels makes sure that each data trace is assigned its own independent channel For data traces previously assigned to the same channel new ch...

Page 282: ...in the Trace Manager dialog The following display settings of a data trace and the associated memory traces are fully coupled Changing a property of one trace affects the properties of all other traces All Format settings see Chapter 5 3 Format softtool on page 265 All Scale settings see Chapter 5 4 Scale softtool on page 271 Selection of the measured quantity using the Meas softtool is possible f...

Page 283: ...a Func to Destination Stores the current state of the active data trace including trace functions to the Destination memory trace Trace functions The trace functions comprise the following mathematical operations Active trace math on unformatted and formatted traces as configured in the Chap ter 5 5 4 Math tab on page 285 A shift of the data trace see Shift Trace on page 306 Data to Destination st...

Page 284: ...Data tab Performs actions on all data or memory traces in the active recall set Background information Refer to Trace types on page 87 All Data to Destination Stores the current data of all data traces in the active recall set to memory traces in accordance with the Destination setting No trace functions are applied to the stored traces Remote command TRACe COPY All Data Func to Destination Stores...

Page 285: ... mem ory trace associated to this data trace New For each data trace the current trace data are copied to a new memory trace associated to this data trace New memory traces are named Mem n Data_Trace with n selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unique Remote command n a Show All Data Hide All Data Show All Mem Hide All Mem Displays or hides all data or memory traces in the active r...

Page 286: ...race data Complex Data math is available in all firmware versions of all R S ZNx vector net work analyzers Formatted Data math was added in version 3 0 of the R S ZND firm ware Trace Math Complex Data Formatted Data Activates or deactivates the Complex Data and or Formatted Data formula previ ously defined using Data Mem Data Mem or Define Math via Chap ter 5 5 4 2 User Def Math dialog on page 287...

Page 287: ...hematical trace is updated as the measurement goes on and the analyzer provides new active trace data This function is disabled unless a memory trace is coupled to the active data trace Trace coupling ensures that the two traces have the same number of points so that the mathematical trace is well defined Remote command CALCulate Chn MATH FUNCtion CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatted FUNCtion User Defined...

Page 288: ...of traces e g the sweep points of the traces do not have to be the same The number of points belongs to the channel settings Coupled data and memory traces are always compatible because they have the same channel settings The analyzer processes only numeric values without units in the mathematical formu las No consistency check for units is performed Expression builder The mathematical expression ...

Page 289: ...ic arithmetic operations Grouping parts of an expression Lin Mag z sqrt x2 y2 dB Mag dB Mag z 20 log z dB round x real round x rounds x to the closest integer away from zero for ties x y real round x yj round x round y j xy Exponential e g z2 Arg Phase φ z arctan Im z Re z Re Im x y Real and Imag log ln Common base 10 or natural base e logarithm Min Max Smaller or larger values of all points of tw...

Page 290: ...out previous conversion Result is Wave Quantity acts on the result of the mathematical expression only Wave quantities and power sweep stimulus values always enter into the expression as vol tages Effect of Result is Wave Quantity In the More Wave Quantities dialog the Show as control element specifies whether wave quantities are displayed as voltages or equivalent powers using the port impe dance...

Page 291: ...ain tab enables and configures the time domain representation of the measurement results Time domain analysis requires option R S ZND K2 If this option is not installed the Time Domain and Time Gate tab tabs are hidden Background information Refer to Chapter 4 7 5 Time domain analysis on page 202 For a comparison of the different transformation types and windows and for applica tion examples pleas...

Page 292: ...re quency domain are coupled with each other The analyzer places no restriction on the measured quantities to be transformed into the time domain Impedances and admittances are first converted back into the equiva lent S parameter transformed and restored after the transformation See also Chapter 4 7 5 1 Chirp z transformation on page 202 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STATe Type Sele...

Page 293: ...l assumptions are made With higher resolu tion enhancement factors the measurement data is extrapolated using a linear predic tion method As a result the resolution in time domain can be improved The ideal resolution enhancement factor depends on the properties of the DUT For distance to fault measurements on cables set it to 1 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME RESolution EFACtor TD VSWR...

Page 294: ...and Number of Points calculates a harmonic grid based on the current Stop Frequency see Start Frequency Stop Frequency Center Fre quency Span Frequency on page 358 and the current number of sweep points see Number of Points on page 365 This algorithm can increase the frequency gap i e the Freq Step Size Keep Frequency Gap and Number of Points calculates a harmonic grid based on the current Stop Fr...

Page 295: ...additional red points must be extrapolated or interpolated according to the values at the measured sweep points blue dots If the properties of the DUT at f 0 are sufficiently well known then it is recom mendable to enter the DC value manually Manual Entry Examples At f 0 the reflection factor of an open ended cable is 1 It is 1 for a short circuited cable and 0 for a cable with matched termination...

Page 296: ...eceive the frequency response of your DUT without the contribution of the unwanted responses The time gate is inde pendent of the frequency window used to filter the trace before transforming it to time domain Time domain analysis requires option R S ZND K2 If this option is not installed the Time Domain tab and Time Gate tabs are hidden Background information Refer to Chapter 4 7 5 5 Time gates o...

Page 297: ...es all information in the specified time region and rejects everything else A Notch filter rejects all information in the specified time region and passes every thing else Remote command CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME TYPE Shape Selects a gate shape which the R S ZND uses to filter the trace in the time domain The drop down list visualizes how the time gate will affect a constant function after tr...

Page 298: ... 5 5 8 1 Controls on the Trace Statistics tab The Evaluation Range button opens the Evaluation Range dialog see Chap ter 5 5 8 2 Evaluation Range dialog on page 303 The Decimal Places button opens the System Config dialog to define the maxi mum number of fractional digits for setting values and measurement results See also User Interface tab on page 543 Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS The upper...

Page 299: ...end on the selected trace format In contrast the RMS calculation is based on linear unformatted values The physical unit for unformatted wave quantities is 1 Volt The RMS value has zero phase The selected trace format is applied to the unformatted RMS value which means that the RMS result of a trace does depend on the trace format Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics MMPTpeak STATe CALCulate Ch...

Page 300: ...gth on page 126 Note To account for the propagation in both directions delay and electrical length of a reflection parameter are only half the delay and electrical length of a transmission parameter The formula for PD above is for transmission parameters See the section on Length and delay measurement in Chapter 4 6 1 3 Auto Length on page 183 Tip The phase evaluation can cause misleading results ...

Page 301: ... Point of the selected evaluation range Evaluation Range as an approximation for the small signal value However you may also choose a different Reference Value The compression point is a measure for the upper edge of the linearity range of a DUT It is close to the highest input signal level for which the DUT shows a linear response so that the magnitude of all S parameters remains constant Cmp In ...

Page 302: ...ence value see Selected Marker on page 302 Range uses the average value in a configurable Ref Range on page 302 as the reference value Defined Value allows to specify the reference value manually see Defined Value on page 303 Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence Selected Marker This button is only visible if Selected Marker is used as Reference Value It allows you to sele...

Page 303: ... opera tions trace statistics offset loss and fixture compensation calculations The evalua tion range is a continuous interval of the sweep variable Access TRACE TRACE CONFIG Trace Statistics Evaluation Range CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Offset Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set Full Span means that the search...

Page 304: ...Remote command CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER SHOW 5 5 9 Smooth Shift Hold tab Provides various functions to modify the entire measured trace The analyzer can export the raw complex unformatted data or formatted data The unformatted data are independent of all Smooth Shift Hold settings see Formatted Values on page 313 For complex traces if marker format and trace format do not coincide the ...

Page 305: ...STATe Aperture Defines how many trace values are averaged to smooth the trace if Smoothing is switched on An Aperture of a means that the value at sweep point n 1 N is replaced by the arithmetic mean of the values at sweep points max 1 n a 100 N 2 min N n a 100 N 2 where N is the number of points of the sweep or sweep segment for segmented sweeps 1 n N n a 100 N 2 n a 100 N 2 Length a 100 N Smooth...

Page 306: ...hifting the active trace in horizontal and vertical direction Stimulus Shift Trace Shifts the active trace in horizontal direction leaving the positions of all markers unchanged The unit of the offset value depends on the sweep type Note A Stimulus shift can be used in cartesian and in complex diagrams The visible effect depends on the diagram type In cartesian diagrams the trace is shifted relati...

Page 307: ...weep point as the reference point for a dynamic shift of the active trace With a raw complex trace value z Re z j Im z z e j φ z and a raw complex value zr Re zr j Im zr zr e j φ zr at the reference point for the current sweep the dynamically shifted trace value Dyn_Shift z is calculated as follows Amplitude Dyn_Shift z z zr Phase Dyn_Shift z z e j φ zr Real Dyn_Shift z z Re zr Imag Dyn_Shift z z ...

Page 308: ...imaginary part of the complex trace value i e over the complex value itself Remote command CALCulate Chn IAVerage MODE 5 5 11 Trace Data tab Stores one or several data or memory traces to a file or loads a memory trace from a file Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 2 Trace files on page 134 left bidirectional R S ZND right unidirectional R S ZND All buttons on the Trace Data tab serve as ...

Page 309: ...he analyzer firmware Simulation Noise can be activated or deactivated from the analyzer GUI For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidir ectional operation on page 80 S12 and S22 can be not be measured and hence an export to s2p is not available 5 5 11 1 Import Complex Data dialog The Import Complex Data dialog loads a memory trace from a trace file Trace files ...

Page 310: ... to generate a new memory trace box checked If the box is unchecked and the active trace is a memory trace then this memory trace will be overwritten If the box is unchecked and the active trace is a data trace then the data trace s last created memory trace will be overwritten or a new memory trace will be created in case there was previously no memory trace assigned to this data trace Remote com...

Page 311: ... not available The Export Data File Type dialog is a standard Save File dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options Many options depend on the selected export file format Files of type The displayed controls change accordingly The export options are remembered when the dialog is closed Trace Config softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 312: ...de and phase see also Formatted Values on page 313 Export of Formatted Values is not available for Touchstone files Normalize with Port Specific Impedances For Touchstone file export only If checked the firmware renormalizes the exported S parameters according to the port specific reference impedances instead of a common target impedance of 50 Ω see Renormalization of S parameters on page 141 Note...

Page 313: ...ace data flow None of the following stages trace mathematics shift time domain gate trace formatting and smoothing affects the exported data Save writes the raw stimulus values frequency power time according to the sweep type and the raw complex measurement points to a file See Chapter 4 1 5 Data flow on page 82 Export of complex data is available for all trace file types Check box selected on Exp...

Page 314: ...d to File Defines a comment to be added to the exported trace data file If empty Delete no comment is added Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion COMMent 5 5 11 3 Select Parameter dialog The Select Parameter dialog provides a selection of measurement results e g S parameters or traces e g for trace import import of power correction coefficients limit line import Access The dialog may be called...

Page 315: ... of traces see Conditions for Touchstone file export on page 141 The OK button is available only if no error message is displayed in the dialog Select Select All Deselect All Selects the ports to be considered for the S parameter export Example With ports 1 and 2 selected S parameters S11 S12 S21 and S22 are expor ted Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs Assign Selects the port number assignme...

Page 316: ...e measurement results visualize them in the diagrams and activate deactivate the limit check The analyzer provides upper lower ripple and circle limits In addition the Lines softtool provides functions to limit complex diagrams to a user defined Display Circle and to add user defined horizontal lines to cartesian diagrams Access TRACE LINE hardkey Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Limi...

Page 317: ...defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog SYSTEM DISPLAY Config Define User Color You can choose between various options Display upper and lower limit lines with different colors Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines Assign different colors to limit line segments with disabled limit check Note Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding ...

Page 318: ...r The limit lines can be displayed no matter if the limit check is enabled If Limit Check is enabled the limits are checked no matter if the limit lines are displayed The limit check can even be enabled if no limit lines are defined In this case the info field displays No limit defined and the limit check always passes Limit lines are defined for a particular trace format However the limit check i...

Page 319: ...check appears in a popup box whenever Global Check is selected PASS represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check FAIL means that the limit check for one or more traces failed Remote command CALCulate CLIMits FAIL TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass Assigns the active trace to the low voltage 3 3 V TTL out...

Page 320: ...ality is poor Instead of using two traces it is possible to consider two groups of traces that are assigned to TTL1 Pass and TTL2 Pass respectively Note Default values TTL1 Pass TTL2 Pass for new traces can be set in the Advanced tab of the System Config dialog see TTL Pass Default Values on page 549 Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit TTLout Pt STATe Shift Lines By setting the Stimulus and Respons...

Page 321: ...Trace or import a trace stored in a file Import File Save your limit lines to a file so you can reuse or modify them later sessions Save Limit Line Recall Limit Line Segment List Defines the individual limit line segments The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable columns Type indicates whether the segment belongs to an Upper or a Lower...

Page 322: ...us value of the last segment to the end of the sweep range Its response values are equal to the Stop Response value of the last segment Insert adds a new segment before the active segment marked by a blue back ground in the first column of the segment list The new segment extends from the Stop Stimulus value of the segment before the active segment to the Start Stim ulus value of the active segmen...

Page 323: ... trace must be cartesian and the Format of the imported trace must be the same as the Format of the active trace Import File opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file see Chap ter 5 5 11 Trace Data tab on page 308 In case the selected file contains more than one trace another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one Lines softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 324: ...sable the limit check Off Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer FEED CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer FEED Response dialog The Response dialog allows you to configure the limit line segment in detail Access Define Limit Lines dialog Response cells For convenience Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus and Interpolation are repeated from the Segment List of the Define Limit Lines dialog Linear Formula Allow...

Page 325: ...ey were configured for If another format is selected the ripple limit lines are hidden and the limit check is temporarily disabled Background information Refer to Chapter 4 4 1 Limit check on page 127 5 6 2 1 Controls on the Ripple Test tab The Def Ripple Test button opens the Define Ripple Test dialog see Chap ter 5 6 2 2 Define Ripple Test dialog on page 327 Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the...

Page 326: ...efined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog An acoustic signal Ripple Fail Beep and a TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition Note Ripple check and display of limit lines are independent of each other The ripple limits can be displayed no matter if the ripple check is enabled If Ripple Check is enabled the ripple limits are checked no matter if they are displayed The ripp...

Page 327: ...lts All Traces Defines the visibility of ripple info fields in the active recall set If disabled only the ripple info field of the active trace is displayed in case it has ripple check enabled If enabled ripple info fields are displayed for all traces with ripple check enabled Remote command CALCulate RIPPle DISPlay RESult ALL STATe Clear Test Resets the limit check results Remote command CALCulat...

Page 328: ...the individual ripple limit ranges The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each range plus the following editable columns Range On Off enables or disables the ripple limit check in each range Disabling the ripple limit check does not delete the range but hides the entry in the info field Start Stimulus is the smallest stimulus x axis value of the range Stop Stimulus is the ...

Page 329: ...is equivalent to Add Delete removes the selected range from the list Delete All clears the entire range list so it is possible to define or load a new rip ple limit line Align All redefines existing sweep ranges such that they cover the overall sweep range and have almost equal width The ripple limits are estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created ranges Remote command ...

Page 330: ...page 532 You can choose between various options Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines Assign different colors to limit line segments with disabled limit check Note Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DISPlay STATe Limit Check Switches the limi...

Page 331: ...surement points Show or hide the colored squares Note Circle limit check and display of limit circles are independent of each other The limit circles can be displayed no matter if the circle limit check is enabled If Limit Check is enabled the ripple limits are checked no matter if they are displayed If result evaluation is limited to a user defined display circle the Chapter 5 6 3 Circle Test tab...

Page 332: ...d off Sounds are generated using the built in sound chip and loudspeaker of the R S ZND Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe Clear Test Resets the limit check results Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position Remote comm...

Page 333: ...he active trace is displayed in a com plex format Show Border If enabled the border of the Display Circle is shown whenever the related trace is dis played in complex format The border color can be modified by a user defined color scheme Element Vertical Range Lines Remote command CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DISPlay STATe Limit to Circle On Off If enabled only trace points within the configured Di...

Page 334: ...hides a horizontal line associated to the active trace in a cartesian diagram area The line can be moved to particular trace points to retrieve the response values It also shows which parts of a trace are above or below a definite response value The controls on this tab are only active if the active trace is displayed in cartesian format If another trace format is selected the line position is del...

Page 335: ...arkers on page 89 Chapter 3 3 6 6 Set by marker on page 63 5 7 1 Markers tab Creates markers and configures their properties Markers are available for all trace for mats A first marker labeled M1 is automatically created when the MARKER hardkey is pressed The Mkr 1 Mkr 10 and Ref Mkr softkeys enable the corresponding markers Add Marker adds a new marker Related information Refer to the following s...

Page 336: ...ARKer Mk REFerence Y On Enables disables the active marker Markers remember their Marker Props while disabled see Chapter 5 7 2 Marker Props tab on page 338 The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ ated trace is deleted Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence STATe All Off Disables all markers of the active trace Markers remember their Marker...

Page 337: ...ge their X position If the Marker Mode is Arbitrary also the response value Y position can be changed See also Activating and moving markers on page 90 Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk Y CALCulate Chn MARKer STATe AREA Ref Mkr Creates a reference marker and assigns it to the active trace When a marker is cre ated a triangle labeled R is positioned on the trace a...

Page 338: ...5 7 2 Marker Props tab Modifies the properties of a marker created previously see Chapter 5 7 1 Markers tab on page 335 The functions except Export Markers are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers Marker Name Assigns a new name to the active marker Marker names can contain letters num bers blanks and special characters Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME CALCulate Chn MARKer...

Page 339: ... on the trace If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus the marker can be moved horizontally At the same time the marker s stimulus and response values are adjusted i e its vertical position automatically follows the trace Fixed freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value Tracking is disabled The stimulus and response values are ...

Page 340: ... list of all markers with their names stimulus and response values The following example of a marker file describes a recall set with two traces Trc1 and its memory trace Mem2 Trc1 Trc1 has a reference marker R and three nor mal markers M1 M2 M3 assigned the memory trace has no markers Remote command MMEMory STORe MARKer Decimal Places Opens the User Interface tab of the System Config dialog which...

Page 341: ...um or minimum magnitude Max and Min also overwrite the current Search Mode Search Min and Search Max and the Peak Type for the peak search functions Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute MINimum MAXimum CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Center Marker See Center Marker Start Marker Stop Marker Span Marker on page 354 Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum...

Page 342: ... has the smallest distance from the current marker response value Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute LPEak RPEak Search Range Opens the Search Range dialog Tracking Enables disables tracking of the active marker for the current Search Mode which cau ses the marker to be updated after each sweep or after each sweep point in case of Sweep Progress Among the available search mode...

Page 343: ...eated marker is displayed in the center of the search range Search Range Selects the Search Range to be assigned to the selected marker Full Span means that the Search Range is equal to the sweep range Besides it is possible to store up to 10 customized search ranges The Search Range s are bordered by the Start and Stop values Start must be smaller than Stop otherwise the second value is automatic...

Page 344: ...Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area Range limit lines are two vertical lines at the Start and Stop values of the active search range Range 1 to Range 10 The line color can be modified by a user defined color scheme Element Vertical Range Lines Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DOMain USER SHOW 5 7 3 3 Marker Config dialog The Marker Config dialog allows you to...

Page 345: ...LCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold STATe Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for peak searches and activates it If Active only peaks with an excursion above the configured Excursion value are considered By definition the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity The unit...

Page 346: ...ou to set the domain for the multiple peak search A modified domain takes effect the next time Max Min is used Tracking Enables or disables tracking for Multiple Peak search If enabled a new multiple peak search is performed for each sweep creating deleting markers as needed Define an Eval Range to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power inter val Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer...

Page 347: ... excursion for multiple peak searches and activates it If Active only peaks with an excursion above the configured Excursion value are considered By definition the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets th...

Page 348: ...mand CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TARGet Target Format Selects the format that is used to specify the Target Value The selected target format applies to the current marker only each marker can have a different target format The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z x jy is converted Target Format Description Formula Lin Mag Magnitude of z unconverted z sqrt x2 y2 dB Mag Magnitud...

Page 349: ...et CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Search Left Search Right Searches the Target Value to the left right of the active marker s stimulus value within the current search range see Chapter 5 7 3 2 Search Range dialog on page 343 If the search is successful the active marker is moved to the next smaller larger stimu lus value with this target value Use Search Left Search Right repeatedly to lo...

Page 350: ... sweep types the Bandfilter functions can still be useful to analyze general trace properties The Eval Range button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to nar row the Bandfilter search to a particular stimulus range See Evaluation Range dia log Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks A bandpass peak must fall off on both sides by the specified Ban...

Page 351: ... the center of the peak Depending on a system setting the center is either calculated as the geometric or the arithmetic mean of the Lower Edge and Upper Edge frequencies see Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center on page 548 The search results are displayed in the movable Bandfilter info field Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPASs CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion E...

Page 352: ... Bandwidth M3 indicates the Upper Edge of the bandstop i e the point on the right edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum in the search range pass band value minus the specified Bandwidth M4 indicates the center of the peak Depending on a system setting the center is either calculated as the geometric or the arithmetic mean of the Lower Edge and Upper Edge positions see Geom...

Page 353: ...ual to Bandwidth None Bandfilter search switched off result off Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth MODE Tracking Causes the active Bandfilter search to be repeated after each sweep When tracking mode is active the markers typically change their horizontal and vertical positions as the measurement proceeds Tracking mode properties Tracking modes are available for all search mode...

Page 354: ...weeps linear or logarithmic It is enabled if the active marker is in Delta Mode Span Marker adjusts the sweep span to the range between the active delta marker and the reference marker Remote command CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion CENTer CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STARt CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STOP CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SPAN Ref Val Marker Max Marker Min Marker The foll...

Page 355: ...This shift of the refer ence plane must be carried out on the Delay trace but has an impact on all trace for mats A standard application of Zero Delay at Marker is correction of the constant delay caused by the interconnecting cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT line stretch Note Zero Delay at Marker modifies the Offset parameters and therefore influen ces the entire channel Remote ...

Page 356: ...race when marker coupling is enabled All marker coupling applies to all traces in the active recall set that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace Channel marker coupling applies to all traces in the active channel Diagram marker coupling applies to all traces in the active diagram that have the same stimulus variable as the active trace The selected Coupling Type applies to all mark...

Page 357: ... For Time Domain traces points in the observation interval are interpreted as stimulus values All stimulus settings except the Time Domain X Axis settings are channel set tings Time Domain X Axis applies to the active time domain trace only Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 1 3 Traces channels and diagrams on page 75 Chapter 3 3 6 2 Setting the sweep range on page 61...

Page 358: ... Chapter 5 10 2 2 Define Segments dialog on page 372 Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency STARt SENSe Ch FREQuency STOP SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer SENSe Ch FREQuency SPAN SYSTem FREQuency query frequency range of the network analyzer Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points for CW Mode sweeps This value can also be set on the Sweep Params tab of the Sweep softtool see Number of Poi...

Page 359: ... Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Start Power Stop Power Defines the sweep range for Power sweeps Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP RF Off All Channels RF Off All Channels switches the internal power source for all channels off if checked or on Switching off the RF power helps to prevent overheating of a connec ted DUT while no meas...

Page 360: ...361 Time Start is the lowest displayed time and corresponds to the left edge of the Cartesian diagram Time Stop is the highest displayed time and corresponds to the right edge of the Cartesian diagram Time Center corresponds to the center of the Cartesian diagram i e Time Start Time Stop 2 Time Span corresponds to the diagram width i e Time Stop Time Start Time Start and Time Stop or Time Center a...

Page 361: ... distance between the source and the DUT is calculated from the propagation time the velocity of light in the vacuum and the velocity factor of the receiving port Distance Time c0 Velocity Factor for transmission measurements Distance 1 2 Time c0 Velocity Factor for reflection measurements The factor 1 2 accounts for the return trip from the DUT to the receiver The velocity factor of the receiving...

Page 362: ...a surement time Segmented sweeps In segmented frequency sweeps the filter settings can be selected independently for each segment see Chapter 5 10 2 2 Define Segments dialog on page 372 Bandwidth Bandwidth the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter Within the value range the entered value is rounded up to 1 10n Hz 1 5 10n Hz 2 10n Hz 3 10n Hz 5 10n Hz 7 10n Hz n 0 Values exceeding the maximum band...

Page 363: ...us signal near the measurement frequency alternative techniques e g a smaller filter bandwidth must be used The average factor is also valid for calibration sweeps The calculation of system cor rection data is based on the averaged trace Factor On Reset Factor defines the number of averaged traces On enables or disables the sweep average Reset starts a new average cycle The average cycle is also r...

Page 364: ... of the measurement Access CHANNEL SWEEP hardkey Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 1 4 Sweep control on page 77 Chapter 4 1 4 4 Stimulus and sweep types on page 81 5 10 1 Sweep Params tab Allows you to define the scope and timing of the measurement in the active channel Segmented sweeps In Segmented linear frequency sweeps the sweep parameters can be set independ ent...

Page 365: ...time and screen resolution Increasing the number of sweep points improves the resolution of the trace but increa ses the measurement time The overall measurement time is composed of the hard ware settling time at the beginning of the sweep plus the sum of the measurement times at each individual sweep point Hence the measurement time increases roughly linearly with the number of points See also Ch...

Page 366: ...set to 0 s Sweep Time indi cates the estimated sweep time depending on the current measurement settings The Sweep Time and Meas Delay values are maintained until changed explicitly if Auto is switched off If a time sweep is active Sweep Time cannot be modified The analyzer uses the previously defined sweep time settings Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TIME SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO Meas Delay Adds a ...

Page 367: ...the sweep range 5 10 2 1 Controls on the Sweep Type tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range The frequency range sweep range and the internal generator power can be specified in the Stimulus settings see Chapter 5 8 1 Stimu lus tab on page 357 The step width between two consecutive sweep points is con stant an...

Page 368: ...r a large frequency range e g over several octaves In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a logarithmic frequency scale The following example shows a Log Freq sweep with the forward transmission parameter S21 as measured quantity and a dB Mag scaled y axis Tip In Log Freq representation limit lines and ripple limit lines appear as exponential curves see Chapter ...

Page 369: ...ed and a dB Mag scaled y axis is used In the frequency range between the sweep segments the trace is displayed as a straight line Tip You can change to point based x axis to improve the display of a segmented fre quency sweep see Seg X Axis on page 371 Remote command SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE SEGMent Power In a Power sweep the internal generator power is swept in dB linear equidistant steps over a conti...

Page 370: ...rameters especially the number of points Any trigger mode is allowed A CW Mode sweep corresponds to the analysis of a signal over the time with a time scale and resolution that is determined by the trigger events In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear time scale like e g in an oscilloscope The diagram is similar to the Time diagram The following example...

Page 371: ...on the number of measurement points the mea surement bandwidth the delay time before each partial measurement and the number of partial measurements required for each measurement point The analyzer estimates this time based on the current measurement settings If the Stop Time is smaller than the estimated minimum sweep time the entered value is increased automatically Equidistance of sweep points ...

Page 372: ... diagram all sweep points are equidistant Tip Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point based x axis is active see Chapter 4 4 1 1 Rules for limit line definition on page 128 Remote command SENSe Ch FREQuency SEGMent AXIS 5 10 2 2 Define Segments dialog The Define Segments dialog defines all channel settings for a Segmented frequency sweep and imports or ...

Page 373: ...the segment A single segment can con sist of only one point If Points is set to 1 then the Stop frequency is set equal to the Start frequency Note Displayed Columns and Segment specific Measurement Settings The remaining columns allow you to replace channel wide measurement settings by segment specific ones These columns are only displayed and the corresponding segment specific values are only app...

Page 374: ...segment before the active segment The segment numbers of all segments after the new segment are incremented by one The new segment covers a possible frequency gap between the two adjacent seg ments A new segment which is inserted before segment no 1 starts at the lower frequency limit of the analyzer The number of points is the same as the number of points of the next segment Delete removes the se...

Page 375: ...ains more columns listing all channel settings of the individual sweep segments The headings of the additional columns are IF Band width Hz en IF Selectivity en IF Sideband Meas Delay µs bo Sweep Time Auto en Frq Sweep Mode The R S ZND only supports the Stepped frequency sweep mode Hence the content of the last column is always Stepped During import other values are silently replaced Remote comman...

Page 376: ...or an application example refer to the detailed remote control description OUTPut Ch UPORt SEGMent Seg VALue Setting the segment bits does not change the analyzer state Time defines the sweep time for each segment The default configuration for a new segment is equal to the sweep time setting for unsegmented sweeps see Sweep Time Auto on page 366 When Time is checked two new columns appear in the t...

Page 377: ...r system of the analyzer The trigger system is used to synchronize the analyzer s actions with events that can be provided by an internal or external signal or user generated Manual Trigger Trig gered measurements are an alternative to the default mode FreeRun Continuous sweep where the measurement is continuously repeated without fixed time reference Any trigger event can start an entire sweep or...

Page 378: ... without fixed time reference The remaining trigger settings are not valid FreeRun means that a measurement in Continuous sweep mode is repeated as fast as possible In External trigger mode the measurement is triggered by an external 5 V TTL signal applied to one of the following rear panel connectors BNC connector EXT TRIG IN Pin 2 of the USER PORT connector Pin 18 of the Handler I O universal in...

Page 379: ...artial mea surement at the current or at the next sweep point If every sweep point only requires a single partial measurement this option is equivalent to Point See also Chapter 4 1 4 1 Partial measurements and driving mode on page 78 Segment means that each trigger event starts the next sweep segment within the current sweep If a sweep type other than Segmented is active this option is equiv alen...

Page 380: ...rnal trigger pulse can trigger a single measurement sequence Active High Active Low means that the analyzer measures in FreeRun mode as long as the external trigger signal is high low The measurement is dis continued when the trigger signal changes to low high Remote command TRIGger Ch SEQuence SLOPe 5 10 3 2 Trigger Manager dialog The Trigger Manager dialog defines individual trigger sources and ...

Page 381: ...at either the EXT TRIG IN connector on the rear panel or pin 2 of the USER PORT connector External 2 is the external trigger signal fed in at pin 25 of the USER PORT con nector on the rear panel External 1 and 2 External 1 or 2 means that the measurement sequence is initi ated after the analyzer has received an event from external trigger signal 1 and or 2 A Signal Type must be specified for both ...

Page 382: ...ability of certain settings depends on the selected Remote Language 5 10 4 1 Controls on the Sweep Control tab Continuous Single Activate either continuous default or single sweep mode In Continuous sweep mode the analyzer measures the related channel or chan nels continuously repeating the current sweep over and over In Single sweep mode the measurement is stopped after the configured number of S...

Page 383: ...ote Language the effect of this command depends on the sweep modes of the active channel and the restart behavior defined in the Restart Manager dialog Sweep Active Channel Sweep All Channels Active channel in Continuous sweep mode The Continuous sweep mode channels are swept cyclically the Single sweep channels are on hold First the Single sweep mode channels are swept one after the other each wi...

Page 384: ... greyed out Remote command INITiate CONTinuous ALL Sweep Controller Activates deactivates the resizable Sweep Info dialog which displays the current sweep stage The Sweep Info dialog is particularly useful for long duration sweeps that are executed in single sweep mode by observing the dialog it is easy to realize when the sweep is done The possible sweep stages and how they are displayed partly d...

Page 385: ...ls of the active recall set For the DEFAULT Remote Language the number of sweeps in single sweep mode is channel specific and can be defined in the table below the separator line The Sweeps column reflects the Sweeps settings of the individual channels The Sweeps setting above the separator line is unused and disabled For remote languages other than DEFAULT the Sweeps setting above the separator l...

Page 386: ...ool provides all functions related to system error calibration and scalar power calibration Access CHANNEL CAL 5 11 1 Start Cal tab The Start Cal tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration Calibration of the R S ZND is a fully guided process Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 5 Calibration on page 145 Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic calibration o...

Page 387: ... of ports is not possible and hence this button is hidden Calibration Start Cal Unit Opens the Calibration Unit wizard Calibration Start Manual Opens the Calibration Setting wizard Calibration Repeat Re enters the data acquisition step of the current calibration restoring the related channel settings This provides a convenient way to repeat or correct an existing cali bration without necessarily r...

Page 388: ...Calibration Start Cal Unit The wizard proceeds in three steps 1 Step 1 Ports allows you to configure the calibration and to select a calibration unit along with its characterization 2 Step 2 Connections allows you to define the port assignments between the R S ZND and the calibration unit 3 Step 3 Cal Unit guides you through the required measurements on the standards provided by the calibration un...

Page 389: ...the remote control command SENSe Ch CORRection CDATa If external switch matrices are involved use SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa instead Step 1 Ports Allows you to define the calibration to be performed and to select the calibration unit to be used along with its characterization Background and related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 5 1 Calibration types on page 146 Chapt...

Page 390: ...10 Calibration Unit wizard step 1 Ports Inline Calibration System Figure 5 11 Calibration Unit wizard step 1 Ports 4 test ports Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated Note Calibration and port de activation Cal softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 391: ...e RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Characterization Displays all characterizations that are stored in the active cal unit The Factory char acterization is available for all calibration units it ensures an accurate calibration for all standard applications To account for modifications of the cal unit such as the connec tion of additional adapters you can generate modified sets of characterization data using th...

Page 392: ... bidirectional transmission calibration types Trans Norm Both TOSM and UOSM are not available Transmission normalization and One Path Two Ports calibration types require two port Through characterization data for the cal unit For current calibration units how ever these two port characterizations are typically not part of the factory characteriza tion If a tooltip indicates missing two port charac...

Page 393: ... ports to be calibrated The selected characterization data do not contain all standards needed for the selected calibration type Step 2 Connections Defines the port assignments between the R S ZND and the calibration unit Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 5 6 Multiple port assignments on page 173 for details on multi ple port assignments Depending on the number of test ports the user int...

Page 394: ... procedure by which the R S ZND with a little help from the attached calibra tion unit auto detects the connected ports The automatic assignment replaces the configured one If auto detection fails because of a high attenuation in the signal path you can either enter the port assignment manually or connect matching port numbers and select Default Port Assignment Note For a unidirectional R S ZND se...

Page 395: ...Type selected in Step 1 Ports a subsweep is performed for each required test port or port pair and every required standard and for every possible path between the port pairs if external switch matrices are involved After all these calibration steps have been completed the resulting system error cor rection can be calculated and applied In the upper part of the Cal Unit screen the R S ZND shows the...

Page 396: ...es are labeled P j_i _ standard type Sij where j indicates the input test port and i indicates the output port e g P 1_2 _Unknown_Through S21 If switch matrices are involved the label also indicates which VNA port b is switched to the input port j and which VNA port a is switched to the output port i Instead of a single Sij trace we have multiple traces Sijvativbtj E g S21v1t1v2t2 means that S21 i...

Page 397: ...nly available if multiple port assignments are required Apply Cancel Apply the calculated system error correction to the active channel or to all channels in the active recall set if all channels were calibrated The Apply button is enabled when calibration sweeps have been successfully per formed for all required port assignments Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection ...

Page 398: ...e active channel is already equipped with a system error correction the Cali bration Setting wizard loads the underlying setup If the calibration setup is not changed and sweep data are available from previous calibrations the existing sys tem error correction can be optimized without repeating the measurement of all standards When you apply the new system error correction the current calibration ...

Page 399: ...est ports to be calibrated Note Calibration and port de activation The analyzer fimware automatically activates deactivates ports during after a success ful calibration Calibrated ports that were previously disabled are automatically enabled as single ended logical ports An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement i e the port is not required by any trace of the related channel is disab...

Page 400: ... port calibration types n 1 e g TOSM are symbolized by a closed square symbol The number of arrows increases the complexity but can also improve the accuracy of the calibration For an overview refer to Table 4 7 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Calibrate all Channels Check this box to apply the acquired correction data to all channels in the active recall set Leave it unche...

Page 401: ...Figure 5 15 Calibration Setting Wizard Step 2 Connectors and Cal Kits The upper part of the panel shows the ports and the calibration type selected in Step 1 Ports and Type The lower part gives access to the connector and cal kit settings Connector Gender Defines the connector types and genders of the ports to be calibrated For symmetric sexless connector types e g 7 mm PC7 Gender is unavailable I...

Page 402: ...ssigns the same connector type or gender to all selected physical ports For some multi port calibration types the port connector types must be equal e g because they require a Through standard with known characteristics Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection GENDers Import Cal Kit Opens the Import Calibration Kit dialog that allows you to...

Page 403: ...Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidir ectional operation on page 80 the TOSM calibration depicted above is not available Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep each diagram contains a single S parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard If switch matrices are involved a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of...

Page 404: ...h VNA port a is switched to the output port i Instead of a single Sij trace we have multiple traces Sijvativbtj E g S21v1t1v2t2 means that S21 is measured with VNA port 1 connected to the input port and VNA port 2 connected to the output port Start Cal Sweep The dock widget below the diagrams shows the calibrated ports and standards and vis ualizes the measurement progress Use the buttons represen...

Page 405: ...y Is enabled when sufficient data have been acquired for the calibrated ports and stand ards The button starts the calculation of the system error correction and closes the calibration wizard The current instrument settings are stored with the correction data To avoid incompatibilities older calibration data is deleted unless it has been transfer red into the calibration Pool using the Calibration...

Page 406: ...mit line double horizontal represents the target power of the source power cali bration Cal Power Pmtr n shows the reading of the power meter n in use This trace is only shown during the first calibration sweeps the following sweeps are based on the reference receiver result a m P m shows the source power reading of the analyzer wave quantity ref erence receiver at the calibrated source port P m A...

Page 407: ...Ref Receiver on page 408 and Power Cal dialog Meas Receiver on page 409 and Power Cal dialog Source Flatness on page 410 A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data has been acquired successfully Remote command SOURce Ch POWer CORRection ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection DATA PARameter Wv COUNt Ap...

Page 408: ...Cal wizard Ref Receiver Background information Refer to Chapter 4 5 6 1 Source power calibration on page 176 Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog The calibration is performed as described in Calibration procedure on page 176 Open the Pwr Cal Settings tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure Remote comman...

Page 409: ... and meas port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer The selected port is dis played with the current cal power settings see Chapter 5 11 3 2 Modify Cal Power dialog on page 430 moreover a circuit diagram visualizes the purpose of the mea surement receiver calibration Source Port defines the type of measurement receiver calibration If the source port i...

Page 410: ...e on page 178 No additional calibration settings are needed Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA Power Cal dialog Source Flatness In Source Flatness mode the Power Cal dialog guides you through a source power calibration of a single port The dialog shows the selected source port with its current cal power settings see Chapter 5 11 3 2 Modify Cal Pow...

Page 411: ...ngs tab Pwr Cal Settings to modify the calibration procedure Remote command SOURce Ch POWer CORRection ACQuire SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire 5 11 1 6 Cal Validation dock widget The controls on the Cal Validation dock widget allow you to set up and run a Calibra tion validation in basic or advanced mode Basic mode In basic mode the validation runs automatically with autodetected ...

Page 412: ...eters are within the specified Validation Lim its compared to the selected reference characterization FAIL otherwise In this case the validation stops at the first failed reflection measurement Remote command CALCulate CALValidate RUN Advanced Mode Switches to Advanced mode Advanced mode In advanced mode you can configure the validation settings Characterization Valida tion Limits and run or rerun...

Page 413: ... corresponding S parameters of the selected reference characterization Defaults are 0 2 dB for magnitude and 2 for phase deviations Remote command CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse MAGNitude LOWer CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse MAGNitude UPPer CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse PHASe LOWer CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse PHASe UPPer Preferences Allows you to configure the behavior of the validation diagra...

Page 414: ...ter 5 11 2 2 Calibration Kits dialog on page 417 Characterize Cal Unit See Chapter 5 11 2 3 Characterize Cal Unit dialog on page 422 For a unidirectional R S ZND this button is not available For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidir ectional operation on page 80 calibration unit characterization is not available 5 11 2 1 Cal Connector Types dialog The Cal Con...

Page 415: ...et model and reference impedance If you switch between sexed and sexless all kits assigned to the connector type are deleted Char Imp The characteristic impedance or reference impedance Char Imp Z0 for the connec tors is a critical value that has an impact on various parameter conversions Z0 enters into The calculation of the S parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector...

Page 416: ... sqrt GHz into a Keysight type Offset Loss in units of GΩ s and vice versa see View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog on page 420 The Electrical Length and Delay values in the View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog are directly entered and therefore independent of εr For waveguides the low frequency cutoff frequency fc is important because no wave propagation is possible at frequencies below fc If a s...

Page 417: ...ailable Cal Kits table vary depending on the selected Connec tor Type The table can also contain kits with ideal or typical parameter values see Cal kit parameter types The Keysight Model is an optional scheme to characterize the offset parameters of the standards see Offset Parameters on page 421 Cal kit labels Assigning a Label to user defined calibration kits is optional However the label is di...

Page 418: ...orted kits you can modify the contents See Kit Standards dialog on page 418 Remote command The following commands create and modify calibration kits SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect SENSe CORRection CKIT DMODe SENSe CORRection CKIT DELete Query connector types and calibration kits SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog Impor...

Page 419: ...andard types on page 158 Label is a user defined name of the standard The label can help you identify a standard or distinguish different standards with similar parameters Min Freq and Max Freq define the rated frequency range of the standard Dur ing calibration the analyzer checks whether the sweep range is within the validity range of all measured standards and possibly generates a warning s1p F...

Page 420: ...ens the View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog This dialog shows the circuit model for the selected standard For user defined standard you can modify the circuit model parameters See View Modify Cal Kit Standards dia log on page 420 Remote command SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType WLABel Read s1p File Read s2p File Opens a file selection dialog where you can selec...

Page 421: ...tic impedance Z0 in Ω and its Offset Loss in GΩ s Otherwise the standard is characterized by the R S ZVR compatible parameters Electrical Length in m Char Imp in Ω and Loss in dB sqrt GHz The loss is zero and not editable as long as the electrical length is zero Both parameter sets are closely related The Electrical Length is proportional to the Delay Z0 corresponds to the Char Imp Moreover the an...

Page 422: ...ad parameters for the different standard types in Chap ter 4 5 2 1 Calibration standard types on page 158 Remote command SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType 5 11 2 3 Characterize Cal Unit dialog The Characterize Cal Unit dialog displays the properties of the connected cal units provides control elements for characterization file management and starts the charac terization wizard Access CHANNEL CAL ...

Page 423: ...ns a dia log to enter the password and activate password protection at the next time the Set Password dialog is opened Enter an empty string no password to deactivate pass word protection Tip A password also blocks a switchover of the active characterization during calibra tion see Characterization on page 391 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword Characterization Data Display...

Page 424: ...racterization The guided characterization consists of the following steps 1 Characterization Select the characterized ports and cal unit standards to ini tiate the characterization sweeps 2 Save Characterization Data Save the characterization data to the calibration unit Step 1 Characterization Selects the calibration type and the characterized cal unit ports and initiates the neces sary character...

Page 425: ... differ ent assignment you can auto detect the actual assignment Automatic or select the analyzer port numbers manually Auto detection can fail e g because of a high attenuation in the signal path Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 auto detection at VNA port 2 does not work Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AU...

Page 426: ...tion types and characterization data on page 167 Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 Take OSM only works at VNA port 1 Through characterization is not supported Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs CONNection Next Proceeds to Step 2 Sa...

Page 427: ...ent to be written into the characteriza tion file A filename is required before you can Finish the characterization wizard and store the data Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT 5 11 3 Pwr Cal Settings tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling transmission coefficients Power calibration of the R S ZND is a fully menu guided process Efficien...

Page 428: ...ibrated source is switched off dur ing the calibration Recommended if the measurement involves a combination of dif ferent signals Remote command SOURce Ch POWer CORRection OSOurces STATe Flatness Cal Max Iterations Sets a limit for the number of calibration sweeps See also Calibration procedure on page 176 Remote command SOURce POWer CORRection NREadings SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage CO...

Page 429: ...libration of the reference receiver and the calibrated reference receiver for the flatness calibration Power Meter only Use a power meter for the calibration of the reference receiver and the flatness calibration Ref Receiver only Perform a flatness calibration using the reference receiver Do not recalibrate the reference receiver use the best available reference receiver calibration instead Ref R...

Page 430: ...ference receiver calibration These set tings are particularly important for test setups involving external attenuators or amplifi ers Access CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Cal Power The diagram in the center of the dialog visualizes the settings and results below Port Cal Power Allows you to define port specific power levels for source power calibrations Port Overview Port Cal Power The dialog shows...

Page 431: ...path Assume that a DUT requires a constant input power of 25 dBm and that the mea surement path contains an amplifier with a 30 dB gain After a reset of the analyzer the channel power Pb is 10 dBm Select a Port Power Offset of 5 dB at the calibrated source port and a Cal Power Offset of 30 dB Then the source power calibration ensures that the constant input power of 25 dBm is maintained across the...

Page 432: ...ve to be considered A two port connected to the DUT which is not present during power calibration e g an on wafer probe A two port connected to the power Meter during the power calibration e g an adapter The Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog allows you to modify the results of a scalar power calibration to account for these two ports Access CHANNEL CAL Pwr Cal Settings Transm Coefficien...

Page 433: ...e quency dependent attenuation Transmission coefficients are interpolated between the frequency points and extrapolated if necessary If no transmission coefficient is defined at all the R S ZND assumes a 0 dB attenua tion across the entire frequency range This assumption is equivalent to an ideal through connection or selecting No Coefficients in the Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog Re...

Page 434: ...te command MMEMory LOAD CORRection TCOefficient Ch MMEMory STORe CORRection TCOefficient Ch 5 11 4 Use Cal tab Provides access to functions for activating deactivating and managing calibrations Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 5 Calibration on page 145 5 11 4 1 Controls on the Use Cal tab User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the ac...

Page 435: ... 6 3 Power calibration labels on page 178 The calibration status of each channel and trace appears in the setup information see Setup tab on page 555 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL Active Power Cals Opens the Active Power Cals dialog Manage Cals Recall Last Cal Set Loads and activates the recall set for which the last calibration was performed If the last calibrated setup is already activ...

Page 436: ...ations that have not been performed yet are grayed out Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 P2 cannot serve as source port Hence only a calibration of the measurement receiver can be performed at P2 Remote command SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt STATe SENSe Ch CORRection PCAL 5 11 4...

Page 437: ...The buttons between the tables are used to modify the calibration pool and apply cali bration data sets cal groups to channels Add copies the correction data of the selected channel to the cal pool generating a new pool member cal group Add All copies the correction data of all channels to the cal pool generating new pool members cal groups Replace overwrites a cal group with new correction data A...

Page 438: ...irectly in the corresponding table cell Delete from Pool deletes a cal group file from the pool Note however that calibra tions being used in any of the opened recall sets cannot be deleted Remote command MMEMory DELete CORRection Preset User Cal Selects a cal group from the pool that is activated during a user defined preset A Preset User Cal is particularly useful for scenarios involving Externa...

Page 439: ...ATE SENSe Ch CORRection DATA PARameter Sfk SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 5 11 4 4 JoinCal dialog Allows you to join existing calibrations Access CHANNEL CAL Use Cal JoinCal Background information See Chapter 4 5 8 Joining calibrations on page 181 Input Calibration1 Input Calibration2 Cal Name Select the input calibrations to be joined and specify a name for the resulting calibra tion Remote command ...

Page 440: ... open the following dialogs Channel Manager see Chapter 5 12 1 2 Channel Manager dialog on page 442 Active Channel Selects an arbitrary channel of the active recall set as the active channel This function is disabled if the current recall set contains only one channel If one or several traces are assigned to the selected channel one of these traces becomes the active trace The order of all channel...

Page 441: ...ings including a possible channel calibration and traces The new traces are displayed in the active diagram area The new channel is named Ch n where n is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Channel Manager dialog Tips Use Copy Channel Diagram to display the copied traces in a new diagram area Remote command CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON CALCulate Ch ...

Page 442: ...balanced ports and port impedance settings for the selected channel When Fixture Simulator is deactivated all balanced ports are resolved to single ended ports all port impedances are set to default all de embeddings are disabled At the GUI the Balanced Ports dialog and the de embedding tabs and dock widgets are disabled Related remote commands generate an error When Fixture Simulator is reactivat...

Page 443: ...CATalog CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ID CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe INITiate Ch CONTinuous Add Delete The buttons below the channel table add and delete channels Add adds a new channel to the list The new channel is named Ch n where n is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one Delete deletes the channel selected in the table This button is disabled if the...

Page 444: ...e 239 Note If the Fixture Simulator is disabled for the related channel see Fixture Simula tor on page 442 the Balanced Ports button is inactive grayed out 5 12 2 2 Port Settings dialog The Port Settings dialog is an example of a Multi channel setup dialog It allows you to switch the RF port power off or on and gives access to the port power settings and stimulus settings for the selected channel ...

Page 445: ...de sweeps for the current channel See Modify Cal Power dialog on page 445 In the default configuration the channel base power Pb is used The frequency adjus ted result is displayed in the Power Result column Slope Defines a linear factor to modify the port specific source power as a function of the stimulus frequency The resulting output power at port frequency f is calculated as Power Result Slop...

Page 446: ...all ports Edit Stimulus For non segmented sweeps the Edit Stimulus button opens the Stimulus dialog that allows you to access the stimulus settings without having to leave the Port Set tings dialog Apply OK Cancel Modified Port Settings take effect on Apply or OK Use Cancel to discard possi ble changes Stimulus dialog The Stimulus dialog gives access to the parameters of a non segmented sweep Acce...

Page 447: ...weep Type a different set of parameters can be modified Table 5 3 Parameters for frequency sweeps Lin Log Freq Sweep CW Mode Sweep Time Sweep Enter Display x x x Start x Stop x Power x x x Number of Sweep Points x x x Enter Display The Enter Display combo boxes in the Frequency Sweep and Power Sweep sections of the Stimulus dialog control how frequency and power values are entered and displayed in...

Page 448: ...anged The next partial measure ment is carried out in an additional sweep This mode is usually faster than Chopped mode In Block Alternated mode you can split the sweep range into several blocks of sweep points The measurement then proceeds block per block using the Alterna ted driving mode for each block In Chopped mode the analyzer completes the necessary sequence of partial measurements at each...

Page 449: ...The Offset Embed softtool allows you to define a length offset and loss for each test port The offset compensates for the known length and loss of non dispersive and per fectly matched transmission lines between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT It also contains advanced functions for deembedding embedding the DUT from into more general physical virtual matching networks placed between th...

Page 450: ...ou to activate or deactivate offset loss correction for selected physical ports and to set related parameters Access Overview panel Offset Figure 5 22 Offset Embed dock widget Offset panel The Offset panel can also be activated by selecting the Offset tab or One Way Loss tab Refer to its description for additional functions and remote commands Active The checkbox in the Active column activates dea...

Page 451: ...ation in both directions the magnitude shift of a reflection parameter due to a given loss is twice the magnitude shift of a transmission parameter See also Chapter 4 6 1 6 Application and effect of offset parameters on page 187 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt FREQuency SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SECond STATe SE...

Page 452: ...t tool tab Refer to its description for background information parameters and additional remote commands Active The checkbox in the Active column activates or deactivates the selected Single Ended de embedding Single Ended tab i e adds or removes it to from the calcula tion flow without changing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt STATe CALCulate...

Page 453: ... Sets panel allows you to configure the Port Sets to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned Add Delete The touchstone files defining these networks can also be selected from here Access Overview panel Port Sets The Port Sets panel can also be activated by selecting the Port Sets tab Refer to its description for background information parameters and additional remote commands Move ...

Page 454: ... embeding for the related port set i e adds or removes it to from the calculation flow without changing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe File Name i Inc Seq i The File Name 1 and File Name 2 buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding embedding Port Sets tab is def...

Page 455: ...chstone file this file can be selected from the dock widget For network types that are defined using one or more touchstone files the required files can also be selected from here If necessary use the button on the right hand side to open the Balanced Ports dialog and change the balanced port configuration This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced tab Refer to its description for ...

Page 456: ... VNA side Furthermore it is possible to Swap Gates i e to instruct the analyzer to swap the VNA and DUT side Note The loaded S parameters are stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full embedding and deembedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced ...

Page 457: ...ed S parameter trace is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full embedding and deembedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding group 5 13 1 7 Impedance Renormalization panel This panel provides alternative access to the reference impedance setting...

Page 458: ...ate or deactivate the configured differential match embedding i e adds or removes it to from the calculation flow without chang ing its parameters Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt STATe File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the File Name 1 column is enabled if a 2 port data Network is selected When loading the touchstone file s2p the analyzer by default ass...

Page 459: ... following sections Chapter 4 6 Offset parameters and de embedding on page 182 Chapter 4 6 1 1 Definition of offset parameters on page 182 Chapter 4 6 1 3 Auto Length on page 183 Chapter 4 6 1 6 Application and effect of offset parameters on page 187 Chapter 4 6 1 7 Offset parameters for balanced ports on page 187 Chapter 4 6 1 5 Fixture Compensation on page 186 5 13 2 1 Controls on the Offset tab...

Page 460: ... on page 187 Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt TIME SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt DISTance Permittivity Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity εr and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT The velocity factor is 1 sqrt εr and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric...

Page 461: ... reference plane end of the offset transmission line Its absolute position is varied along with the length offset If Adjust Time Gate is on the time gate is moved to left right when the offset correc ted reference plane is moved to the right left Its absolute position remains fixed With this setting it is possible e g to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con nector while the antenn...

Page 462: ...umerator If the active trace shows an S parameter Sij then Auto Length adds a length offset at port i If the receive port is balanced then the same offset is applied to both its physical ports Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay AUTO Fixture Compensation The Fixture Compensation button opens the Fixture Compensation dialog Evaluation Range The Evaluation Range button opens the Evaluation Ran...

Page 463: ... SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter LOSS STATe Direct Compensation With Direct Compensation a frequency dependent transmission factor is calculated see Auto Length and Loss vs Direct Compensation on page 186 Remote command SENSe CORRection COLLect FIXTure LMParameter STATe SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp STATe Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R S ZND performs the sweeps fo...

Page 464: ...and Loss To acquire the necessary data proceed as indicated in the information area With Prompt for Each Port disabled Take acquires data for all selected ports in one go Otherwise sweeps are taken port by port For Direct Compensation it is also possible to save the acquired data to file In future measurements you can load these files instead of repeating the data acquisition Figure 5 24 Measure F...

Page 465: ...fer to the program example for SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Remote command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure STARt SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure SAVE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure EXPort SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure IMPort 5 13 3 One Way Loss tab Defines loss parameters for each physical port Use the complementary dock...

Page 466: ...calculation Note If Auto Length and Loss is used with a line connected to a test port the end of the line should be left open To calculate the electrical length offset and loss of port i you have to select a trace that uses port i as one of its receive ports It is not relevant for the Auto Length and Loss function which Port is selected If the measured quantity is a ratio or if it is derived from ...

Page 467: ...apacitances inductances See Chapter 4 6 2 3 Circuit models for 2 port networks on page 190 Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate dembedding embedding for selected ports see Chapter 5 13 1 3 Single Ended panel on page 452 Background information Refer to the section Chapter 4 6 2 10 Combining Several de embedding networks on page 198 Figure 5 25 Offset Embed Single Ended softto...

Page 468: ...ains all available 2 port networks The symbol selects no network and disables single ended de embedding The 2 Port Data network is defined by means of an s2p file see Select File For deembedding the s2p file can also be generated by a third party fixture model ing tool see Fixture Tool on page 469 The remaining networks are defined by lumped elements Their parameters are displayed below the graphi...

Page 469: ...r change the port numbers e g S12 S21 when loading the file Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch SENDed EMBedding PhyPt Fixture Tool The Fixture Tool section is only available for deembeddi...

Page 470: ...ing based on IEEE 370 on page 211 Chapter 4 7 9 In situ de embedding on page 213 Chapter 4 7 10 Smart fixture de embedding on page 213 Access CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Single Ended Balanced Run Tool Figure 5 26 Fixture modeling dialog SFD Single Ended Ports Figure 5 27 Fixture modeling dialog ISD Balanced Ports Offset Embed softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 471: ...74 3 Run the selected tool to calculate the Touchstone files modeling the test fixture see Chapter 5 13 5 4 Save Fixture Model on page 475 The calculated sNp file s can then be used to deembed the DUT at selected port s All files generated by actions in this dialog are stored in the directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding The current implementation assumes symmetrical lead i...

Page 472: ...ance correction functionality of the respective tool This is a global setting Remote command CALCulate FMODel EZD IMPedance CALCulate FMODel ISD IMPedance CALCulate FMODel SFD IMPedance CALCulate FMODel SFD AUTO Suppress Remeasure Warnings If checked the Measure Coupon and Measure DUT Test Fixture do not raise warn ings if the measurement is repeated with different ports This is a global setting R...

Page 473: ...without applying any deembedding files 5 13 5 2 Measure Coupon The Measure Coupon section allows you to measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured The following coupon types are supported ISD SFD EZD Sym 2x Thru 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon TYPE CALCulate FMODel SFD COUPon TYPE Measure ...

Page 474: ... MEASure FILename CLEar CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon MEASure OPEN FILename CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon MEASure SHORt FILename CALCulate FMODel SFD COUPon MEASure FILename CALCulate FMODel SFD COUPon MEASure FILename CLEar CALCulate FMODel EZD COUPon MEASure FILename CALCulate FMODel EZD DUT MEASure FILename CLEar Active Before starting to measure the test coupon use these checkboxes to indicate the...

Page 475: ...en to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embed ding Remote command CALCulate FMODel EZD DUT MEASure CALCulate FMODel ISD DUT MEASure CALCulate FMODel SFD DUT MEASure Active Before starting to Measure use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which DUT test fixture are connected For single ended deembedding 2 ports must be active for balanced deembedding 4 ports Remote command ...

Page 476: ... page 474 The resulting Touchstone files S parameters of the lead ins the lead outs and the de embedded DUT are written to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding If result files with the same names already exist you can decide whether you want to rename or overwrite them If running the deembedding tool causes errors the Deembedding Tool Errors dialog provides additional information N...

Page 477: ... gates ports function is used Remote command CALCulate FMODel EZD Pt RUN STATe CALCulate FMODel ISD Pt RUN STATe CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt RUN STATe Display Select Display to display some or all the S parameter traces of the generated touch stone file that are applied for deembedding A dialog then allows you to select the S parameter traces to be imported to new memory traces 5 13 5 5 Deembedding...

Page 478: ...2 61 Figure 5 31 Delta L error messages 5 13 5 6 ISD Advanced Settings Advanced settings of the ISD tool For details see the ISD User Guide For the analyzer fimware these are global settings Offset Embed softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 479: ...st coupon is a bit too short or too long Default is 1 Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD SCALe FTIMe Automatic Flt Tm for DUT Lead Ins Lead Ins If checked default the flight time for DUT lead ins is calculated automatically Other wise it can be specified see Flt Tm for DUT Lead Ins on page 479 Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD FTIMe OVERride Flt Tm for DUT Lead Ins Lead Ins If Automatic Flt Tm ...

Page 480: ...he ports on the right according to the selected port sequence Manually set ports use Ports to Skip manual to define the ports to be skipped Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP NONE CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP LEFT CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP RIGHt Ports to Skip manual DUT With Fixture If Ports to Skip is set to Manually set ports this text field allows you to define the ports to be...

Page 481: ...loss is not less than the insertion loss the maximum fre quency to deembed together with the proper Insertion Loss setting gives the best accu racy By default the maximum frequency is set to the maximum frequency the VNA can use Remote command CALCulate FMODel ISD SCALe FREQuency DC Extrapolation Calculations This setting is only active if a recent version of the ISD tool from 2019 12 or later is ...

Page 482: ...mote command CALCulate FMODel SFD DIFFcfg Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture Ports 1 3 on Left default odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right Ports 1 2 on Left ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N 1 to 2 N are on the right Remote command CALCulate FMODel SFD TOTaldiffcfg 5 13 5 8 EZD Advanced Settings Advanced settings of the E...

Page 483: ...parameter data for f 0 Remote command CALCulate FMODel EZD DCEXtrapolat Impedance Correction Settings Provides additional settings for the impedance correction of the EZD tool if enabled in the main dialog see Use Impedance Correction Remote command CALCulate FMODel EZD IMPedance REFerence CALCulate FMODel EZD IMPedance BWIDlimit 5 13 6 Port Sets tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding...

Page 484: ... to the left of the circuit the DUT ports are on the right side You can define inde pendent transformation networks for all port sets The port set number i e the number at the beginning of each Port Set item corre sponds to the position of the port set in the Port Sets panel Remote command The port set number corresponds to the ListId numeric suffix in the port set de embedding commands see e g CA...

Page 485: ...ListId TNDefinition CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters C 1 2 3 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters L 1 2 3 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters R 1 2 3 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters G 1 2 3 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId TNDefinition CAL...

Page 486: ... 13 7 Balanced tab Selects 4 port transformation networks for balanced port deembedding embedding defines their parameters assigns them to a balanced port and enables embedding Use the complementary dock widget to create Balanced panel and to activate or deac tivate dembedding embedding for selected balanced ports see Chapter 5 13 1 5 Bal anced panel on page 455 Background information Refer to the...

Page 487: ...ogical Port Logical analyzer port as defined in the Balanced Ports configuration The transfor mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit the DUT ports are on the right side Remote command The LogPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding commands identifies the logical port see e g CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EM...

Page 488: ...itch to change from resistances in Capacitor in parallel with resistor circuit blocks to conductances and vice versa Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced...

Page 489: ...ruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced EMBedding LogPt 5 13 8 Ground Loop tab Allows you to specify a 1 port ground loop deembedding embedding network Such a network is either defined via its S parameter stored in a one port Touchstone file s1p or by selecting a predefined lumped element model Shunt L or Shunt C and specify in...

Page 490: ...e 1 Port Data network is defined by imported S parameter data see Select File The remaining networks Shunt L and Shunt C are defined by lumped elements whose parameters are displayed below the graphical list Tip Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol Use the Conductance in Embedding Networks switch to change from resistances in Capacitor ...

Page 491: ...VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding group Set to Ideal Ground This function is enabled as long as the 1 Port Data network is active An imported S parameter set is replaced by the S parameters of an ideal through connection which eliminates the transformation network 5 13 9 Differential Match tab Allows you to specify a 2 port embedding network for the different...

Page 492: ...rts are on the right side You can define independ ent embedding networks for all balanced ports Remote command The LogPt numeric suffix in the embedding deembedding commands identifies the logical port see e g CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt STATe Network The graphical list contains the available 2 port networks for Differential Match embed ding The symbol selects no ...

Page 493: ...d as long as the 2 Port Data network is selected This net work is defined by its S parameters stored in a two port Touchstone file s2p No additional parameters are required Note The loaded file is stored in the active recall set Persisted recall sets contain the full de embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments Remote command MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch DIFFerential EMBeddi...

Page 494: ...efault Otherwise the legacy S parameter based calculation is used See Chap ter 4 1 5 Data flow on page 82 Remote command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks WAVes 5 13 11 Delta L tab The controls on the Delta L tab allow you to set up and perform a Delta L PCB char acterization The Delta L tab is only visible if option R S ZND K231 is installed on the instrument See Chapter 4 7 11 Delta L 4 0 PCB cha...

Page 495: ...ss CHANNEL OFFSET EMBED Delta L Delta L Settings Method Selects the Delta L characterization method to be used Default is Method 2L For background information see Delta L 4 0 PCB characterization Method 1L handles single ended and balanced measurement results differently acti vate 1L Diff Mode for balanced measurements For Method 2L and Method 3L measurements can also be single ended or balanced b...

Page 496: ...mended by Intel If you want to enter your own values uncheck Use Default Frequencies and select Edit User Frequencies to bring up the User Frequencies dialog Remote command CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies USEDefault CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies CURRent CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies CURRent COUNt CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies DEFault CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies DEFault COUNt CA...

Page 497: ...cy range of the R S ZND Remote command CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MINimum CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MAXimum Trace On OK the VNA deletes the existing traces and sets up the traces whose measure ment is required for the selected Delta L Method If Use Recommended Trace Configuration is checked then each of the new traces is displayed in a separate diagram Otherwise the VNA plac...

Page 498: ...ed Depending on the selected Method on page 495 the 2L Measurement and 3L Measurement can be disabled Load File 1L Measurement 2L Measurement 3L Measurement Loads coupon measurement results from a s2p or s4p Touchstone file Remote command CALCulate FMODel DELT M1L FILename CALCulate FMODel DELT M2L FILename CALCulate FMODel DELT M3L FILename Measure 1L Measurement 2L Measurement 3L Measurement Mea...

Page 499: ...ote command CALCulate FMODel DELT RUN Clear All 1L Measurements Clear Selected 1L Measurements If Method 1L is selected in the Delta L Settings dialog the VNA firmware builds up a cache of coupon measurements Touchstone files in the DeltaL 1LMeasurementCache subfolder of the user data folder C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Clear All 1L Measurements deletes this cache Clear Selected 1L M...

Page 500: ...r it belongs and the computed Delta L uncertainty Method 1L For Method 1L the Delta L diagram displays the following traces An insertion loss trace L i for each touchstone file L i s 2 4 p loaded or measured in the measurement cache An additional trace StdDev representing the standard deviation of the 1L analysis at the analysis frequencies Offset Embed softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik Gm...

Page 501: ... added to the StdDev trace at the analysis frequencies The marker names indicate the computed Delta L uncertainties 5 14 File softtool The File softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data Access SYSTEM FILE File softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 502: ...ttings It can be stored to a VNA recall set file znx znxml For background information see Chapter 4 1 2 Recall sets on page 75 5 14 1 1 Basic Recall Set functions To create a recall set based on the current analyzer configuration select Save To open an existing recall set select Open Recall To create an additional setup select New File softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 503: ... setup use Save Remote command MEMory DEFine Open Recall Loads a recall set from a file znx znxml Opens the Open Dialog with suitable file filters Check the 32 Bit File Mode option on the right hand side of this dialog if you want to open a znx file that was saved by a 32 bit firmware If the current setup includes External switch matrices and the recall set to be loaded does not contain a switch m...

Page 504: ... example if you attempt to load a recall set of a different R S ZND model or with different optioning Not all incompatibilities can be adjusted Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe Save Saves the active recall set to a file znx znxml Displays the Save Dialog that allows you to specify a file name and location for the recall set file Remote command MMEMory STORe STATe Recent Files The buttons are labe...

Page 505: ...physical RF connections of the related switch matrices For each Matrix in Recall Set select the corresponding row and select View Matrix RF Connec tions to view the respective matrix RF connections Make sure to connect the Assigned Matrix accordingly Background information Refer to Chapter 4 7 20 External switch matrices on page 220 View Matrix RF Connections This dialog presents the RF connection...

Page 506: ...orites list If the list is complete i e if there are no more spare positions new favorites can only be added after existing ones were removed Add Active Recall Set Adds the active recall set to the list of favorites This button is only active if the current setup was loaded from or saved to a recall set Import Opens a file browser that allows you to add an arbitrary recall set to the favorites lis...

Page 507: ... file type bmp jpg jpeg pdf png svg and to save diagram con tent to a file of this type see also Save Dialog on page 99 Note that the diagram content to be saved can be configured in the Content tab Print Charts group of the Printer Setup dialog E g if you select All diagrams on their own page there then only the content of the active diagram is saved to file If you select No diagram at all then T...

Page 508: ...s on page 857 5 14 4 1 Content tab The Content tab allows you to select the diagram content to be printed The selected item in the Print Charts group specifies how the diagram area of the active recall set is printed Currently the following options are offered No Diagram at all Active Diagram only All diagrams on one page All diagrams on their own page and Hard copy of diagram area The latter is a...

Page 509: ...tions Allows you to select and or define the color scheme for printing The Define Print Color button opens the Define User Color Scheme dialog which allows you to create or modify your own print color scheme The R S ZND now uses different User Defined color schemes for display and print ing Remote command HCOPy PAGE COLor 5 14 4 3 Page Setup tab The Page Setup settings are visualized in the previe...

Page 510: ...e Channel Only allowing you to analyze different simulation data in different channels of a setup Tip Using the standard trace file export functionality the loaded data can be converted to different formats Config Additional Simulation Data Allows you to import port specific simulation data into the current channel firmware simulation only see Chapter 4 7 22 1 Simulation data on page 229 Opens the...

Page 511: ...e application window 5 14 7 Configure Additional Simulation Data dialog The Configure Additional Simulation Data allows you to define port specific S param eter data for the current channel see Chapter 4 7 22 1 Simulation data on page 229 Access SYSTEM FILE More Config Additional Simulation Data 5 14 7 1 Configure Additional Imports tab On the Configure Additional Imports tab you can load addition...

Page 512: ...e as channel or setup specific simulation data instead see Load Simulation Data on page 510 Add Insert Allows you to import S parameter traces from additional Touchstone files into the active channel s simulation data globally defined or set using Load Simulation Data Add puts them at the end of the import definition table Insert at the position below the currently selected row Note that the order...

Page 513: ...ports Export snp Allows you to export the active channel s complete VNA S Matrix into a single Touch stone file The S parameters defined by additional imports are summarized on the Resulting S Matrix Overview tab The remaining ones are taken from the channel specific setup specific or global simulation data For a possible application see Performance aspects on page 512 5 14 7 2 Resulting S Matrix ...

Page 514: ...the softtool to load one of the available applications and to display the softtool tabs related to this application The External Tools application is always available other applications are provided by certain software options 5 15 1 External Tools application The External Tools application gives access to pre installed and user defined external tools Access SYSTEM APPLIC External Tools Applic sof...

Page 515: ...hortcut in the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna External Tools direc tory replaces one of the buttons Title and Bar Task Bar On Displays or hides the title bar and the task bar across the bottom of the screen Typi cally you can use the task bar to change between the VNA application and other exter nal tools See also Chapter 3 3 2 1 Title bar on page 46 Screen Keyboard Opens the Windows O...

Page 516: ... DtF trace derived from Sii shows the distance from the calibrated reference plane faults appear as peaks above a certain level If option R S ZND K3 is not installed on the R S ZND the Distance to Fault applica tion is not available To achieve the best distance resolution set the sweep span as large as possible and use the Auto Number of Points to adjust the number of sweep points Background infor...

Page 517: ... always assumes that the DUT is connected to port p 1 For bidirectional R S ZND if the active trace is a reflection trace Sii the analyzer firmware assumes that the DUT is connected to port p i Otherwise it assumes that the DUT is connected to port p 2 When activating Distance to Fault the analyzer firmware sets Spp as measured quantity of the active trace proposes a reflection normalization at po...

Page 518: ...f Points Selects the minimum number of sweep points that are required to provide an unambig uous display of fault locations for the active Distance to Fault trace If Auto Number of Points actually modifies the Number of Points a tooltip is dis played The required number of points depends on the frequency span Δf fstop fstart see Start Frequency Stop Frequency Center Frequency Span Frequency on pag...

Page 519: ...lect Available Cable Types to access the list of predefined and user defined cable types see Chapter 5 15 2 2 Available Cable Types dialog on page 521 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SELect Start Cal Unit P2 Refl OSM Start Cal P2 Refl OSM Sets up and runs the Calibration Unit Calibration Setting wizard to perform a full one port calibration at physical port 2 only port 2 enabled and...

Page 520: ...imit forms a new upper line segment replacing other pre viously defined limit lines see Chapter 5 6 1 2 Define Limit Lines dialog on page 320 Remote command CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK STATe Fault Limit Determines the level above which peaks in the active Distance to Fault trace are con sidered as faults The fault limit is defined relative to the 0 dB line in the test diagram i e the peak...

Page 521: ...t Attenuation Table on page 521 The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec tric with permittivity εr relative to its velocity in a vacuum velocity factor 1 It is nee ded to convert the propagation times into distances Frequency Dependent Attenuation Table The Attenuation of Cable Type dialog defines the frequency dependence of the cable attenuation The...

Page 522: ...cal culates the Attenuation fcenter by linear interpolation If fcenter is below above the specified frequency range then Attenuation fcenter is linearly extrapolated from the two lowest highest frequency points It is recommended to specify the cable attenuation as accurately as possible The cor rection due to the attenuation factor is proportional to the measured distance between the fault and the...

Page 523: ... Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA FaultNo Contents Allows you to filter the Fault Table All Channels default The table displays the faults of all Distance to Fault traces in the current recall set Active Channel The table displays the faults of all Distance to Fault traces in the active channel if any Active Trace The table displays the faults of the activ...

Page 524: ...rranging different diagrams Access SYSTEM DISPLAY Related information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 1 3 Traces channels and diagrams on page 75 Chapter 4 2 1 Display elements of a diagram on page 86 Chapter 3 3 4 Handling diagrams traces and markers on page 52 5 16 1 Diagram tab Selects a diagram as the active diagram defines a title deletes or adds diagrams and arranges them on the sc...

Page 525: ...e the diagram including the last active trace in the diagram tap on a trace list to activate the trace including the corresponding diagram Some of the functions of the Traces tab activate a particular trace including the cor responding diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr CATalog Add Tr Diag Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram The trace is cre ated ...

Page 526: ...the Split tab Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd MAXimize Title Defines a title for the Active Diagram The visibility of the title area can be toggled using Show Title Remote command DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA Via remote control it is also possible to define a diagram name and to retrieve the lists of diagrams together with their names DISPlay WINDow Wnd NAME DISPlay WINDow Wnd CATalog Show Titl...

Page 527: ...es Remote command DISPlay LAYout OVERlay Split All Creates a separate diagram for each trace in the active recall set and automatically arranges those diagrams in the diagram area Existing diagrams are deleted during this process Tip To vary the size and position of the diagram areas drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the Split tab Remote command DISPlay LAYout SPLit 5 16 ...

Page 528: ...grams Traces with different format and channel settings e g Cartesian and complex diagrams are separated if possible Example of four traces in Quad Split display If less than two three four traces are available the new diagrams are created with a default trace Dual triple quad split corresponds to Split Type Tile Horizontal with 2 3 4 diagrams Tip To vary the size and position of the diagrams drag...

Page 529: ...ary the size and position of the diagrams drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the Diagram tab Remote command DISPlay LAYout Diagrams Rows Columns Selects the number of Diagrams or Rows and Columns to which the traces in the active recall set are split The split is performed according to the selected Split Type If the entered number of Diagrams exceeds the number of previous...

Page 530: ... analyzer screen and for color hardcopies respectively Dark Background sets a black background color The traces and information ele ments in the diagram areas are displayed in different colors This setting is usually suitable for observing results on the analyzer screen Light Background sets a light background color The traces and information ele ments in the diagram areas are displayed in differe...

Page 531: ...ve Information for a particular recall set to mask the stimulus values you are asked to set a password If this password is non empty it is requested the next time someone tries to uncheck Hide Sensitive Information to unmask all stimulus values for this recall set Both checked state and password are stored in and loaded from the active recall set Remote command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe C...

Page 532: ...nt Size Scales the fonts in the diagrams The scaling affects the trace and channel lists and the info fields Remote command DISPlay RFSize 5 16 3 2 Define User Color Scheme dialog The Define User Color Scheme dialog allows you to configure user defined diagram color schemes for display and print User defined color schemes can be saved to a file for later re use Access SYSTEM DISPLAY Config Define ...

Page 533: ... opens a standard color dialog where you can assign a color to the selected element Trace Line Style and Trace Line Width are enabled if the selected element is a trace Remote command Display color scheme only DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB DISPlay CMAP TRACe RGB Limit Test Show Limit Fail Symbols Displays or hides the colored squares on the trace indicating failed measurement points Hide the squares if ...

Page 534: ...ted in a diagram or moved to another diagram If Trace Colors per Diagram is enabled factory preset all diagrams use the same trace colors The first trace in each diagram gets trace color 1 the second trace color 2 etc cyclically In particular if a trace is removed from a diagram then all traces in this diagram that were created after the removed one will change their color And if this trace is mov...

Page 535: ...cheme the default directory is C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna ColorSchemes Remote command Display color scheme MMEMory STORe CMAP MMEMory LOAD CMAP Print color scheme MMEMory STORe CMAP HCOPy MMEMory LOAD CMAP HCOPy 5 16 3 3 Info Window The Info Window displays a configurable set of marker properties and Bandfilter search results It automatically resizes the displayed text to fit the w...

Page 536: ...contents you want to display in parts or in total It contains all info fields of the current recall set that are currently not displayed in the info table see Info Table Show Posi tion on page 531 Content Selection The lower part of the Info Window Configuration dialog allows you to pick the con tents of the selected info field you want to display in the Info Window For marker info fields use the ...

Page 537: ...elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously Menu Bar Toggles the visibility of the Menu Bar For background information see Chapter 3 3 2 4 Menu bar on page 48 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR MENU STATe Status Bar Toggles the visibility of the Status Bar For background information see Chapter 3 3 2 7 Status bar on page 50 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR STATus STATe Hard Key Panel Toggles th...

Page 538: ...oolbar on page 46 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR TOOLs STATe Additional Function Minimize Mazimize the Softtool Panel The softtool panel can be minimized maximized via the X hamburger icon in its top right corner Remote command SYSTem DISPlay BAR STOols STATe 5 16 5 Touchscreen tab Allows you to lock the touchscreen functionality of the R S ZND to prevent inadvertent entries Enabled Lock Diagra...

Page 539: ...p tab Gives access to system wide properties settings resources and service functions 5 17 1 1 Controls on the Setup tab The following buttons in the Setup tab open related dialogs System Config System Config dialog Options Info dialog Options tab Info Info dialog Setup tab Operators Check Execute Selftest Info dialog Selftest tab Runs the selftest first Service Function Service Function dialog La...

Page 540: ...libration unit characteriza tions and display titles Currently the following encodings are supported ANSI default UTF 8 Shift JIS Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate CODec 5 17 1 2 System Config dialog The System Config dialog allows you to define global settings that are not affected by an instrument reset See Chapter 4 1 1 Global persistent settings on page 74 Access SYSTEM SETUP Setup System Conf...

Page 541: ...et Otherwise they perform a factory preset Remote command SYSTem PRESet REMote STATe Global Settings The two buttons reset all directory settings e g the directories for storing trace data limit lines calibration data and all settings in the Printer Setup dialog to default val ues See Chapter 5 14 4 Printer Setup dialog on page 508 Remote command n a Preset Configuration Specifies whether the pres...

Page 542: ...tings Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to 10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration The source powers are reset to their original val ues after the calibration is completed The automatic power reduction can be deactiva ted in case that the ...

Page 543: ...alibration Man ager dialog on page 436 Remote command n a Search Path for additional Cal Kits and Connector Types Contains the name and path of a special directory for cal kit files calkit All cal kit files in the special directory are loaded automatically as predefined kits i e read only kits which cannot be modified every time the VNA application is started It is pos sible to select the default ...

Page 544: ...m STATe SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe Transparent Info Fields This checkbox enables or disables transparent info fields for markers and trace statis tics Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace Remote command n a Show Sweep Symbols This checkbox turns sweep symbols on or off Sweep symbols are arrows pointing downward onto the trace They are displayed if the sweep time exceeds an upper ...

Page 545: ...n page 383 If unchecked factory default the previous measurement data are preserved If checked they are deleted Remote command SYSTem TRESet STATe Show X Axis Grid Labels If enabled the firmware displays X axis grid labels in cartesian diagrams with linear scale Remote command SYSTem DISPlay XLABels Number of Trace Colors Defines the maximum number of trace colors trace properties for the user def...

Page 546: ...efines which instrument events are indicated by an information popup Display of information popups can be globally disabled or limited to certain event types Show Instrument Messages Defines whether information popups are displayed at all Remote command SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe Show Info Messages Show Warning Messages Show Error Messages Selectively disables enables display of information popups...

Page 547: ...to 19 Setting the channel bits does not change the analyzer state Channel Bits Decimal Entry of the 8 bit decimal value 0 255 for the selected channel The channel bits control eight output signals at the USER PORT connector The signals are 3 3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 256 independent analyzer states For an application example refer to the description of the re...

Page 548: ...uency of the passband or stopband see Bandfilter search on page 94 If Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center is checked the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used otherwise their arithmetic mean Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth GMCenter Error Dump Type Determines the level of detail Minimal Normal Large Full and hence the size of the dump f...

Page 549: ...ons If checked columns are separated by tabs rather than spaces Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TABS Trim Leading Whitespace Touchstone Export Options If checked whitespace at the beginning of each line is removed Remote command MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TRIM Positive Number Prefix Touchstone Export Options Positive numbers can either be prefixed by blanks by plus signs or not at all Re...

Page 550: ...not sufficient for this purpose Power Mode at Sweep End Power Reduction at Sweep End The analyzer offers three power modes at sweep end Auto results in the shortest measurement time default setting If enabled at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored The config ured Settling Delay is not applied Reduce is intended for measurements on sensitive DUTs primarily power sw...

Page 551: ...uest and sweep start See Figure 5 37 for an illus tration Use the Reset Delay button to adjust the Settling Delay to its default value Remote command SOURce POWer SWEepend SDELay Recovery tab Provides a single function Boot into Recovery Screen that allows you reboot the instrument and launch the R S Recovery Environment From there you can restore the original system image including operating syst...

Page 552: ...sables the REST interface to the HUMS service Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate REST ENABle SNMP State Device Utilization Status Enables disables the SNMP interface to the HUMS service and allwos you to select the supported SNMP protocol versions Depending on the enabled versions different parts of the Protocol subtab are enabled Note If you activate v2c version v1 is also active Remote command SY...

Page 553: ...devices belong to an SNMP community You can specify different communities for read write and read only access Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RO SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP COMMunity RW SNMPv3 Configuration Allows you to enable and configure the SNMPv3 specific authentication and privacy features passwords for access security and data encryption To add a new user select the Add button...

Page 554: ...GS VALue DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS DELete DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS DELete ALL 5 17 1 3 Info dialog The Info dialog displays information about the instrument and its operation All func tions are primarily intended for error diagnostic and service purposes see Chapter 9 3 Collecting information for technical support on page 1180 Many Info tabs also dis play softkeys for printing the contents or saving them t...

Page 555: ...selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R S Support for fault diagnosis see Chapter 9 3 Collecting information for technical support on page 1180 Remote command DIAGnostic DEVice STATe SYSTem DFPRint Setup tab Displays the channel and trace settings of the active recall set and the main character istics of the instrument including its IP address Setup softtool www allice de Allice...

Page 556: ... Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog For an overview of options refer to Chapter 4 7 Optional extensions and accesso ries on page 200 Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description the option key and key type and the activation and expiration date if applicable Remote command DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO Setup softtool www allice de Allice Messte...

Page 557: ...rted if suppor ted by the matrix Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr RELays SWITch COUNt Selftest tab Allows you to run an automatic selftest on the analyzer and to display its results Check Show Details to see the detailed test results Error Log tab Contains a chronological record of errors that occurred in the current and in previous sessions see Chapter 9 1 Errors during firm...

Page 558: ...the corresponding option R S ZND K980 Next Calibration Due The date and time the instrument needs calibration to be done Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DUE DATE Recommended Calibration Interval Queries the recommended calibration interval set by Rohde Schwarz service Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration INTerval Last Service The last date and time the instrument was service...

Page 559: ...o perform selftests and other helpful checks from one central place in the analyzer GUI The start page of the wizard is the selec tion page for the checks its final page is the summary of all selected and executed checks Recall Allows you to load an operators check definition from an existing OperatorsCheck XML opch file Such a file can be created with the Save function of the Operators Check wiza...

Page 560: ...ge the next step in the Operators Check wizard is the standard selftest functionality of the R S ZND firmware Execute Repeat Executes the selftest for the first time in this Operators Check wizard session or repeats it Remote command SYSTem OPCHeck SELFtest Power Check page In case you selected Power Check on the Welcome page you can configure and run port power checks from this page During the po...

Page 561: ...ult or custom settings Default Settings and whether you want to ask the firmware to Prompt before every port check Active Defines whether a power test shall be executed for the related port Default Settings Defines whether default or custom power and limit line settings shall be used for the power test of the related port The checkbox is only enabled if this port is set to Active If you uncheck it...

Page 562: ... same as in the general purpose limit line setup dialog For their description see Chapter 5 6 1 2 Define Limit Lines dialog on page 320 Prompt before every port check This option comes in handy if you want to connect a particular device such as a reflec tion standard to the related port before you execute or repeat the test Execute Repeat Executes or repeats the Active port power tests with their ...

Page 563: ...Log area Remote command SYSTem OPCHeck PLEVel PORT Port Summary page Summarizes the check results and allows you to print them Print Allows you to print the Summary of the executed tests similar to the Print function ality of the system Info dialog Setup softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 564: ... repre sentative only Refer to the service manual for more information Password Enter a password here to activate the required service level Remote command SYSTem PASSword CENable Service Function Identifier of the service function in dotted textual example sw common mem ory_usage or dotted decimal example 0 1 18 0 representation Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 5 17 2 Freq Ref tab Sele...

Page 565: ...alyzer synchronizes to an external reference clock via the REF IN connector at the rear of the instrument The external reference signal has to meet the specifications of the data sheet its frequency must be specified in the Ext Frequency field The internal reference signal is synchronized to the external signal The external signal is also looped to REF OUT so that it can be reused to synchronize o...

Page 566: ...ands reported in this documen tation see Chapter 7 3 SCPI command reference on page 625 The ZVABT language ensures compatibility with network analyzers of the R S ZVA B T family E g compared to the DEFAULT language the command set does not include INITiate CONTinuous ALL and INITiate IMMediate ALL The function of INITiate CONTinuous and INITiate IMMediate DUMMy is modified refer to the remote cont...

Page 567: ...strings are set Binary data is transferred in a device specific bit order however the bit order can be changed using HP xxxx specific commands The ID and option strings can be changed or reset to the R S factory ID string Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing SYSTem IDENtify FACTory SYSTem OPTions STRing SYSTem OPTions FACTory FORMat BORDer Advanced Opens a dialog that allows to set the following ...

Page 568: ...splay of remote control command errors 5 17 4 External Devices tab Allows you to set up and configure external power meters and calibration units and to enable error logging for the current session Background information Refer to the following sections Chapter 4 7 19 External power meters on page 218 Chapter 4 5 5 Automatic calibration on page 164 5 17 4 1 Controls on the External Devices tab The ...

Page 569: ...IB The R S ZND B10 can be used control external devices via GPIB An additional USB to IEC IEEE adapter is only required in case you want to control the R S ZND via GPIB at the same time Log Errors Enables the transfer of error messages for external devices e g connection errors to the error log The error log appears in the Info dialog see Chapter 5 17 1 3 Info dia log on page 554 Remote command n ...

Page 570: ...dress The R S ZND can auto detect the instrument type driver and the serial number of the connected power meter To control external devices via GPIB the pre installed RS Visa library visa32 dll must be replaced by the NI Visa library Known Devices Table with all power sensors meters the analyzer detects to be on line i e connected and switched on Scan Instruments refreshes the table Select to add ...

Page 571: ...blem with the device This state can be caused by different problems General communication error In this case check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices see Log Errors on page 569 and search the Error Log tab for self test error codes of the device The device driver does not match exactly the devi...

Page 572: ...CKET is applicable for devices connected to the GPIB Bus or LAN connectors on the rear panel of the analyzer respectively Other is used in particular for USB connections e g for auto detected R S NRP Zxx sensors Address contains the address for the current interface type GPIB addresses must be unique for all devices connected to the GPIB bus range 0 to 30 GPIB and IP addresses must agree with the ...

Page 573: ...CKET Use complete VISA resource string Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr DEFine Auto Config Causes the analyzer to clear the lists of Known Devices and Configured Devices and to configure all R S NRPxxS SN power sensors detected at any of the USB ports automatically No manual configuration is required Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CONFigure AUTO STATe 5 17 4 ...

Page 574: ...er Pmtr SPCorrection STATe 5 17 4 4 Inline Calibration Systems dialog USB connected Inline Calibration Controllers ICCs are autodetected by the analyzer firmware The ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs so connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R S ZND For background information see Chapter 4 5 5 4 Inline calibration on page 168 Configured Devices Each ICC R S ZN Z30 is ...

Page 575: ...ct between different switch matrix routing optimizations Speed switch as little as possible Precision always use the best possible route in terms of quality priority See Chapter 4 7 20 4 Multiple paths precision vs speed on page 223 for back ground information The selection is only enabled if at least one of the connected switch matrices has mul tiple routes with non identical priorities 5 17 5 2 ...

Page 576: ...witch matrix can also be registered manually 1 tap Add Device to open the Add External Switchmatrix dialog see figure below 2 In the Add External Switchmatrix dialog a specify the IP address or hostname of the switch matrix b tap Identify to auto detect the matrix type Driver of the remote switch matrix If the device cannot be identified e g because it is temporarily unavailable select the appropr...

Page 577: ...ine connected switched on ready to be used There is a problem with the device This state can be caused by different problems General communication error In this case check whether the device is properly connected to the configured interface Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices see Log Errors on page 569 and search the Error Log tab for self test error codes of the...

Page 578: ...2473 If necessary add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings Remote command n a Add Device Opens the Add External Switchmatrix dialog that allows manual registration of an external switch matrix In the Address of New Instrument part you can specify the required connection prop erties Interface selects the connection type currently only LAN is available Address specifies the IP addr...

Page 579: ...and modify the IP Configura tion of an external device that is equipped with a LAN interface Access External Matrices dialog Configure Because the IP configuration is actually written to the device the device must be online for the settings to be applied Uncheck Manual Configuration if the device shall discover its host configuration via DHCP In this case only the device s Hostname can be specifie...

Page 580: ...UT test port Every matrix that was added to the connection configuration must be connected to the VNA by at least one RF connection Every VNA port that is not connected to a matrix must be assigned to a test port The test ports must be numbered consecutively starting with 1 Configuration errors are displayed in balloon popups appearing at the lower left corner of the dialog Background information ...

Page 581: ...ort Add Opens the Add Switch Matrix dialog Select the required matrices and tap OK to add them to the RF connection configura tion or tap Cancel to quit the dialog without adding a switch matrix to the RF connec tion configuration Note This dialog is shown automatically in case no matrix has been added to the RF connection configuration yet If the RF configuration already contains all registered s...

Page 582: ...g without removing a switch matrix Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix DELete Renumber Test Ports Applies a default test port assignment to the available matrix test ports and VNA ports You can use this function at any time to number the used test ports in ascending order e g after editing port connections Note however that in general this will not preserve any manually created test ...

Page 583: ...mmand SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MVNA SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection tap on the corresponding port symbol In the Edit dialog select the appropriate test port or tap Set Unused to delete the test port association Setup softtool www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 584: ...e help Access Help Contents Index About from the menu bar Contents Opens the help browser and activates its Contents tab The Contents tab displays the table of contents of the analyzer s online help Index Opens the help browser and activates its Index tab The Index tab displays the index keywords of the analyzer s online help About Opens the About Vna dialog The About Vna provides basic informatio...

Page 585: ...ive recall set depending on the settings in the Presets tab of the System Config dialog A preset can be a factory preset or a user defined preset It does not affect global set tings and resources e g System Config settings calibration kits and calibration pool etc Tip If you perform a PRESET by mistake use UNDO to restore your previous instrument settings Remote command RST SYSTem PRESet SCOPe SYS...

Page 586: ... grayed out if an undo or redo is not possible In general the undo and redo actions are disabled if the size of the active recall set file exceeds 1 MB Tip You can also use UNDO after a SYSTEM PRESET to restore your previous instrument settings Additional Function Keys www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 587: ...onnector is on the rear panel of the instrument The R S ZND can be remote controlled via GPIB The network analyzer can itself act as a master and control external devices via LAN USB or GPIB A VISA installation on the analyzer is a prerequisite for this type of remote control The RS VISA library is installed with the VNA firmware To control external devices via USB the IVI Visa Shared Components m...

Page 588: ...provide an easy to use graphical user interface for remote control An example is the GPIB Explorer also termed IECWIN32 which is pre installed on the analyzer See Chapter 6 1 2 GPIB Explorer on page 588 Instrument drivers provide an improved interface between the test software and the test instruments They perform the actual control of the instrument using higher level functions for operations suc...

Page 589: ...g an IP address on page 1186 VISA USB Remote control via USB is not possible for R S ZND NT pipe A B COM Parser only for a GPIB Explorer installed on the analyzer recommended for remote test on the instrument EB200 currently not supported Select SETUP Setup Info to look up the IP address information of your ana lyzer If you run the GPIB explorer on the analyzer the local host address loopback addr...

Page 590: ...d via the front panel controls The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the controller If the instrument is controlled via RSIB or VXI 11 protocol the alternative commands REM and LOC can be used to switch from manual to remote control and back While remote control is active operation via the front panel is disabled except the Remote softtool The instrument sett...

Page 591: ...played at the bottom of the remote screen you can use Clear Error Messages to delete it The remaining controls are for future extensions Display on and off states Switching on the display means that the analyzer shows the measurement screen with the current recall sets diagram areas and traces without leaving the remote state In this operating mode it is possible to observe the screen while a remo...

Page 592: ... state until it is reset to the manual state via the GUI or via remote control see Chapter 6 1 3 2 Returning to manual operation on page 593 You can also lock the remote touch screen using SYSTem TSLock SCReen A tooltip across the bottom of the remote screen indicates a remote command error You can switch off this tooltip using SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote OFF SCPI commands REM SYSTem DISPlay UPDat...

Page 593: ...lockout prevents unintentional switch over i e return to manual control is possible via remote control only Returning to manual control via the front panel keys can be enabled again e g by deactivating the REN control line of the GPIB bus 6 1 4 Combining manual and remote control Using a remote control script is the quickest and easiest way of performing complica ted tasks which need to be repeate...

Page 594: ...tting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the output level to some value Queries cause data to be provided for output on the GPIB bus e g for identifi cation of the device or polling the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common commands have a function and syntax that is precisely defined in standard IEEE 488 2 Typical t...

Page 595: ...ted Therefore GPIB bus control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings 6 2 2 1 Common commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET resets the instrument ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enabl...

Page 596: ...ce external trigger The following command has the same effect TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Note The short form is marked by uppercase letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Uppercase and lowercase notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several pa...

Page 597: ...g the command line the second command begins with the level below TRIG The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows TRIG SOUR EXT TIM 0 1 However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG THR LOW 6 2 2 4 Responses to queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwis...

Page 598: ...M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the default unit is used Example SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5GHz is equivalent to SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5E9 Special numeric values The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numeric values A query returns the associated numerical value Example Setting command SENSe FREQuency STARt MINimum The query SENSe FREQuency STARt returns 300000 ...

Page 599: ...lways be entered within single or double quotation marks or Example CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 or CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 6 2 3 5 Block data format Block data is a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example HEADer HEADer 45168xxxxxxxx The hash symb...

Page 600: ...commands follow SCPI syntax rules and SCPI confirmed commands have been used whenever possible These principles largely simplify the development of remote control scripts The GUI and the remote control command set both aim at maximum operating conven ience In manual control this generally means that the control elements are easy to find and intuitive to handle and that the effect of each operation...

Page 601: ...ve traces in remote control In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined The active channel contains the active trace see Chap ter 4 1 3 1 Trace settings on page 76 In remote control each channel contains an active trace unless the channel contains no trace at all This principle actually simplifies the remote control command s...

Page 602: ...lt trace Trc1 as the active trace for remote control Create a new marker to verify that Trc1 is now the active trace in channel 1 In the SCPI command description the numeric suffix Ch is used for channel settings it denotes the configured channel whereas Chn is used for trace settings it refers to the active trace in the channel 6 3 3 Initiating measurements speed considerations After a reset the ...

Page 603: ...annels Method Commands Example Channel number Ch as a numeric suffix CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON Query all channel names CONFigure CHANnel CATalog returns the names of all channels Assign or query channel name of a channel num bered Ch CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ABCD CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME returns ABCD Query channel number assigned to a channel named ABCD CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ID ABCD retu...

Page 604: ...nced by its trace name CONFigure TRACe Trc CHANnel NAME ID ABCD returns the actual channel number for trace ABCD the trace suffix is ignored 6 4 Command processing The block diagram below shows how commands are serviced in the instrument IEC IEEE bus Ethernet Input unit with input buffer Command recognition Instrument hardware Output unit with output buffer Instrument settings database Status repo...

Page 605: ... it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution 6 4 3 Data base and instrument hardware The expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation measurement etc The controller is not included The data base ...

Page 606: ...the GPIB bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI 6 4 6 Command sequence and command synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implem...

Page 607: ...ger to execute than OPC sending the command sequence INIT OPC results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR Sending the commands INIT OPC CLS still initiates a sweep Since the operation is still pending when the analyzer executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPC is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the analyzer...

Page 608: ...registers As shown in section Overview of status registers the status information is of hierarchi cal structure STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE make up the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers The STB receives it...

Page 609: ... 10 Limit trace no 9 Limit trace no 8 Limit trace no 7 Limit trace no 6 Limit trace no 5 Limit trace no 4 Limit trace no 3 Limit trace no 2 Limit trace no 1 LIMit2 summary 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 Register not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used Limit trace no 16 Limit trace no 15 n...

Page 610: ...rt is permanently overwritten by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents always reflect the current instrument state This register part can only be read but not overwritten or cleared Reading the CONDi tion register is nondestructive PTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the condition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in ...

Page 611: ...B bit 1 If the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be overwritten and read by the user at will Its contents are not affected by reading The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instru ment automatically generates the sum bit for each regis...

Page 612: ...ognized and further pinned down by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message 3 QUEStionable status summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable register and the associ ated ENABle bit is set to 1 The bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be further pinned down by polling the QUEStionable register 4 MAV bit message ava...

Page 613: ... bit basis The ESR corresponds to the CONDition part of a SCPI register indicating the cur rent instrument state although reading is destructive The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STa tus Byte STB is set The bits in the ESR are defined as follows Bit No Meaning 0 Operation com...

Page 614: ...can be set using the command ESE and read using ESE See also Common commands 6 5 3 4 STATus OPERation The STATus OPERation register contains conditions which are part of the instrument s normal operation The analyzer does not use the STATus OPERation register 6 5 3 5 STATus QUEStionable The STATus QUEStionable register indicates whether the acquired data is of ques tionable quality and monitors ha...

Page 615: ... Failed limit check for trace no 16 This bit is set if any point on trace no 16 fails the limit check Numbering of traces The traces numbers 1 to 16 are assigned as follows Traces assigned to channels with smaller channel numbers have smaller trace numbers Within a channel the order of traces reflects their creation time The oldest trace has the smallest the newest trace has the largest trace numb...

Page 616: ...set if the level control at one of the ports is unsettled or unstable possibly due to an external disturbing signal Change generator level at the port check external components 3 Receiver overload protection tripped This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive input level at one of the ports If this condition persists all internal sources are switched off Reduce RF input level at the port ...

Page 617: ...ep are too close so that the analyzer can not process the measurement data until the next sweep point starts Increase stop time reduce no of points increase IF bandwidth If possible reduce number of partial measurements e g by restricting the number of ports measured 14 Power settings exceed hardware limits This bit is set if the source power at one of the test ports is too high or too low Reduce ...

Page 618: ...SRE ESB 3 Insert OPC in the command sequence e g at the end of a sweep When all commands preceding OPC have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ Example Generate an SRQ when a limit is exceeded 1 Set bit 3 in the SRE summary bit of the STATus QUEStionable register set after STATus PRESet 2 Set bit 10 in the STATus QUEStionable ENABle register summary bit of the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1...

Page 619: ...ously requested by the controller with a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a Parallel Poll Enable PPE register This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well ...

Page 620: ...r queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be queried via remote con trol using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem ERRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error mes sages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause ...

Page 621: ...l OPERation and QUESTiona ble registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 yes yes Fill PTRansition parts with 1 Clear NTRansition parts yes yes Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing and input buffer yes yes yes 1 Every command being the first in a command line i e immediately following a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the outp...

Page 622: ...atures but do not need R S ZVR com patibility you should use the commands listed in Chapter 7 3 SCPI command refer ence on page 625 7 1 Special terms and notation This section explains the meaning of special syntax elements used in the SCPI com mand reference sections The following information is provided in the reference sections Complete command syntax and parameter list Description of the comma...

Page 623: ...imes 7 1 3 Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters Parame ters either provide alternative options setting a or setting b or setting c see special character or they form a list separated by commas setting x y Parameter1 Parameter2 In the command tables and lists parameters are generally described by a name Parameter1 Parameter2 written in angle brack ets In ...

Page 624: ...ndard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer and the tooltip error messages for remote control ESE Event Status Enable 0 255 Sets the event status enable register to the value indicated The query ESE returns the contents of the event status ena...

Page 625: ...tus clear flag The response can be 0 or 1 RST Reset no query Sets the instrument to a defined default status The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet DUMMy The RST value of each command is reported in the reference description See also SYSTem PRESet SCOPe SRE Service Request Enable 0 255 Sets the service request enable register to the value indicated Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command det...

Page 626: ...te FMODel 642 CALCulate LIMit 671 CALCulate MARKer 688 CALCulate MATH 713 CALCulate PARameter 717 CALCulate RIPPle 726 CALCulate STATistics 734 CALCulate TRANsform 743 CALCulate other 805 7 3 1 1 CALCulate CALValidate Commands related to Calibration validation CALCulate CALValidate CHARacteriza 626 CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse MAGNitude LOWer 627 CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse MAGNitude UPPer 62...

Page 627: ...ation Limits on page 413 CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse PHASe LOWer Port Value CALCulate CALValidate RESPonse PHASe UPPer Port Value Defines the maximum phase deviations from the reference characterization S parame ters that are allowed during cal validation Use CALCulate CALValidate CHARacteriza to select the reference characteri zation Parameters Port Value RST 2 LOWer 2 UPPer Default unit degre...

Page 628: ...hn DATA Format The query reads the response values of the selected channel s active trace or reads error terms of the selected channel The set command either imports formatted or unformatted trace data to the selected channel s active trace see Chapter 4 1 5 Data flow on page 82 or writes error terms of the selected channel Note The data format is parameter dependent see tables below The unit is t...

Page 629: ...es are returned CALC2 PAR SDEF Trc2 S11 Create a second trace in a new channel no 2 The second trace does not become the active trace and is not displayed CALC DATA TRAC Trc2 FDAT Query the response values of the second non active trace 20 comma separated ASCII values are returned CALC DATA ALL FDAT Query the response values of all traces 40 comma separated ASCII values are returned Example Writin...

Page 630: ...er applying the fac tory calibration but before applying a user defined calibration if any Data access point 1 UCData Uncalibrated trace data Data access point 0 Note the respective trace must represent a wave quantity or ratio driving and receiving port must not be on a switch matrix Otherwise an error occurs The following parameters denote the error terms generated during a calibration Table 7 3...

Page 631: ...t name if omitted the active recall set is used Return values Data Response values either in ASCII or block data format depend ing on the current FORMat DATA setting Example See CALCulate Chn DATA Usage Query only CALCulate Ch DATA CALL Format Data The query reads the current response values of all S parameter data traces at channel Ch s data access point DACPoint If a full n port system error cor...

Page 632: ...mple Suppose that a TOSM calibration for ports 1 and 2 is active in channel no 1 CALCulate DATA CALL CATalog Query the traces available for CALCulate Ch DATA CALL The response is S11 S12 S21 S22 CALCulate DATA CALL SDATa Return the complex response values of all traces The traces in the catalog list are read one after another The response array contains n number of points pairs of real and imagina...

Page 633: ...Format FDATa SDATa MDATa Output format for the S parameter data see CALCulate Chn DATA Return values Data Trace data either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting Usage Query only CALCulate DATA DALL Format Reads the current response values of all data traces of the current recall set Use CALCulate DATA ALL to query data traces and memory traces Query parameters...

Page 634: ...untEnd Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin gle sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF Tip This command can only be used for SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt 1 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters Format SDATa Read unformatted sweep data fixed parameter Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point 2 values...

Page 635: ...ace acquired in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF The trace can be any of the traces acquired dur ing the single sweep cycle Tip This command can only be used for SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt 1 Ensure that the single sweep is terminated before using this command otherwise the results of the trace count will be unpredictable see example below Alterna tively use the CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRS...

Page 636: ...h Channel number of the previously defined S parameter group Query parameters Format FDATa SDATa MDATa Output format for the S parameter data see CALCulate Chn DATA on page 628 Example See CALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine SGRoup Usage Query only CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example ...

Page 637: ...h the one used during export Example See CALCulate Chn DATA 7 3 1 3 CALCulate FILTer GATE The CALCulate FILTer GATE commands define the properties of the time gate which is used to optimize the time domain response CALCulate FILTer GATE TIME AOFFset 637 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME CENTer 638 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME DCHebyshev 638 CALCulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME SHAPe 639 CALCulate Chn FIL...

Page 638: ...LTer GATE TIME CENTer CenterTime Defines the center time of the time gate Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters CenterTime Center time of the time gate Range 99 8999999 s to 99 8999999 s Increment 0 1 ns RST 1 5E 009 s Default unit s Example RST CALC TRAN TIME STAT ON CALC FILT TIME STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time...

Page 639: ...ulate Chn FILTer GATE TIME WINDow if you wish to select a Dolph Chebychev time gate Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters TimeGate MAXimum WIDE NORMal MINimum MINimum Steepest edges rectangle WIDE Normal gate Hann NORM Steep edges Hamming Maximum Maximum flatness Bohman RST WIDE Example RST CALC FILT TIME SHAP Reset the instrument and query the type of time gate us...

Page 640: ...StopTime Start or stop time of the time gate Range 100 s to 99 999999999998 s start time and 99 999999999998 s to 100 s stop time Increment 0 1 ns RST 1E 009 s start time to 4E 009 s stop time Default unit s Example RST CALC TRAN TIME STAT ON CALC FILT TIME STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate CALC FILT TIME STAR 0 STOP 10ns SHOW ON Set the start...

Page 641: ... GATE TIME TYPE TimeGateFilter Selects the time gate filter type defining what occurs to the data in the specific time region Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters TimeGateFilter BPASs NOTCh BPASs Band pass filter Pass all information in specified time region and reject everything else NOTCh Notch filter Reject all information in specified time region and pass ever...

Page 642: ...g is not supported CALCulate FMODel DELT 642 CALCulate FMODel EZD 651 CALCulate FMODel ISD 657 CALCulate FMODel SFD 666 CALCulate FMODel other 670 CALCulate FMODel DELT Commands for Delta L PCB characterization see Chapter 4 7 11 Delta L 4 0 PCB characterization on page 214 CALCulate FMODel DELT DIRectory 643 CALCulate FMODel DELT DIRectory DEFault 643 CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies CURRent 643...

Page 643: ...ODel DELT SWEep CONTrol IFBW 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol STEP 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MAXimum 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MINimum 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT TCONfig 651 CALCulate FMODel DELT TDR 651 CALCulate FMODel DELT DIRectory String Defines the working directory of the Delta L tool Parameters String Directory path either absolute or relative to the c...

Page 644: ...oss per inch uncertainties per default You can either use the algorithms s default or custom frequencies see CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies USEDefault Usage Query only Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Frequencies on page 496 CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies DEFault COUNt Returns the number of frequencies at which the Delta L algorithm calculates the loss per inch uncertainties per def...

Page 645: ...tom frequencies defined using CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies USER ADD etc Usage Query only Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Frequencies on page 496 CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies USER ADD UserFrequencies CALCulate FMODel DELT FREQuencies USER DELete Frequency The Delta L algorithm can calculate the loss per inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies see CALCulate ...

Page 646: ...ly Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Frequencies on page 496 CALCulate FMODel DELT M1L CACHe CLEar ALL If the 1 length method is used CALCulate FMODel DELT METHod M1L the VNA firmware builds up a cache of coupon measurements Touchstone files in the DeltaL 1LMeasurementCache subfolder of the user data folder C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna This command clears this cache Usage Eve...

Page 647: ...tion See Method on page 495 CALCulate FMODel DELT M1L FILename String CALCulate FMODel DELT M2L FILename String CALCulate FMODel DELT M3L FILename String For a Delta L PCB characterization this command loads the 1L Measurement data from a Touchstone file Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the selected working directory CALCulate FMODel DELT DIRectory Optio...

Page 648: ...line Delta L measurement CALCu late FMODel DELT Ph_pt M1L M2L M3L MEASure For each measurement either two or four ports must be active If the 1 length method is used CALCulate FMODel DELT METHod M1L then four ports must be active for the first line Suffix Ph_pt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON 1 Port Ph_pt is active in the respective measurement OFF 0 Port Ph_pt is inactive in the respec...

Page 649: ... setup can result in erroneous results Parameters PortOrder ODDeven SEQuential ODDeven Ports 1 3 and 2 4 form input output pairs SEQuential Ports 1 2 and 3 4 form input output pairs Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Port Order on page 496 CALCulate FMODel DELT RUN Runs the AITT DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta L settings Usage Event Options R S ZND K231 ...

Page 650: ...g IF bandwidth Usage Query only Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Sweep Control on page 496 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol STEP For the Delta L measurement the firmware can either use a default frequency step size or the active channel setting see CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol This query returns the resulting frequency step size Usage Query only Options R S ZND K231 Manual opera...

Page 651: ...y all traces in a single diagram Options R S ZND K231 Manual operation See Trace on page 497 CALCulate FMODel DELT TDR Boolean If the Time domain analysis option R S ZND K2 is installed this command allows you to add the TDR based converted impedance traces to the recommended trace configu ration Parameters Boolean OFF 0 TDR based impedance traces added ON 1 TDR based impedance traces not added RS...

Page 652: ...sy De embedding EZD tool this command starts the measurement of the symmetrical 2xThru coupon at the active ports see CALCulate FMODel EZD Ph_pt COUPon STATe on page 653 Usage Event Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See Measure Measure Open Measure Short on page 473 CALCulate FMODel EZD COUPon MEASure FILename String For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool this command loads the coupon proper...

Page 653: ...e embedding file generated by the EZD tool contains data for DC Parameters Boolean ON 1 The EZD tool adds extrapolated S parameter data for f 0 OFF 0 The frequencies only reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See DC Extrapolation on page 483 CALCulate FMODel EZD DUT MEASure For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool this command allows to mea...

Page 654: ... EZD Ph_pt DUT STATe Boolean Defines the physical ports to which DUT test fixture are connected Suffix Ph_pt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON 1 Port Ph_pt connected OFF 0 Port Ph_pt not connected Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See Active on page 475 CALCulate FMODel EZD GENerate SIDE 1 2 Boolean Tells the EZD tool to create fixture deembedding data at side 1 at side 2 or at both s...

Page 655: ...MODel EZD IMPedance Parameters Value Default unit Hz Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See Impedance Correction Settings on page 483 CALCulate FMODel EZD IMPedance REFerence Value Defines the reference impedance for the impedance correction of the EZD tool see CALCulate FMODel EZD IMPedance Parameters Value Default unit Ohm Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See Impedance Correction Setting...

Page 656: ...ng CALCulate FMODel EZD COUPon MEASure finished successfully The resulting Touchstone files are written to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding If result files with the same name already exist they are overwritten Usage Event Options R S ZND K210 Manual operation See Run Fixture Modeling Tool on page 476 CALCulate FMODel EZD Pt RUN STATe Boolean Tells the analyzer to assign deembed...

Page 657: ...UT TYPE 661 CALCulate FMODel ISD FTIMe DUT 661 CALCulate FMODel ISD FTIMe OVERride 662 CALCulate FMODel ISD IMPedance 662 CALCulate FMODel ISD OPERation 662 CALCulate FMODel ISD PASSivity 662 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT ORDer 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP LEFT 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP NONE 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP RIGHt 663 CALCulate FMODel...

Page 658: ...ol and coupon types SYMMetric2x OPEN1x SHORt1x see CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon TYPE this command loads the coupon properties from a Touchstone file Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the selected working directory CALCulate FMODel DIRectory Manual operation See Load File 1x Open Preset 1x Short Preset on page 474 CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon MEASure FILenam...

Page 659: ... operation See Measure Measure Open Measure Short on page 473 CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon MEASure SHORt FILename String For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x see CALCulate FMODel ISD COUPon TYPE this command loads the properties of the Short coupon from a Touchstone file Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the selected working d...

Page 660: ...s batch mode Parameters Boolean OFF 0 No DC data added i e the touchstone data reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep ON 1 The ISD tool adds extrapolated S parameter data for f 0 RST OFF 0 Manual operation See DC Extrapolation on page 481 CALCulate FMODel ISD DUT MEASure For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool this command allows to measure DUT Fix ture at the active ports see ...

Page 661: ... fixture is connected to port Ph_pt 0 OFF false otherwise Example See Chapter 8 2 6 Fixture modeling on page 1175 Manual operation See Active on page 475 CALCulate FMODel ISD DUT TYPE DUTType Defines whether the DUT is active or passive Corresponds to the active_dut batch mode parameter of the ISD tool Parameters DUTType PASSive ACTive Manual operation See DUT Type on page 480 CALCulate FMODel ISD...

Page 662: ...ion disabled Manual operation See Use Impedance Correction on page 472 CALCulate FMODel ISD OPERation Operation Defines the execution mode of the ISD tool Parameters Operation FAST ACCurate ACCurate normal execution mode FAST reduces the execution time to 50 In many cases the FAST mode can be enabled with only little loss of accuracy Manual operation See Operation fast acc on page 481 CALCulate FM...

Page 663: ...batch mode parameter of the ISD tool with a list of positive port numbers Parameters String The port numbers separated by blanks e g 1 3 4 Manual operation See Ports to Skip manual on page 480 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP LEFT CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP NONE CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP RIGHt Tells the ISD tool which ports in the measured DUT Test Fixture file shall be skip ped when the to...

Page 664: ...ers Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding If result files with the same name already exist they will be overwritten Example See Chapter 8 2 6 Fixture modeling on page 1175 Usage Event Manual operation See Run Fixture Modeling Tool on page 476 CALCulate FMODel ISD Pt RUN STATe Boolean For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding f...

Page 665: ...SD tool Parameters FltLeadInScalingTime Manual operation See Scaling for Flt Tm on page 479 CALCulate FMODel ISD SMALlfixture Boolean Enables disables the ISD tool s small fixture mode Parameters Boolean Manual operation See Small Fixture on page 481 CALCulate FMODel ISD TRACe COUPling TraceCoupling Tells the ISD tool about coupling among lead in traces Corresponds to the coupling batch mode param...

Page 666: ...9 CALCulate FMODel SFD PRESet 669 CALCulate FMODel SFD RUN RUN 669 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt RUN STATe 669 CALCulate FMODel SFD TOTaldiffcfg 670 CALCulate FMODel SFD AUTO Boolean Enables disables the impedance correction of the SFD tool This is a global setting Duplicate of CALCulate FMODel SFD IMPedance kept for backward compatibility Parameters Boolean ON 1 Impedance correction enabled OFF 0 Im...

Page 667: ... File 1x Open Preset 1x Short Preset on page 474 CALCulate FMODel SFD Ph_pt COUPon STATe Boolean For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon using CALCulate FMODel SFD DUT MEASure Suffix Ph_pt Physical port number Parameters Boolean 1 ON true if the test coupon is con...

Page 668: ...tone file Parameters String Path to the Touchstone file either absolute or relative to the selected working directory CALCulate FMODel DIRectory Manual operation See Load File on page 475 CALCulate FMODel SFD DUT MEASure FILename CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate FMODel SFD DUT MEASure FILename Usage Event Manual operation See Load File on page 475 CALCulate FMODel SFD...

Page 669: ...ere successfully loaded from file using CALCulate FMODel SFD COUPon MEASure FILename The measurement of DUT test fixture using CALCulate FMODel SFD DUT MEASure finished successfully The resulting Touchstone files are written to C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Embedding If result files with the same name already exist they are overwritten Usage Event Manual operation See Run Fixture Mode...

Page 670: ...ry String Defines the common working directory of the ISD SFD and EZD fixture modeling tools Parameters String Directory path either absolute or relative to the current directory MMEMory CDIRectory Manual operation See Output Settings on page 472 CALCulate FMODel DIRectory DEFault Resets the common working directory of the ISD SFD and EZD tool to its default C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz ...

Page 671: ...cle CLEar 676 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DATA 677 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle DISPlay STATe 677 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe 677 CALCulate Chn LIMit DELete ALL 677 CALCulate Chn LIMit DISPlay STATe 678 CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL 678 CALCulate LIMit FAIL ALL 679 CALCulate LIMit FAIL DATA 679 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer DATA 679 CALCulate Chn LIMit UPPer DATA 679 CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer FEED 681...

Page 672: ...number used to identify the active trace Parameters CenterX Range Virtually no restriction for center coordinates RST 0 Default unit NN CenterY Range Virtually no restriction for center coordinates RST 0 Default unit NN Radius Range Virtually no restriction for radius use positive val ues RST 1 Default unit NN Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe Manual operation See Radius Center X Center...

Page 673: ...ge Query only Manual operation See Limit Check on page 330 CALCulate LIMit CIRCle FAIL ALL RecallSet Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set 0 represents pass and 1 represents fail Query parameters RecallSet Recall set name if omitted the active recall set is used Usage Query only Manual operation See Limit...

Page 674: ... 4 4 1 1 Rules for limit line definition on page 128 Rules for creating segments The following rules apply to an active trace with n existing limit line segments An odd number of values is rejected an error message 109 Missing parameter is generated An even number of 2 k values updates or generates k limit line segments For n k the stimulus values of all existing limit line segments no 1 to k are ...

Page 675: ...range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values 40 dB CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram Manual operation See Segment List on page 321 CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol SHIFt LimShift Shifts an existing limit line in horizontal direction See also Chapter 4 4 1 1 Rules for limit line definition on page 128 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active t...

Page 676: ...nd response values of the first and last points of the limit line segment The unit of the stimulus values is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE the unit of the ripple limit is adjusted to the format of the active trace CALCulate Chn FORMat Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 1 5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1 5 GHz usi...

Page 677: ...A Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean If set to ON the line of the display circle is shown whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format Manual operation See Show Border on page 333 CALCulate Chn LIMit DCIRcle STATe Boolean Sets queries the state of the display circle for the active trace of channel Chn The display circle is defined using CALC...

Page 678: ...mber used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF Limit line on or off RST OFF Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram Manual operation See Show Limit Line on page 317 CALCulate Chn LIMit FAIL Returns a 0 or 1...

Page 679: ... See Limit Check on page 318 CALCulate LIMit FAIL DATA TraceName LimitFailType Returns those sweep points that have caused a limit violation of the given LimitFail Type for trace TraceName Query parameters TraceName Trace name uniquely identifying the related trace LimitFailType LIMit RIPPle CIRCle Limit fail type Usage Query only CALCulate Chn LIMit LOWer DATA ResponseValue ResponseValue CALCulat...

Page 680: ...k 1 2s updates odd limit line segments 1 3 2s 1 with type upper and the given response values creates upper limit line segments 2s 1 2s 3 2k 1 with type upper and the given response values creates missing lower limit line segments 2s 2 2s 4 2k with type lower and default response values If s 0 newly created lower upper limit line segments inherit their start and stop stimuli from the limit line se...

Page 681: ...ecified Setting parameters StimulusOffset Stimulus offset value used to shift all imported limit line seg ments in horizontal direction Default unit NN ResponseOffset Response offset value used to shift all imported limit line seg ments in vertical direction Default unit dB TraceName Name of the selected trace as used e g in CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine If no trace name is specified the ana lyze...

Page 682: ...Litude STARt Response CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg AMPLitude STOP Response These commands change the start or the stop response values i e the response val ues assigned to the start or stop stimulus values of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable the commands e g CALCulate Chn LIMit DATA See also Chapter 4 4 1 1 Rules for limit line definition on page 128 Tip To define ...

Page 683: ...bled and disabled segments Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment segment no 1 in the stimu lus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response val ues of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM SEGM COUNT Query the number of segments The response is 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Segment List on p...

Page 684: ... segment use CALCulate Chn LIMit CONTrol DATA to create it Parameters State OFF 0 The line segment is a straight line connecting the endpoints specified in the segment definition ON 1 The line segment is defined by a custom formula Use CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula to spec ify the formula RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn LIMit SEGMent Seg FORMula on page 683 Manual operation See Linear ...

Page 685: ... For CW mode sweeps stimulus values are dimensionless Default unit NN Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment segment no 1 in the stimu lus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response val ues of 2 dB and 3 dB CALC LIM SEGM STIM STAR 1GHZ STOP 2 GHZ CALC LIM SEGM TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a stimu lus range bet...

Page 686: ...Nd STATe Boolean Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF Fail beep on or off RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep Manual operation See Limit Fail Beep on page 319 CALCulate...

Page 687: ...e Limit Check on page 318 CALCulate Chn LIMit TTLout Pt STATe Boolean Switches the TTL pass fail signals on or off The signals are applied to the USER PORT as long as the active trace Chn is within limits including the ripple limits See Chapter 12 3 1 1 USER PORT on page 1190 Default values for new traces can be set using SYSTem TTLout Pt STATus STATe Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the...

Page 688: ...EXECute 697 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult 698 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SPAN 698 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STARt 699 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion STOP 699 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MODE 699 CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak EXCursion 700 CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak EXCursion STATe 700 CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold 700 CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak THReshold STATe 701 CALCulat...

Page 689: ...ee All Off on page 336 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth Bandwidth Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfilter search or returns the results The command is only available after a bandfilter search has been executed CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute BFILter see example below The response to the query CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth contains the following bandfilter search results Bandwidth bandwi...

Page 690: ...rs M1 to M4 CALC MARK SEAR BFIL RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area CALC MARK BWID 6 Select a 6 dB bandwidth for the bandstop CALC MARK BWID Query the results of the bandfilter search An error message is generated if the bandfilter search fails so that no valid results are available CALC MARK SEAR BFIL RES AREA LEFT TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy move the i...

Page 691: ...n page 337 CALCulate MARKer COUPled TYPE Type Selects the marker coupling type to be used in the current recall set Marker coupling is enabled using CALCulate MARKer COUPled STATe ON Changing the coupling type automatically disables marker coupling throughout the recall set Parameters Type ALL CHANnel DIAGram Marker coupling mode ALL recall set wide CHANnel channel wide DIAGram diagram wide Exampl...

Page 692: ...1 SCPI GUI MLINear Lin Mag MLOGarithmic MDB for R S ZVR compatibility dB Mag PHASe Phase POLar COMPlex for R S ZVR compatibility Real Imag GDELay Delay REAL Real IMAGinary Imag SWR SWR LINPhase MLPhase for R S ZVR compatibility Lin Mag Phas e LOGPhase MDPhase for R S ZVR compatibility dB Mag Phase IMPedance R j X for reflection measurement traces R j X series for transmission measurement traces PI...

Page 693: ...n MARKer Mk STATe ON If the active trace contains no reference marker the command also creates a reference marker Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters Boolean ON OFF Enables or disables the delta mode RST OFF Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON Create marker no 1 and set it to the center of the swe...

Page 694: ... page 345 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat OutFormat Sets queries the output format for the complex value of the related marker Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters OutFormat MLINear MLOGarithmic PHASe POLar GDELay REAL IMAGinary SWR LINPhase LOGPhase IMPedance ADMittance DEFault COMPlex MDB MLPHase MDPHase MIMPedance PIMPedance PADMittance MADMitta...

Page 695: ... trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4 Parameters BandfilterType BPASs BSTop BPRMarker BSRMarker BPABsolute BSABsolute NONE Bandfilter search type BPASs Bandpass Search Ref to Max BSTop Bandstop Search Ref to Max BPRMarker Bandpass Search Ref to Marker BSRMarker Bandstop Search Ref to Marker BPABsolut...

Page 696: ...10 where 0 refers to the fixed full span search range equal to the sweep range and 1 to 10 refer to user definable search ranges see example RST 0 reserved for full span search range Example CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM USER 2 Select the search range no 2 assigned to marker no 1 and trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER STARt 1GHz Set the start frequency of the search range to 1 GHz CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER S...

Page 697: ...ange on page 343 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute SearchMode Selects a search mode for marker no Mk and initiates the search The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON exception bandfilter search Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number For a bandfilter search BFILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any valu...

Page 698: ...ults are queried using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth MMAXimum or MMINimum Multiple peak search SPRogress Sweep progress CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion RESult Returns the result stimulus and response value of a search started by means of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute The search must be execu ted before the command is enabled Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace ...

Page 699: ...qual to the stimulus value of the marker Mk on trace no Chn Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Example RST CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC STAR Divide the sweep range in half starting at the current marker position As an alternative CALC MARK FUNC STOP Divide the sweep range i...

Page 700: ...value for multiple peak searches Use CALCulate Chn MARKer MPEak EXCursion STATe to activate it Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Value Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format specific default value Manual operation See Excursion Settings on page 347...

Page 701: ...Boolean Manual operation See Threshold Settings on page 347 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk NAME MarkerName Defines a name for marker no Mk The marker doesn t have to be created before CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON the name can be assigned in advance Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters MarkerName Marker name string parameter RST M1 for marker no 1 etc...

Page 702: ...Ference MODE Mode Sets the reference marker to continuous or discrete mode The marker doesn t have to be created before CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON the mode can be assigned in advance Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Parameters Mode CONTinuous DISCrete CONTinuous marker can be positioned on any point of t...

Page 703: ...ntify the active trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Parameters Boolean ON OFF creates or removes the marker RST OFF Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK REF ON CALC MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no 1 The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range Manual ...

Page 704: ...ters StimulusValue If the marker mode of the related marker is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex Polar Smith inverted Smith this is the real part Re zM of the marker value zM In any other case it is the marker s stimulus value If the marker mode is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex the value range is 1 to 1 Otherwise 9 9E 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz for frequency sweeps 999 dBm to 999 dBm ...

Page 705: ...e see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence TYPE For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read only Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Parameters RefResponseValue See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk Y Default unit NN Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk REFerence X Manual operation See Mkr i Arb Response Ref Mkr Arb Response ...

Page 706: ...all be specified see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk TARGet on page 709 Each marker may have a different target format The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z x jy is converted Target Format Description Formula MLINear Magnitude of z unconverted z sqrt x2 y2 MLOGarithmic Magnitude of z in dB Mag z 20 log z dB PHASe Phase of z φ z arctan y x UPHase Unwrapped phase of z comprising ...

Page 707: ...RGet Query for the default target value for dB magnitude this is 0 dB CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion TARGet 3 Set the target value to 3 dB CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute Execute the target search for marker 1 CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion RESult Query for the results Manual operation See Target Format on page 348 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch TRACking Boolean This command is only available if a s...

Page 708: ...cified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Boolean ON OFF creates or removes the marker RST OFF Example Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to trace no 1 The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range Manual operation See On on page 336 CALCulate Chn MARKer STATe AREA HorizontalPo...

Page 709: ... Query the stimulus value corresponding to the target search result Manual operation See Target Value on page 348 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold Value Defines a marker specific threshold value for single peak searches Use CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk THReshold STATe to activate it Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number Parameters Value Threshold value The unit i...

Page 710: ... at the position determined by the cur rent stimulus and response value The response value stored with the marker is not adjusted to subsequent sweeps Tracking is disabled Stimulus and response value are stored with the marker they are not adjusted to subsequent sweeps and trace format changes The marker stimulus can be set using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk X but the response value remains fixed ARBit...

Page 711: ... marker mode of the related marker is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex Polar Smith inverted Smith this is the real part Re zM of the marker value zM In any other case it is the marker s stimulus value If the marker mode is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex the value range is 1 to 1 Otherwise 9 9E 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz for frequency sweeps 999 dBm to 999 dBm for power sweeps 0 s to 1...

Page 712: ...seValue Setting ARBitrary mode only sets the vertical position of the marker in Y units of the current trace format Query returns the marker position formatted according to the current marker format see CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat i e as displayed in the marker info field 1 return value per row in the response column Indetermined result values are returned as a sequence of dashes This may occur...

Page 713: ...ate Chn MATH STATe must be set to ON The expression in the second command refers to formatted trace data In order to apply it CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatted FUNCtion must be set to NORMal and CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatted STATe must be set to ON Trace math for unformatted and formatted trace data can be used at the same time Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Expre...

Page 714: ...Ction Mode Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace The first command applies to raw unformatted trace data complex data the second to formatted trace data Both methods can be combined To apply the trace math the corresponding mathematical mode must be switched on using CALCulate Chn MATH STATe ON and or CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatted STATe ON Note Us...

Page 715: ...der and Data_Trace is the name of the associated copied data trace The exact function of the command depends on the number of memory traces associ ated to the active data trace If no memory trace is associated to the active trace a new memory trace is gener ated If several memory traces are associated to the active trace the current measure ment data overwrites the last generated or changed memory...

Page 716: ...ault trace Trc1 to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not dis played CALC MATH SDEF Trc1 Mem2 Trc1 Define a mathematical trace dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace The mathematical trace is not displayed CALC MATH STAT ON Display the mathematical trace instead of the active data trace Manual operation See Trace Math on page 286 CALCulate Chn MATH WUNit...

Page 717: ...ALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine SGRoup 718 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete 719 CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL 720 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CALL 720 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete CMEMory 720 CALCulate PARameter DELete MEMory 721 CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete SGRoup 721 CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure 721 CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure SENDed 722 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine 722 CALCulate Ch PARame...

Page 718: ...s for all S parameters associated with a group of logical ports S parameter group The traces can be queried using CALCulate Ch DATA SGRoup Traces must be selected to become active traces see CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect Note Each channel can contain a single S parameter group only Defining a new S parameter group deletes the previous one Use CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete SGRoup on page 721 to del...

Page 719: ...nt for referencing the generated traces see program example below LogicalPort2 Example CALC2 PAR DEF SGR 1 2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two port S parameters S11 S12 S21 S22 The traces are not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED Ch2_SG_S11 DISP WIND TRAC3 FEED Ch2_SG_S12 DISP WIND TRAC4 FEED Ch2_SG_S21 DISP WIND TRAC5 FEED Ch2_SG_S22 Display the four traces in the diagram no 1 INIT...

Page 720: ...d trace CALCulate4 PARameter DELete CALL Delete the remaining three traces in channel 4 CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL Delete all traces including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Trace on page 278 CALCulate PARameter DELete ALL Deletes all traces in all channels of the active recall set including the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The manual cont...

Page 721: ...assigned to the specified trace no second parameter see example Note To create a new trace and at the same time assign the attributes use CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine To display the trace create a diagram DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON and assign the trace to this diagram DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED see example below Traces must be selected to become active traces see CALCulate Ch PARameter...

Page 722: ...Ch PARameter MEASure but in presence of balanced ports this command distinguishes between single ended S parameters for logical ports SSS Li Lj raw single ended S parameters referring to physical ports S Pi Pj Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters TraceName Trace name Result Measured quantity Manual operation See S Parameter selector on page 235 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine TraceName Resul...

Page 723: ...N Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 Usage Setting only Manual operation See S Parameter selector on page 235 Table 7 4 String identifiers for measurement results Note All port numbers in a result identifier refer to logical DUT ports to avoid ambiguities they must be represented by the same number of digits e g S21 or S0201 The va...

Page 724: ... Wave quantities A meas D drive for a wave and B meas D drive for b wave for logical ports meas and drive The strings SAM AVG AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a nor mal sample SAM AVG Real Imag AVG or AVG Mag Phase AMP detector B2 A1 B02 A01 B2 A1SAM B2 A1AVG B2 A1AMP Ratio of wave quantities with port numbers like for normal mode S parame ters The strings SAM AVG AMP appended to the wav...

Page 725: ...as the active trace of the channel All trace commands with out explicit reference to the trace name act on the active trace e g CALCulate Chn FORMat CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect is also neces sary if the active trace of a channel has been deleted Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters TraceName Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in Table Area on page 280 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 ...

Page 726: ...731 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STATe 732 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STARt 732 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STOP 732 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SOUNd STATe 733 CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe 733 CALCulate Chn RIPPle STATe AREA 734 CALCulate Chn RIPPle CLEar Resets the limit check results for the ripple test Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage Ev...

Page 727: ...eLimRange Adds and enables disables an arbitrary number of ripple limit ranges assigning the stimulus values and the ripple limits See Chapter 4 4 1 2 Rules for ripple test defini tion on page 130 Note This command does not overwrite existing ripple limit ranges The defined ranges are appended to the range list as new ranges Use the CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg commands to change existing ripp...

Page 728: ...hn RIPPle DELete ALL Deletes all ripple limit ranges Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 1 2000000000 3000000000 5 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB Define and enable a second ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 2 GHz and 3 ...

Page 729: ...ip Use CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult to query the result for a single ripple limit range Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC RIPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB CALC RIPP STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the resul...

Page 730: ...IPP DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning a ripple limit of 3 dB CALC RIPP RDOM FORM COMP Delete the ripple limit range select complex units for the ripple limit Usage Setting only CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent COUNt Queries the number of ripple limit ranges The response is an integer number Suffix Chn Channel...

Page 731: ...CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult Returns the result of the ripple limit check in the previously defined limit range no Seg The response consists of two parameters Boolean 0 for passed 1 for failed Limit measured ripple in the limit range A result is returned even if the limit check in the range no Seg is disabled see example below A reset deletes all ripple limit ranges Use CALCulate Ch RIP...

Page 732: ...dentify the active trace Seg Number of the ripple limit range Parameters Boolean ON OFF Limit check on or off A result is available even if the limit check is disabled see example for CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg RESult RST n a no ripple limit line defined after a reset Example See CALCulate Chn RIPPle SEGMent Seg STIMulus STARt Manual operation See Range List on page 328 CALCulate Chn RIPPle ...

Page 733: ...al operation See Range List on page 328 CALCulate Chn RIPPle SOUNd STATe Boolean Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded ripple limit Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF fail beep on or off RST OFF Example CALC RIPP STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate ...

Page 734: ...elay STATe 736 CALCulate Chn STATistics MMPTpeak STATe 736 CALCulate Chn STATistics MSTDdev STATe 736 CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat 736 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP LEVel 736 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP PHASe 737 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER 737 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER SHOW 738 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER ...

Page 735: ...1GHZ STOP 2GHZ SHOW ON Select evaluation range no 1 and define the evaluation range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz Display the range limit lines Manual operation See Evaluation Range on page 303 CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER SHOW Boolean Displays or hides range limit lines for the evaluation range selected via CALCulate Chn STATistics DOMain USER Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the acti...

Page 736: ...ff RST OFF Example See CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe Manual operation See Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS on page 298 CALCulate Chn STATistics FORMat Format For complex valued traces Smith Polar this determines how the MEAN STDDev MAX MIN RMS and PTPeak statistics are calculated see CALCulate Chn STATistics RESult Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Format ZV...

Page 737: ...ue Compression value Default unit deg Manual operation See Compr Point Compr Val on page 301 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RDOMain USER RefRange Selects one of the 10 channel specific user defined ranges as the reference range for compression point calculation Only applies if CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence is set to RANGe The selected range can then be configured with the ...

Page 738: ...lated range Manual operation See Ref Range on page 302 CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence ReferenceValue Defines how the reference value small signal value for the compression point calcu lation is calculated Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters ReferenceValue FPOint DVALue MARKer RANGe FPOint uses the value at the first point of the selected evalua t...

Page 739: ...e Example RST SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep with default CW frequency and sweep range CALC STAT NLIN COMP LEV 2 Define a compression value of 2 dB CALC STAT NLIN COMP RES Query the compression point results Cmp In Cmp Out An execution error message error no 200 is returned if no com pression point is found CALC STAT NLIN COMP ON Display the compression point result in the diagram area Usage Qu...

Page 740: ...Tistics NLINear COMP RPHase Phase Manually defines the reference phase for compression point calculation on phase for matted traces Only applies if CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP REFerence is set to DVALue For dB formatted traces the reference level can be set using CALCulate Chn STATistics NLINear COMP RLEVel Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Phase Refe...

Page 741: ...turn the peak to peak value MAX MIN ELENgth return the electrical length PDELay return the phase delay GAIN return the gain i e the larger of two marker values SLOPe return the slope difference between two marker val ues FLATness return the flatness of the trace between two marker positions ALL return all statistical values observing the order used above The data is returned as a comma separated l...

Page 742: ... can display or hide the Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std Dev RMS Phase El Length and Flatness Gain Slope results separately see example below Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF Statistical info field on or off RST OFF Example RST CALC STAT MMPT ON Reset the instrument hiding all statistical results Display the Min Max Peak Peak results CALC STAT MSTD O...

Page 743: ...LCulate TRANsform DTFault The CALCulate TRANsform DTFault commands set up and control a distance to fault measurement with option R S ZND K3 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault CENTer 743 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SPAN 743 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DEFine 744 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DELete 745 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt 745 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA ...

Page 744: ...on is defined via attenuation frequency pairs CblAtt1 CblFreq1 CblAtt2 CblFreq2 At least one pair has to be specified Suffix Chn Channel number This suffix is ignored cable types are defined for all channels Setting parameters CblName Name of the cable type Must be unique among all DtF cable types with case insensitive match CblPermittivity Relative permittivity εr of the cable type CblAtt i Atten...

Page 745: ...le CALCulate TRANsform DTFault DELete My cable type Deletes the user defined cable type My cable type Usage Setting only Options R S ZND K3 Manual operation See Add Delete on page 522 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt If the active trace of channel Chn is a Distance to Fault DtF trace and DtF limit checking is enabled this query returns the number of DtF limit violations of this trace Use...

Page 746: ...3 then CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 returns the coordinates of the DtF limit violation peaks Options R S ZND K3 Manual operation See Fault Table on page 523 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK STATe DtfPeakState If the active trace of channel Chn is a Distance to Fault DtF trace this command allows to enable disable DtF limit checking Suffix Chn Channel number used to ident...

Page 747: ... points the firmware allows 100001 To avoid this reduce the frequency span Δf see SENSe Ch SWEep POINts on page 1012 and or the stop frequency dstop see CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault STOP so that 2 6 dstop Δf v c0 100001 where v denotes the velocity factor of the measured cable see CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SELect Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example RST CALC...

Page 748: ... TRANsform DTFault CENTer and CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault SPAN Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Start Stop Start stop distance Default unit m Example CALCulate1 TRANsform DTFault STARt 1 STOP 3 Defines the DtF distance window of the active trace of channel 1 as 1m 3m Options R S ZND K3 Manual operation See Start Distance Stop Distance on page 517 CALCulate...

Page 749: ...Mulus 754 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STOP 754 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE 755 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME WINDow 755 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME XAXis 755 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME CENTer CenterTime Defines the center time of the diagram in time domain Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters CenterTime Center time of the diagram in time domain Range 99 9...

Page 750: ...293 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME LPASs Algorithm Calculates the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms according to one of the three alternative algorithms Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Algorithm KFSTop KDFRequency KSDFrequency KFSTop keep stop frequency and number of points KDFRequency keep frequency gap and number of points KSDfrequency keep st...

Page 751: ...the defined DC value and query the new value CALC TRAN TIME LPAS DCSP CONT ON Switch over to continuous extrapolation e g because you noticed a discrepancy between the manually entered DC value and the extrapolation and assume the extrapolation to be more trustworthy CALC TRAN TIME RES EFAC 3 Select a resolution enhancement factor of 3 in order to improve the resolution in time domain Manual opera...

Page 752: ...m TIME LPASs if you wish to use one of the other algorithms for calculating the grid Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE Usage Event Manual operation See DC Value on page 295 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME RESolution EFACtor REfactor Defines the resolution enhancement factor for the time domain transform Suffix Chn Channel number ...

Page 753: ...s StartTime Start time of the diagram Range 100 s to 99 999999999998 s Increment 0 1 ns RST 1E 009 s Default unit s Example RST CALC TRAN TIME STAT ON Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace CALC TRAN TIME STAR 0 STOP 10 ns Set the start time to 0 ns and the stop time to 10 ns Manual operation See Time Start Time Stop Time C...

Page 754: ...response only in lowpass mode a bandpass mode setting CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE BPASs is automatically changed to lowpass RST IMP Example See CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME TYPE Manual operation See Type on page 292 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME STOP StopTime Defines the stop time of the diagram in time domain Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters StopTime Sto...

Page 755: ...a low pass step transformation CALC TRAN TIME LPAS KFST Calculate a harmonic grid keeping the stop frequency and the number of points Manual operation See Type on page 292 CALCulate Chn TRANsform TIME WINDow WindowType Selects the window type for filtering the data in the frequency domain prior to the time domain transformation Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters...

Page 756: ...tance on page 361 CALCulate TRANsform VNETworks The CALCulate TRANsform VNETworks commands define and activate the cir cuit models for the different de embedding types SeeChapter 4 6 2 Embedding and deembedding on page 188 The circuit models are addressed by predefined enum constants Except for the FIM Port model that consists of a single snp file the models and constants are different for the dif...

Page 757: ...arameter Circuit model Pictogram LSL Serial L shunt L SLC Shunt L serial C SCL Shunt C serial L SCC Shunt C serial C SLL Shunt L serial L SHLC Shunt L shunt C GSL Serial C shunt L LSG Serial L shunt C SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 758: ... Shunt L serial C SGG Shunt C serial C Table 7 7 Circuit models for balanced port and port pair de embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import generic 4 port s4p no circuit model STSL Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt L STSC Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt C SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 759: ...ctogram SLST Shunt L serial Touchstone s2p data SCST Shunt C serial Touchstone s2p data CSSL Serial Cs shunt L LSSC Serial Ls shunt C CSSC Serial Cs shunt C LSSL Serial Ls shunt L SLCS Shunt L serial Cs SCLS Shunt C serial Ls SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 760: ...ctogram SCCS Shunt C serial Cs SLLS Shunt L serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone s2p data shunt C SGST Shunt C serial Touchstone s2p data GSSL Serial Cs shunt L LSSG Serial Ls shunt C GSSG Serial Cs shunt C SLGS Shunt L serial Cs SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 761: ...Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import no circuit model STSL SGGS The models for port pairs i e port sets with two ports are the same as the ones for balanced ports See Table 7 7 Table 7 9 Circuit models for ground loop de embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import no circuit model SL Shunt L SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 762: ... VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp 766 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters L Cmp 767 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp 767 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt STATe 768 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt TNDefinition 769 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks...

Page 763: ...TNDefinition 780 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters C 781 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters G 781 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters L 782 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters R 782 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding STATe 783 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding TNDefinitio...

Page 764: ...ulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters DATA 799 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters G Cmp 800 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp 801 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp 802 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt STATe 802 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETwork...

Page 765: ...ng LogPt PARameters DATA Port Interchange arg1 Defines a deembedding network for a balanced port based on the given S Parameter traces Circuit models STSL STSC SLST SCST require S Parameter traces of two 2 port networks to be assigned to the different ports PMAin and PSECondary the FIMPort model requires S Parameter traces of a single 4 port network but no addi tional port assignment Use CALCulate...

Page 766: ...mp CircuitModel Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the conductance value G Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port deembedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port numb...

Page 767: ...efault unit H Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSL SLST CSSL LSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SLLS GSSL LSSG SLGS SGLS Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 7 Example RST SOUR LPOR1 1 2 CALC TRAN VNET BAL DEEM PAR L1 CSSL Create a balanced port and query the default inductance L1 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET BAL DEEM PAR L1 CSSL 2...

Page 768: ...resistances for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model The response is 10000000000 10000000000 0 CALC TRAN VNET BAL DEEM PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 Increase the resistance R3 to 2 2 kΩ Manual operation See Network on page 488 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt STATe Boolean Enables or disables the deembedding function for balanced ports It is allowed to change the circuit model and i...

Page 769: ...age 488 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CiruitModel Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CiruitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for balanced port embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for th...

Page 770: ...ks to be assigned to the different ports the FIMPort model requires S Parameter traces of a single 4 port network but no additional port assignment Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com mand MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced EMBedding LogPt to load cir cuit data from a Touchstone file located at th...

Page 771: ... capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Number of conductance in circuit model The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Conductance Conductance G Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 pS 1E 12 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters...

Page 772: ...B PAR L1 CSSL Create a balanced port and query the default inductance L1 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET BAL EMB PAR L1 CSSL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 488 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced E...

Page 773: ...0000000 0 CALC TRAN VNET BAL EMB PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 Increase the resistance R3 to 2 2 kΩ Manual operation See Network on page 488 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced EMBedding LogPt STATe Boolean Enables or disables the embedding function for balanced ports It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while embedding is enabled Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port numb...

Page 774: ...l EMBedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Capacitance Specifies the capacitance value C in the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model for differential match embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Cmp Must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters CircuitModel SHLC Currently only the Shunt L Shunt C lumped e...

Page 775: ...nt of a two port Touchstone file s2p in IEEE488 2 Block data format Usage Setting only CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters G Cmp CircuitModel Conductance Specifies the conductance value G in the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model for differential match embedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical...

Page 776: ...o 1 H Increment 1 pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Manual operation See Network on page 492 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel Resistance Specifies the resistance value R in the Shunt L Shunt C lumped element model for differential match embedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted Suffix Ch Channel number Lo...

Page 777: ...circuit model for differential match embedding Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number balanced port Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort SHLC Possible circuit models character data see Circuit models for differential match embedding Manual operation See Network on page 492 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks FSIMulator STATe Enable De activates the Fixture Simulator switch that allows to disab...

Page 778: ...he default capacitance for ground loop deembedding The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR C SC 2 2E 12 Increase the capacitance to 2 2 pF Manual operation See Network on page 490 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters G CircuitModel Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters G CircuitModel Specifies the conductance value G in t...

Page 779: ...EM PAR L SL Query the default inductance for ground loop deembedding The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR L SL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 490 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters R CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop DEEMbedding PARameters R CircuitModel Specifies the resistanc...

Page 780: ...ed Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Boolean ON Deembedding active OFF Deembedding inactive RST OFF Example CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM TND SL Select the Shunt L circuit model for deembedding CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM PAR R SL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET GLO DEEM ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding Manual operation See Active on page 457 CALCulate Ch TRA...

Page 781: ...he default capacitance for ground loop embedding The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR C SC 2 2E 12 Increase the capacitance to 2 2 pF Manual operation See Network on page 490 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters G CircuitModel Conductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters G CircuitModel Specifies the conductance value G in the diff...

Page 782: ...MB PAR L SL Query the default inductance for ground loop embedding The response is 1E 009 1 nH CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR L SL 2 2E 9 Increase the inductance to 2 2 nH Manual operation See Network on page 490 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters R CircuitModel Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop EMBedding PARameters R CircuitModel Specifies the resistance value...

Page 783: ... Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Boolean ON Embedding active OFF Embedding inactive RST OFF Example CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB TND SL Select the Shunt L circuit model for embedding CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB PAR R SL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET GLO EMB ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable embedding Manual operation See Active on page 457 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETwo...

Page 784: ...write the list of port sets for deembedding See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PSET DEEMbedding ListId DEFine on page 793 for general port set definition Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the defined port set within the channel s overall list of port sets for deembedding Port sets for deembedding must be numbered consecutively i e port set ListId can only be created if port set ListId 1 a...

Page 785: ...ns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 Index i of the capacitance C i in the related lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Capacitance Capacitance Ci Range 1 mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E...

Page 786: ...onductance Conductance G i for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 nS 1E 9 S RST 0 S Default unit Siemens SI unit symbol S Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model whose conductance G i shall be set see Table 7 7 Manual operation See Network on page 485 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARamet...

Page 787: ...rt pair deembedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 Index i of the resistance R i in the related lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to...

Page 788: ...pair CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM1 PAR R3 CSSL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM1 ON Increase the resistance R3 for the Serial Cs shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding CALC TRAN VNET PPA DEEM DEL Delete the port pair configuration Manual operation See Active on page 454 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId TNDefinition arg0 Selects the circuit model for port pair deem...

Page 789: ... consecutively i e port set ListId can only be created if port set ListId 1 already exists If several port pairs are specified ListId is the number of the first port pair to be created Parameters PP_First PP_Second PP_First Sequence of port pairs each one consisting of two different ports Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Usage Setting only Manual operation ...

Page 790: ...ix is set to 1 Parameters Capacitance Capacitance Ci Range 1 mF to 1 mF Increment 1 fF 1E 15 F RST 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel STSC SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC SLCS SCLS SCCS STSG SGST GSSL LSSG GSSG SLGS SGLS SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C i shall be set see Table 7 7 Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId STATe Manual ope...

Page 791: ...stId PARameters R 1 2 3 arg0 Resistance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId PARameters R 1 2 3 arg0 Specifies the resistance value R i in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affec...

Page 792: ...value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId DEFine 1 2 3 Index i of the conductance G i in the related lumped circuit model If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters Conductance Conductance G i for the specified circuit model Range 1kS to 1 kS Increment 1 pS 1E 12 ...

Page 793: ...eration See Active on page 454 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId TNDefinition CircuitModel Selects the circuit model for port pair embedding Suffix Ch Channel number ListId Index of the affected port pair see CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort STSL STSC SLST SCST CSSL LSSC CSSC LSSL SLCS SCLS SCCS SLLS STSG SGST GSSL...

Page 794: ...ulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Capacitance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters C Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the capacitance value C Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the query form the Capacitance parameter must be omitted The command returns the capacitance value for the spec...

Page 795: ...ding PhyPt to load cir cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R S ZND s file system Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Setting parameters Interchange FPORts IPORts SGATes FPORts or omitted Standard port sequence network port 1 towards VNA network port 2 towards DUT IPORts SGATes Inverted port sequence network port 2 towards VNA network port 1 towards DUT arg1 block_data C...

Page 796: ...nt values for the shunt L shunt C circuit model CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR G SHLC 1 Increase the conductance G to 1 Siemens Manual operation See Network on page 468 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Inductance CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters L Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the inductance value L Cmp in the di...

Page 797: ...orks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt PARameters R Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the resistance value R Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding In the query form the Resistance parameter must be omitted The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of resistance in circuit model The total n...

Page 798: ...mbedding inactive RST OFF Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM TND CSL Select the Serial C shunt L circuit model for deembedding CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM PAR R2 CSL 2 2E 3 CALC TRAN VNET SEND DEEM ON Increase the resistance R2 for the Serial C shunt L circuit model to 2 2 kΩ and enable deembedding Manual operation See Active on page 452 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed DEEMbedding PhyPt TNDefin...

Page 799: ...T 1 pF 1E 12 F Default unit F Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel CSL LSC CSC SLC SCL SCC SHLC GSL LSG GSG SLG SGL SGG Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 6 Example RST CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C shunt C cir cuit model The response is 1E 012 1 pF CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR C2 CSC 2 2E 12 Increase the capacitance to...

Page 800: ...PARameters G Cmp CircuitModel Specifies the conductance value G Cmp in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding In the query form the Conductance parameter must be omitted The command returns the conductance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of the conductance component in the circuit model The total number of c...

Page 801: ...omitted The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Cmp Number of inductance in circuit model The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model Parameters Inductance Inductance L Cmp for the specified circuit model Range 1H to 1 H Increment 1 pH 1E 12 H RST 1 nH 1E 9 H Default unit H Parameters for...

Page 802: ... Increment 1 mΩ 1E 3 Ω RST 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit Ohm Parameters for setting and query CircuitModel CSL LSC CSC LSL SLC SCL SCC SLL SHLC GSL LSG SLG SGL Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 6 Example RST CALC TRAN VNET SEND EMB PAR R1 CSL R2 CSL Query the default re...

Page 803: ...r single ended port embedding Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters CircuitModel FIMPort CSL LSC CSC LSL SLC SCL SCC SLL SHLC GSL LSG GSG SLG SGL SGG Possible circuit models character data see Table 7 6 RST CSL Example See CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt STATe Manual operation See Network on page 468 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks WAVes Boolean De...

Page 804: ... MEAS Trc1 Y S22 Select the converted admittance Y S22 as measurement parameter of the default trace CALC TRAN COMP S Convert the converted Y parameter into an S parameter CALCulate Chn TRANsform IMPedance RNORmal Model Selects the theory for the renormalization of port impedances The selection has an impact on the conversion formulas for wave quantities and S parameters Suffix Chn Channel number ...

Page 805: ...ult is automatically recalculated whenever a relevant setting is changed i e a subsequent query will return the updated limit viola tion state Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALC CLIM FAIL Query the result for the...

Page 806: ...rmats and measured quantities see Chapter 5 3 Format softtool on page 265 and CALCulate Ch PARameter commands Nevertheless it is advisable to check which display formats are generally appropriate for an analysis of a particular mea sured quantity see Chapter 4 2 3 3 Measured quantities and trace formats on page 108 Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Type MLINear...

Page 807: ...an diagram UPHase Calculates Phase z unwrapped and displays it in a Cartesian diagram POLar COMPlex for compatibility with R S ZVR ana lyzers Displays z in a polar diagram SMITh Displays z in a Smith diagram ISMith Displays z in an inverted Smith diagram GDELay For frequency sweeps only Calculates the group delay at the related sweep point and displays it in a Cartesian diagram REAL Calculates Re ...

Page 808: ...uffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Steps Number of steps Range 1 to 10000 RST 10 Example RST CALC FORM GDEL Select group delay calculation for the active trace CALC GDAP SCO 15 Select an aperture of 15 steps Manual operation See Aperture Points on page 270 CALCulate Chn IAVerage MODE Mode Selects the quantities to be averaged if infinite averaging is enabled CALC...

Page 809: ...le the min hold function MAX enable the max hold function OFF disable the max hold or min hold function RST OFF Example RST CALC PHOL MAX Reset the instrument and enable the max hold function CALC PHOL OFF PHOL MAX Restart max hold Manual operation See Hold on page 306 CALCulate PIPelining DATA DutId Queries the availability of channel results to be queried e g using CALCulate Chn DATA in single s...

Page 810: ...query result true 3 4 sweep completed data available for channels 3 and 4 Query data using CALC3 DATA and CALC4 DATA CALC PIP DATA 200 Execution error CALCulate1 PIPelining DATA Usage Query only Manual operation See Pipelining on page 385 CALCulate Chn SMOothing APERture SmoothAperture Defines how many measurement points are averaged to smooth the trace Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify t...

Page 811: ...eate and delete channels or traces assign channel and trace names and define the channel sweep order The commands are device spe cific CONFigure CHANnel CATalog 812 CONFigure CHANnel MEASure ALL STATe 812 CONFigure CHANnel MEASure OPTimized 812 CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe 813 CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME 814 CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ID 814 CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe 815 CONFigure CHANnel Ch T...

Page 812: ...isables the sweep in all channels of the active recall set This command can be used in combination with CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe to optimize the measurement speed Parameters Boolean ON OFF RST ON Example See CONFigure CHANnel Ch MEASure STATe Manual operation See Continuous Single on page 382 CONFigure CHANnel MEASure OPTimized Order Ch1 Ch2 This setting tells the firmware to optimize th...

Page 813: ...4 with one trace each DISP WIND1 TRAC2 FEED CH2TR1 DISP WIND1 TRAC3 FEED CH3TR1 DISP WIND1 TRAC4 FEED CH4TR1 assign these traces to diagram 1 CONF CHAN MEAS OPT AUTO INITiate1 IMMediate ALL optimize the switching times for the AUTOmatic channel order 1 2 3 4 and restart the sweep in all channels CONF CHAN MEAS OPT MAN 2 3 1 4 INIT2 INIT3 INIT1 INIT4 optimize the switching times for channel order 2...

Page 814: ...fferent channels CONFigure CHANnel CATalog returns a list of all defined channels with their names Suffix Ch Number of an existing channel Parameters ChannelName Channel name e g Channel 4 RST Ch1 Example See CONFigure CHANnel CATalog Manual operation See Channel table on page 443 CONFigure CHANnel Ch NAME ID ChannelName Queries the channel number numeric suffix of a channel with known channel nam...

Page 815: ...already it is not modified but selected as the active channel OFF delete channel no Ch RST ON for channel no 1 created on RST OFF for all other channels Example See CONFigure CHANnel CATalog Manual operation See New Channel on page 441 CONFigure CHANnel Ch TRACe CATalog Returns the numbers and names of all traces in channel no Ch The response is a string containing a comma separated list of trace ...

Page 816: ...se CONFigure CHANnel Ch TRACe CATalog to query the traces in a par ticular channel see example Example RST CALC2 PAR SDEF Ch2Trc2 S11 Create channel 2 and a new trace named Ch2Trc2 CONF TRAC CAT Query all traces and their names As a default trace no 1 is cre ated upon RST the response is 1 Trc1 2 Ch2Trc2 CONF CHAN1 TRAC CAT Query the channels in channel no 1 The response is 1 Trc1 CONF TRAC NAME I...

Page 817: ...2 Example See CONFigure TRACe CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See New Channel on page 441 CONFigure TRACe Trc NAME TraceName Assigns a name to an existing trace number Trc Note that it is not possible to assign the same name to two different traces CONFigure TRACe CATalog returns a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names Suffix Trc Number of an existing trace Paramet...

Page 818: ...ure CHANnel Ch TRACe REName Usage Setting only Manual operation See Table Area on page 280 CONFigure TRACe WINDow TraceName Returns the trace number within a diagram which is assigned to the trace TraceName is assigned to A zero is returned when the trace is not assigned displayed The trace number is equal to the WndTr suffix in DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED and similiar commands see example...

Page 819: ...ontrol commands allow you to configure the following interfaces USER PORT Handler I O connector Universal Interface option R S ZN B14 CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA 820 CONTrol HANDler A DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler B DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler C DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler D DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler E DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler F DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler G DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler H DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler A MOD...

Page 820: ...l with the active channel The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement sweep in a channel with non zero channel bits is started They are changed whenever a channel with differ ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel The signals at the USER PORT connector are maintained after the analyzer enters the hold state This happens if all channels use single sweep mode and if all sweep sequen...

Page 821: ...DecValue CONTrol HANDler G DATA DecValue CONTrol HANDler H DATA DecValue The setting commands write data to ports A B C D E F G H To write data to a port the port must be configured as an output port see example By default the port lines have negative logic A 0 at a pin corresponds to a high signal a 1 to a low signal The logic can be changed using CONTrol HANDler LOGic POSitive When writing to po...

Page 822: ...H is according to the configuration at the other ports Parameters Mode INPut OUTPut INPut Input of data at the port OUTPut Output of data at the port Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values RST n a default Port A and B OUTPut also valid for port F port C and D INPut also valid for port E Ports G and H have mi...

Page 823: ...NDler EXTension INDex STATe CONTrol HANDler INPut Queries whether a high to low transition occurred at the INPUT 1 line pin 2 of the Universal Interface since the last CONTrol HANDler INPut query The query resets the counter to zero A negative pulse fed to this line also causes the OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2 lines pins 3 and 4 to change to low Return values NumberOfTrans 0 if no transition was detected...

Page 824: ...as been written to the output port Suffix Pt Output port number 1 OUTPUT1 pin 3 2 OUTPUT2 pin 4 The parameters MIN MAX DEF are not supported Note RST or Preset do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values Parameters BinValue 0 high 1 low RST n a default 0 Example CONT HAND OUTP2 DATA 0 Set the OUTPUT2 line pin 4 to 0 current state o...

Page 825: ...Use CONTrol HANDler RESet to restore default values RST n a default NEGative Example See CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE CONTrol HANDler PASSfail MODE Mode Specifies the default logical pass fail state and the timing of the PASS FAIL line pin 33 The PASS FAIL STROBE pin 36 is set after the PASS FAIL line see Chap ter 12 3 4 4 Timing of control Signals on page 1203 If the mode is PASS or FAIL the PAS...

Page 826: ...ANDler PASSfail POLicy Policy Specifies how the global pass fail status CONTrol HANDler PASSfail STATus on page 827 is calculated Parameters Policy ALLTests ALLMeas ALLTests the status is PASS if all limit checks in all measure ments traces pass ALLMeas the status is PASS if a limit check is defined for all measurements traces and all limit checks pass It is FAIL if one or more traces have no asso...

Page 827: ...d have been swept at least one limit check failed according to the specified pass fail policy CONTrol HANDler PASSfail POLicy NONE no pass fail status available e g because the measure ment is in progress or because no limit check has been defined RST n a Example Preparations Configure and enable a limit check Start a mea surement and wait until the sweep is complete CONTrol HANDler PASSfail STATu...

Page 828: ...rvice staff Refer to the service manual for more infor mation DIAGnostic DEVice STATe 828 DIAGnostic DUMP SIZE 829 DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO 829 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower 829 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 829 DIAGnostic DEVice STATe Filename Generates a system report and writes it to the specified file See Chapter 9 3 Collect ing information for technical support on page 1180 Setting paramete...

Page 829: ... DESCription its KEY and key TYPE and its ACTivation and EXPiration date if applicable Example DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO ZND K2 DESC On a R S ZND this returns Time Domain Analysis if installed Usage Query only Manual operation See Software Option Info on page 556 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower Boolean Turns the internal source power at all ports on or off This command is equivalent to OUTPut Ch S...

Page 830: ...to diagrams DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED TraceName While this assignment is valid the trace is identified by the numeric suffix Wnd and the trace name is not needed Units for DISPlay commands The DISPlay subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the dia gram e g to set the scale or a reference value Some settings require a numeric value and a physical unit depending on the ...

Page 831: ...y WINDow Wnd OVERview STATe 843 DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe 844 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA 844 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe 844 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr CATalog 845 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr DELete 845 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed 846 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED 846 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr LABel SHOW 847 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr SHOW 847 DISPlay WINDow Wnd...

Page 832: ...REQ OFF Create diagram area no 1 with default trace and mask all stim ulus values Manual operation See Hide Sensitive Information on page 531 DISPlay CMAP LIMit FCOLorize STATe Boolean Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments Colorize Trace when Failed Parameters Boolean ON OFF colorize trace or keep original trace color RST n a a RST does not affect the setting In the fac tory con...

Page 833: ...iled trace sections DISPlay CMAP LIMit FSYMbol STATe OFF Remove the limit fail symbols from the trace Manual operation See Limit Test Use Trc Color for Limit Lines on page 534 DISPlay CMAP MARKer STATe Boolean Displays all markers with the same color or display each marker with the color of the associated trace The colors of all display elements are defined via DISPlay CMAP DispEl RGB Red Green Bl...

Page 834: ...SHed DOTTed DDOTted DDDotted TraceWidth Optional trace width only for traces DispEl 12 Range 1 to 20 Example RST DISP CMAP MARK ON CALC MARK ON Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S21 and a marker M1 CALC PAR SDEF Trc2 S11 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Create a trace named Trc2 and display the trace in diagram area no 1 Note that the new trace automatically becomes the ...

Page 835: ... diagram area continues the previous color scheme Moved traces keep their color Example RST DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S21 and color the trace red DISP CMAP TRAC COL OFF DISP WIND2 STAT ON Select independent color schemes for new diagram areas Cre ate a new diagram area no 2 CALC PAR SDEF Trc2 S11 DISP WIND2 TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Create a ne...

Page 836: ... 255 in the 24 bit color model Blue Blue content of the defined color Range 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model TraceStyle SOLid DASHed DOTTed DDOTted DDDotted Optional trace style only for traces DispEl 12 One of the string parameters SOLid DASHed DOTTed DDOTted DDDotted TraceWidth Optional trace width ...

Page 837: ...Te Boolean Shows hides the Info Window Parameters Boolean 0 hide the Info Window default 1 show the Info Window Manual operation See Info Window on page 532 DISPlay LAYout LayoutMode Arranges the diagrams in the screen leaving the diagram contents unchanged Parameters LayoutMode LINeup STACk HORizontal VERTical GRID LINeup the diagrams are arranged side by side STACk the diagrams are arranged one ...

Page 838: ...2 M i The sum of the widths in each row must also match the screen width hence wi1 wi2 wiM i 1 00 for all rows i 1 to N The LayoutData string for horizontal layouts reads h1 w11 w12 w1M 1 h2 w12 w22 w2M 2 hN wN1 wN2 wNM N A semicolon separates different rows a comma separates different diagram widths within a row The definition of a vertical layout is analogous however the role of rows and col umn...

Page 839: ...uts refer to Creating diagrams for an easy example For a horizontal layout with N rows each of height hi i 1 N and filled with M i diagrams with independent widths wij j 1 2 M i the data string is composed as follows StartFormat N 1 0 00 0 00 RepeatFormati 1 M i 1 00 hi wi1 1 00 wi2 1 00 wiM i 1 00 For a vertical layout with N columns each of width wi i 1 N and filled with M i diagrams with indepe...

Page 840: ...Current number of main layout as defined by DISPlay LAYout DEFine DiagramNumber Integer value 1 2 Diagram number in the main layout SubLayoutId Integer value 1 2 Current number of sub layout as defined by DISPlay LAYout DEFine RST n a Example See Creating diagrams Usage Setting only Manual operation See Additional Functionality SCPI Commands on page 529 DISPlay LAYout OVERlay Displays all traces o...

Page 841: ... working with the GPIB Explorer switch to raw mode Options Raw mode in the IECWIN32 GUI before executing this command DISPlay MENU KEY SELect MenuKey Activates the softtool tab with identifier MenuKey Use DISPlay MENU KEY TOOL CATalog to display the available identifiers Note that no error is generated if a valid MenuKey is specified but the tab cannot be activated for any other reason Setting par...

Page 842: ... empty string Suffix Wnd Number of a diagram This suffix is ignored the command returns a list of all diagrams Example RST DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram no 2 DISP WIND2 NAME S11 Test Diagram Assign a name to the new diagram DISP CAT Query all diagrams and their names As a default diagram no 1 is created upon RST the response is 1 1 2 S11 Test Diagram The first diagram is not named its default ...

Page 843: ...2 MAXimize ON Maximize the diagram areas placing area no 2 on top Manual operation See Maximize Diagram on page 526 DISPlay WINDow Wnd NAME Name Defines a name for diagram area Wnd The name appears in the list of diagram areas to be queried by DISPlay WINDow Wnd CATalog Suffix Wnd Number of the diagram area Parameters Name String variable for the name Example See DISPlay WINDow Wnd CATalog Manual ...

Page 844: ... Manual operation See Add Tr Diag on page 278 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe DATA Title Defines a title for diagram area Wnd Suffix Wnd Number of the diagram area Parameters Title String variable for the title The length of the title is practically unlimited but should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams Example RST DISP WIND TITL DATA S21 Test Diagram Define a title for the default dia...

Page 845: ...nt between a trace and a diagram area as defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED TraceName and expressed by the WndTr suffix The trace itself is not deleted this must be done via CALCulate Ch PARameter DELete TraceName Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON WndTr Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same dia gram ...

Page 846: ...tion coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC EFE CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 No trace number is assigned Usage Setting only DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED TraceName Assigns an existing trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine to a diagram area using the WndTr suffix and displays the trace Use DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr EFEed to a...

Page 847: ... string parameter e g Trc4 Boolean ON OFF display or hide the label of the related trace Example RST DISP TRAC LAB SHOW Trc1 Reset the analyzer creating the default trace Trc1 The trace label is displayed the query returns 1 DISP TRAC LAB SHOW Trc1 OFF Hide the label of trace Trc1 Manual operation See Table Area on page 280 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr SHOW TraceName Boolean Displays or hides an...

Page 848: ...iagrams DISP TRAC SHOW DALL Query whether all data traces are displayed The response 0 means that at least one trace is hidden Manual operation See Table Area on page 280 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr X OFFSet StimulusOffset Shifts the trace WndTr in horizontal direction leaving the positions of all markers unchanged Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow...

Page 849: ...eg RST 0 deg Default unit deg RealPart Real and imaginary part of added complex constant optional for setting command but returned by query Range 3 4 1038 to 3 4 1038 RST 0 ImaginaryPart Example RST DISP WIND TRAC X OFFS 1MHZ DISP WIND TRAC Y OFFS 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz verti cally by 10 dB DISP WIND TRAC Y OFFS Query all response offset values The response ...

Page 850: ...he default trace and query the scaling parameters again In general both values have changed Usage Setting only Manual operation See Auto Scale Trace on page 272 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe BOTTom LowEdge TraceName DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe TOP UppEdge TraceName These commands define the lower bottom and upper top edge of the diagram area Wnd Suffix Wnd Number of an existing...

Page 851: ...ts the value between two grid lines value per division for the diagram area Wnd When a new PDIVision value is entered the current RLEVel is kept the same while the top and bottom scaling is adjusted for the new PDIVision value Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existi...

Page 852: ...IVision The trace can be refer enced either by its number WndTr or by its name TraceName Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is use...

Page 853: ...ion is the point on the y axis which should equal the RLEVel Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Parameters RefPosition Val...

Page 854: ...ontrol all or part of the zoom window may be outside the original diagram Suffix Wnd Number of an existing diagram defined by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd STATe ON This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used WndTr Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional TraceName parameter is used Parameters UppEdge...

Page 855: ...me parameter is used Parameters RightBorder Left or right border of the zoom window Range See description above RST Start or stop of the analyzer s sweep range Default unit NN TraceName Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present both numeric suffixes are ignored trace names must be unique across different channels and win dows Example See DISPlay WI...

Page 856: ...stimulus values of the sweep points are not affected DISPlay WINDow1 OVERview STATe ON Activate an additional overview window in the upper part of the diagram Manual operation See Zoom Select Stim Zoom Select on page 275 7 3 6 FORMat commands The FORMAT commands select a data format for transferring numeric data includ ing arrays from and to the analyzer FORMat BORDer 856 FORMat DATA 857 FORMat BO...

Page 857: ...vertent inter ruption of the data transfer Length The optional Length parameter is needed for REAL format only It defines the length of the floating point numbers in bits Valid values are 32 and 64 RST ASCII The default length of REAL data is 32 bits single precision Example FORM REAL 32 Select real data format SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Set the terminator to EOI During a calibration CORR CDAT REFLTR...

Page 858: ...es RST n a RST does not overwrite the printer destina tion Example MMEM NAME C Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a printer file name without creating the file assuming that BMP is the current file format see HCOPy DEVice LANGuage HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP Select Print to file and create the printer file specified before Manual operation See To File on page 507 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage Format Selects a file form...

Page 859: ...plete screen contents to be printed including the logo HCOPy ITEM LOGO STATe time HCOPy ITEM TIME STATe and the marker list HCOPy ITEM MLISt STATe Example HCOP ITEM ALL Select the complete information to be printed HCOP Start printing Usage Event HCOPy ITEM LOGO STATe Boolean Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the logo The default R S logo file Logo gif is stored in the Resources...

Page 860: ... ALL Select the complete information to be printed HCOP ITEM TIME ON HCOP Include the data and time in the printed output and start printing HCOPy PAGE COLor ColorScheme Select the color scheme to be used for printing Parameters ColorScheme UDEFined DBACkground LBACkground BWLStyles BWSolid PBWLstyles PCLBackgrnd ON OFF ON print with color or grayscale depending on the printer capabilities OFF use...

Page 861: ...e distance between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the printed information Parameters LowMargin Lower margin Range 0 01 mm to 10000 mm RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP PAGE MARG BOTT 10 TOP 10 Set an upper and a lower margin of 1 cm HCOPy PAGE MARGin LEFT LeftMargin Defines the distance between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the printed in...

Page 862: ...ape and PORTrait rotates the hardcopy result by 90 degrees No other settings are changed Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait LANDscape long edge of the paper is the top of the page PORTrait short edge of the paper is the top of the page RST n a RST does not affect the printer configuration Example HCOP PAGE ORI LAND HCOP Select landscape page orientation and start printing HCOPy PAGE WINDow ...

Page 863: ...inuously repeating the current sweep OFF the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt INITiate Ch IMMediate DUMMy initiates a new measurement cycle RST ON Example RST CALC2 PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 DISPlay WINDow TRACe2 FEED Trc2 Reset the analyzer to create the default channel no 1 and default trace Create a second trace and display the trace Both traces are mea...

Page 864: ... if at least one channel is measured continuously OFF the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt INITiate Ch IMMediate DUMMy initiates a new measurement cycle RST ON Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Manual operation See All Channels Continuous All Channels on Hold on page 384 INITiate IMMediate ALL Starts a new single sweep sequence in all channels Thi...

Page 865: ...s active and INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe ALL is selected this suffix is ignored Example See INITiate Ch CONTinuous Usage Event Manual operation See Restart Sweep on page 383 INITiate Ch IMMediate SCOPe Scope Selects the scope of the single sweep sequence The setting is applied in single sweep mode only INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF This command is required in compatibility modes only see SYSTem LANGu...

Page 866: ...T ON INST NSEL Create channel no 2 and select it as the active channel The query returns 2 INSTrument PORT COUNt Returns the number of test ports Port 1 Port 2 of the analyzer Example INST PORT COUN Return the number of ports of your analyzer Usage Query only INSTrument SMATrix Boolean In set direction this command perfoms a default setup or clear of the switch matrix RF connections in get directi...

Page 867: ...alyzer Storing setups The MEMory commands do not affect any stored files Use the MMEMory com mands to store and load data and to manage files stored on a mass storage device MEMory CATalog 867 MEMory CATalog COUNt 868 MEMory DEFine 868 MEMory DELete ALL 868 MEMory DELete NAME 868 MEMory SELect 868 MEMory CATalog Returns the names of all loaded recall sets Example RST MEM DEF SET_2 Create a recall ...

Page 868: ...ation See New on page 503 MEMory DELete ALL Deletes all loaded recall sets Example MEM DEL ALL MEM CAT Delete all recall sets The query MEM CAT returns an empty string The local screen shows no recall set Usage Event MEMory DELete NAME Name Closes the specified recall set Setting parameters Name String parameter to specify the name of the recall set to be closed Example See MEMory CATalog Usage Se...

Page 869: ...ust contain the abso lute path including the drive name and all subdirectories If the specified path is not absolute the file location is interpreted relative to the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory The file name itself can contain the period as a separator for extensions File and directory names can be chosen according to Windows conventions All let ters and numbers are allowed p...

Page 870: ...y LOAD STATe 887 MMEMory LOAD TRACe 887 MMEMory LOAD TRACe AUTO 888 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt 889 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch BALanced EMBedding LogPt 889 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt 890 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop DEEMbedding 891 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch GLOop EMBedding group 891 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch PPAir DEEMbedding ListId 891 MMEMor...

Page 871: ... to Touchstone format and cop ies it to the specified directory Setting parameters Directory String parameter to specify the directory Example MMEM AKAL FACTory CONVersion C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna AKAL Touchstone Convert and copy the factory calibration data of the active cali bration unit to the specified writable directory Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on...

Page 872: ...r defined cal kit user calkit to the specified directory Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 397 MMEMory CATalog Directory Returns the contents of the current or of a specified directory The directory information is returned in the following format Used Size FreeDiskSpace FileEntry DirectoryEntry The information elements indicate the following Used Size disk space in bytes...

Page 873: ...na 0 2283155456 calibration DIR colorschemes DIR hardcopy DIR limitlines DIR Usage Query only MMEMory CDIRectory Directory Changes the current directory for MMEMory commands Relative paths are interpreted relative to this directory Parameters Directory String parameter to specify the directory If DEFault is used the analyzer selects the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna ...

Page 874: ...s Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets SET1 znx D Copy file Set1 znx in directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets to the external storage medium mapped to drive D Usage Setting only MMEMory DATA Filename DataBlock Loads a DataBlock into the file FileName Parameters Filename String parameter to specify the name of the file DataBlock block_data Data in IEEE488 2 block ...

Page 875: ...eters CalGroupName String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be deleted Cal group files must have the extension cal The directory path must not be specified the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Data Example See MMEMory LOAD CORRection Usage Setting only Manual operation See Pool Delete from Pool on page 4...

Page 876: ...the same name Predefined cable types of the same name will not be overwritten Setting parameters InputDir Input Directory Example MMEMory STORe CABLe C dtf cables Saves all predefined and user defined Distance to Fault DtF cable types to the directory C dtf cables Edit rsc files for user defined cable types copy rsc files rename and edit them Afterwards execute MMEMory LOAD CABLe C dtf cables to u...

Page 877: ... calibration kit availa ble on the analyzer StandardType MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MMLine1 MMLine2 MMLine3 MFLine MFLine1 MFLine2 MFLine3 FFLine FFLine1 FFLine2 FFLine3 MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort MOSHort MOSHort1 MOSHort2 MOSHort3 FOSHort FOSHort1 FOSHort2 FOSHort3 MREFlect FREFlect MMTCh FMTCh MSMatch FSMatch Standard types for a ...

Page 878: ...pe StandardLabel TouchstoneFile FirstPort SecondPort Loads characterization data from the given Touchstone file similar to existing com mand MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa but supports cal kit addressing by label Setting parameters ConnectorType String parameter containing the name of the connector type CalKitName String parameter containing the name of a calibration kit availa ble on the analyzer KitLab...

Page 879: ...onnector type Assign the label Test data and specify that the standard data is valid for port no 1 only Usage Setting only Connector and cal kit naming conventions Connector and calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters The strings contain the connector and cal kit names used in the Calibration Kits dialog a Ω in the name must be replaced by Ohm e g NewKit1 denotes the user define...

Page 880: ...play or printing HCOPy Setting parameters ColorSchemeFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the color scheme file to be loaded The default extension manual control for color scheme files is ColorScheme although other exten sions are allowed Example MMEM LOAD CMAP C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna ColorSchemes Test ColorScheme Load the previously created color scheme fi...

Page 881: ...nse Calgroup1 cal MMEM LOAD CORR RES 2 Calgroup1 cal Resolve the pool link between channel 2 and the cal group file MMEM LOAD CORR 2 Query the cal group file for channel 2 Response MMEM DEL CORR Calgroup1 cal Delete the created cal group file Manual operation See Add Add All Replace Apply Apply to All on page 437 MMEMory LOAD CORRection MERGe Channel CalGroupFile CalGroupFile Merges activates seve...

Page 882: ...te a default calibration data set for the selected calibration type and store the data to a cal group file CORR COLL METH DEF Query the active calibrations for channel 1 The response is FRTR0104 the last data set stored MMEM LOAD CORR MERGE 1 P1 P3 cal P1 P4 cal CORR COLL METH DEF Merge the two calibration types and query the active calibrations again The response is FRTR0103 FRTR0104 MMEM STOR CO...

Page 883: ...file or trace file to channel Ch Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters DeEmbedding Position BOTH DUT PM Determines the two port the command refers to DUT The two port between VNA and DUT during measurement PM The two port between VNA and PM during power calibration BOTH Both positions parameter omitted If the parameter is omitted the command refers to the two port selected using SOURce Ch POWer PhyP...

Page 884: ...neType are only relevant for Touchstone files For limit files no optional parameters can be set Setting parameters TraceName Name of an existing trace in the active recall set string parame ter The imported limit line is assigned to this trace irrespective of the trace information in the limit line file LimLineFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the limit line file to be loa...

Page 885: ...IM TRC2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Load the previously created limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trc2 MMEM STOR TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Trc1 s1p Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a limit line file in Touch stone format MMEM LOAD LIM TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Trc1 s1p...

Page 886: ...m_Trc1 limit Store the ripple limit definition of Trc1 to a ripple limit file MMEM LOAD RIPP TRC2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna LIMitLines Lim_Trc1 limit Load the previously created ripple limit file and assign the limits to Trc2 CALC RIPP DISPlay ON Show the ripple limit line for the active trace in the diagram Usage Setting only Manual operation See Recall Ripple Test Save Ripple Te...

Page 887: ...state Setting parameters Compatibility 1 this value is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is ignored RecallSetFile String parameter to specify the absolute or relative path of the recall set file to be loaded Relative paths are evaluated relative to the current directory see MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets Set_0413 zn...

Page 888: ...he first trace in the specified file is imported Example Assume that the current recall set contains a trace named Trc1 MMEM STOR TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s1p Store the current trace data of Trc1 to a trace file MMEM LOAD TRAC TRC1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Trc1 s1p Load the previously created trace file and create a memory trace assi...

Page 889: ...orks BALanced EMBedding LogPt TNDefinitionto select the desired circuit model before loading the data files The FIMPort model requires a single s4p file and hence a single set com mand The circuit models STSL STSC SLST SCST require 2 s2p files that have to be assigned to the appropriate port using two set commands Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number Parameters TouchstoneFile String ...

Page 890: ... VNET BAL DEEM2 C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna VNET Test s2p PMA Load a Touchstone file and assign it to logical port no 2 Manual operation See File Name i Swap Gates on page 456 MMEMory LOAD VNETworks Ch DIFFerential EMBedding LogPt TouchstoneFile Interchange Loads data of a Differential match embedding network from the specified Touchstone s2p file Use CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETwork...

Page 891: ...GROup Grp PPORts and CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks GLOop GROup is ON then each port group can have its own ground loop de embedding model Parameters TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory which can be set and queried using MMEMory CDIRectory Example CALC TRAN VNET SEND G...

Page 892: ...ry CDIRectory Port PMAin PSECondary For port pairs Port assigns a 2 port s2p file to the appro priate port PMAin corresponds to D1 PSECondary to D2 in the circuit model pictograms for balanced ports For an s 2m p file with m 1 this parameter is ignored How ever it must be specified unless the Interchange parameter is also omitted Interchange FPORts IPORts SGATes SINCreasing Defines how to interpre...

Page 893: ...RANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt TNDefinition to select the adequate circuit model before executing this command CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks SENDed EMBedding PhyPt PARameters DATA to load circuit data from the remote client Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters TouchstoneFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded Touchstone file If ...

Page 894: ... C Users Public Instrument New_Directory Usage Setting only MMEMory MOVE SourceFile NewFile Moves a file to the indicated directory and stores it under the file name specified if any If NewFile contains no path indication the command renames the file without mov ing it Setting parameters SourceFile NewFile String parameters to specify the name and the path of the file to be copied and the name and...

Page 895: ...EM Parameters Filename String parameter to specify the file name The supported file for mats are wmf ewmf bmp png see command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage The specified directory must exist otherwise no file can be generated If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST Hardcopy Example MMEM NAME C Users Public Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a pri...

Page 896: ...me Name of a user defined calibration kit available on the analyzer Tip It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits CalKitFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be created The file is a network analyzer specific cal kit file with the extension calkit If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be queried with MM...

Page 897: ...AP ColorSchemeFile MMEMory STORe CMAP HCOPy ColorSchemeFile Stores the user defined color scheme display print to a VNA color scheme file The HCOPy variant is for the print color scheme Setting parameters ColorSchemeFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the color scheme file to be created If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMor...

Page 898: ...meters DeEmbedding Position BOTH DUT PM Determines the two port the command refers to DUT The two port between VNA and DUT during measurement PM The two port between VNA and PM during power calibration BOTH Both positions parameter omitted If the parameter is omitted the command refers to the two port selected using SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Setting parameters PmclF...

Page 899: ...ration See Recall Save on page 322 MMEMory STORe MARKer AsciiFile Saves the values of all markers to an ASCII file Setting parameters AsciiFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated ASCII file The default extension manual control for marker files is txt although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc tory to be quer...

Page 900: ... MMEMory STORe SEGMent Channel SweepSegFile Saves the sweep segment definition of the related channel to a an ASCII file Sweep segments are defined using SENSe SEGMent commands Setting parameters Channel Channel number SweepSegFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated sweep segment file The default extension manual control for sweep segment files is SegList although o...

Page 901: ...e trc_name can be the name of any of the traces To create Touchstone files while less than n 2 single ended traces are available use MMEMory STORe TRACe PORTs Setting parameters TraceName Name of an existing data trace in the active recall set string parameter TraceFile String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cre ated trace file Several file formats for trace files are supported ...

Page 902: ...the specified channel to a trace file Traces are created using the CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine command Tip s n p Touchstone files n 1 2 3 are intended for a complete set of n port S parameters Data export fails if the active channel does not contain the full set of n 2 traces Setting parameters Channel Channel number in the active recall set ALL means that a sepa rate file is created for each c...

Page 903: ...field separator tabulator SPACe field separator space If the third optional parameter is omitted semicolons are used Example RST CONF TRAC NAME Reset the instrument creating a default channel no 1 and a default trace Trc1 CALC PAR DEF SGR 1 2 Create four traces to measure the two port S parameters S11 S12 S21 S22 The traces are not displayed MMEM STOR TRAC CHAN 1 C Users Public Documents Rohde Sch...

Page 904: ...ntation of the Touchstone file export only the L11 file format supports independent settings for stimulus and data values see MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion FORMat For the F11 and F20 formats the DATA number of digits is used for both stimulus and data values Parameters NumDecimals Range 1 to 15 Manual operation See Decimal Places on page 312 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion FORMat TS_Frmt Selects the file ...

Page 905: ...hstone file export If set to ON columns are separated by tabs rather than spaces Parameters Boolean Manual operation See Use TAB instead of blanks on page 549 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion TRIM Boolean This command defines whitespace insertion during Touchstone file export If set to ON whitespace at the beginning of each line is removed Parameters Boolean Manual operation See Trim Leading Whitespace ...

Page 906: ... to a common target impedance of 50 Ω PIMPedance normalize to the individual port reference impe dances See Renormalization of S parameters on page 141 Port Port Physical port numbers Port Example Suppose that a full two port calibration for ports 1 and 2 and channel 1 has been performed and that a DUT with two bal anced ports is connected The analyzer measures an arbitrary mixed mode S parameter ...

Page 907: ...ll Channels on page 359 OUTPut UPORt ECBits Boolean Defines the usage of pins 16 to 19 of the USER PORT connector Parameters Boolean ON channel bits 4 to 7 OFF drive port 1 to 4 RST ON Example See OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue Manual operation See Pin 16 19 on page 548 OUTPut Ch UPORt SEGMent Seg STATe Boolean Enables or disables segment bits for the sweep segments in channel no Ch see OUTPut Ch UPORt SEG...

Page 908: ...segment no Seg in channel no Ch The signals at the USER CONTROL connector reflect the segments bits of the cur rently measured segment The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement in a segment with non zero segment bits is started They are changed whenever a segment with different segment bits is measured The signals at the USER PORT connector are maintained after the analyzer enters the h...

Page 909: ...signal changes from pin 16 to pin 17 Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 376 OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue BinValue Sets or queries a channel dependent eight bit binary value to control eight independent output signals at the USER PORT connector lines 8 9 10 11 and lines 16 17 18 19 The output signals are 3 3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 255 independent analyzer...

Page 910: ...uffix Ch Channel number Parameters BinValue Binary value The values correspond to the following states of the USER PORT connector B00000000 no signal at any of the eight pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 B00000001 output signal at pin 8 B00000010 output signal at pin 9 B00000011 output signal at pins 8 and 9 B11111111 output signal at pins 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 Range B00000000 to B11111111 for setting co...

Page 911: ...g batch files command prompt When executing batch scripts or other DOS applications the analyzer does not display any DOS windows the screen is left for the vector network analyzer VNA application The same applies to the Windows NT command prompt cmd exe To access the command prompt proceed as follows Create a batch file e g Start_cmd bat containing the command line start cmd exe and store the fil...

Page 912: ... simple file based two way communication mechanism to an external application launched by PROGram SELected EXECute see example Parameters IniFile Name and path of the ini file The ini extension may be omitted as it is created automatically by the command The specified path directory must exist If the ini file does not exist it is created SendValue Value for the fixed key Send Example PROG INIM c p...

Page 913: ...t has to be enclosed in single or double quotes Example PROG INIP c preferences myapp myparameter myvalue startf 123 05 Write two key value pairs into the file c preferences myapp ini The contents of the file look like PARAMETER myparameter myvalue startf 123 05 PROG INIP c preferences myapp myparameter Query the value of the key myparameter in the ini file The response is myvalue PROGram SELected...

Page 914: ...of the executed program PROGram SELected RETVal Example See PROGram SELected EXECute 7 3 14 SENSe commands The SENSe commands affect the receiver settings of the R S ZND 7 3 14 1 SENSe AVERage The SENSe AVERage commands set sweep averaging parameters The sweep average is a noise reduction technique which consists of calculating each measure ment point as an average of the same measurement point ov...

Page 915: ...5 AVER ON Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 the mnemonic SENS1 can be omitted and enable the sweep average AVER COUN 5 CLE Reduce the average factor and restart the average Usage Event Manual operation See Factor On Reset on page 363 SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt AverageFactor Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be combined for the sweep average Factor Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters...

Page 916: ...7 3 14 2 SENSe BANDwidth The SENSe BANDwidth commands set the bandwidth of the IF filter measure ment bandwidth The forms BANDwidth and BWIDth are equivalent SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution 916 SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution 916 SENSe Ch BANDwidth RESolution ResBandw SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution IF Bandwidth Defines the IF bandwidth of the analyzer measurement bandwidth Values between 1 Hz and 300 kHz can...

Page 917: ... subsequent firmware start until it is removed using SENSe CDLL REMove Note that adding removing custom DLLs is only possible if the firmware is run as administrator Setting parameters DllPath Full path to the zip archive including the DLL at the top tevel Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Remove on page 263 SENSe CDLL LIST Queries the loaded custom external DLL files The return value is...

Page 918: ...Manual operation See Additional Input on page 263 SENSe Ch CDLL PERManent STATe DllName Boolean SENSe Ch CDLL PERManent STATe DllName Defines whether DLL DllName shall operate in permanent mode in channel Ch Use SENSe Ch CDLL PERManent TASK and SENSe Ch CDLL PERManent ADDitional to configure the permanent task to be run Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Boolean ON 1 Permanent mode enabled OFF 0 ...

Page 919: ...y possible if the firmware is run as administrator Setting parameters DllName Name of a loaded DLL see SENSe CDLL LIST Lowercase string without dll extension Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Remove on page 263 SENSe Ch CDLL STATe DllName Boolean SENSe Ch CDLL STATe DllName Defines the state of external DLL DllName dll in channel Ch An active DLL can provide traces or operate in permanen...

Page 920: ...ation about the calibration standard In order to handle several identical calibration kits with different serial numbers use the commands of Chapter 7 3 14 5 SENSe CORRection CKIT with Labels on page 928 SENSe CORRection CKIT StandardType 920 SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog 924 SENSe CORRection CKIT DELete 924 SENSe CORRection CKIT DMODe 925 SENSe CORRection CKIT LABel 925 SENSe CORRection CKIT SELe...

Page 921: ... one port standard the validity of the characterization can be restricted to a single port For a two port standard it can be restricted to a port pair specified using ascending port num bers Note with a port restriction the defined standard becomes sex less Hence for each port pair there can be only one standard of a given type i e SENSe CORRection CKIT MOP ParameterList 1 and SENSe CORRection CKI...

Page 922: ... Resist ance Port1 Port2 optional Port 1 optional Port 1 Port 2 values are ignored during calibration if OPEN is selected the residual inductance L0 L3 are during calibration if SHORt is selected the fringing capacitance C0 C3 are during calibration must be provided if the definition is restricted to a single port Values are ignored during calibration The parameters in the SENSe Ch CORRection CKIT...

Page 923: ...ied without unit implicit unit of Li is pH GHz i OPEN SHORt MATCh Resistance A load circuit model generally consists of a capacitance modeled by C0 C3 connected in parallel to an inductance modeled by L0 L3 and a resistance both connected in series OPEN SHORt MATCh indicates a simplified modeling as an Open or Short or Match standard OPEN the resistance is infinite so that the standard behaves lik...

Page 924: ...ypes Query parameters ConnectorType Name of the connector type optional Use SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog to query connector names If omitted the command returns the list of all cal kits Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only Manual operation See Available Cal Kits on page 418 SENSe CORRection CKIT DELete CalKitName Deletes an imported or user defined cal kit ...

Page 925: ... Cal kit naming conventions under SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect KitLabel String parameter containing the label of the calibration kit usu ally the serial number Setting parameters Mode DELay ELENgth DELay Keysight modelling ELENgth ZVR compatible modelling Manual operation See Add Copy Delete Standards on page 418 SENSe CORRection CKIT LABel CalKitName KitLabel Assigns a label to an impor...

Page 926: ...the cal kit name stored in New Kit 1 calkit reads New Kit 1 Manual operation See Cal Kit on page 402 SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType SELect CalKitName Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type ConnType The kit is identified by its name Tip For connector types with arbitrary user defined names you can use the command SENSe CORRection CKIT SELect Cal kit naming conventions...

Page 927: ...in a given calibration kit Query parameters CalKitName Name of the cal kit Use SENSe CORRection CKIT CATalog to query cal kit names Example See SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection CATalog Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CKIT STANdard DATA ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel StandardType DelayMode Port1 Port2 Returns the data of the related calibration standard identified by ConnectorType CalKitName Kit...

Page 928: ...ally the serial number of the calibration kit serves as a calibration kit label Due to their different labels the analyzer can handle several calibration kits with identical names SENSe CORRection CKIT LCATalog 928 SENSe CORRection CKIT LDELete 929 SENSe CORRection CKIT LLABel 929 SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect 930 SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect 931 SENSe CORRection CKIT STANdard LCATalog 9...

Page 929: ...bel of an imported or user defined calibration kit available on the analyzer Example See SENSe CORRection CKIT LLABel Usage Setting only SENSe CORRection CKIT LLABel CalKitName KitLabel NewKitLabel Assigns a calibration kit label to an imported or user defined calibration kit or renames an existing calibration kit label Parameters CalKitName String parameter containing an imported or user defined ...

Page 930: ... 2012 05 25 calkit CORR CKIT LDEL New Kit 1 2012 05 25 Delete the kit from the internal memory MMEMory LOAD CKIT C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits New Kit 1 2012 05 25 calkit Re load the kit SENSe CORRection CKIT LSELect ConnectorType CalKitName KitLabel Selects the calibration kit to be used specifying its connector type name and label Tip The command is suitable for con...

Page 931: ... PC292 PC 7 PC 3 5 or 2 92 mm connectors USER no user defined connectors UserConn1 UserConn2 SMA user defined connector type SMA Parameters CalKitName String parameter containing the name of a calibration kit availa ble on the analyzer See Cal kit naming conventions under SENSe CORRection CKIT ConnType LSELect RST n a A RST does not change the assignment between connector types and calibration kit...

Page 932: ...dType where a particular cal kit can be addressed by name and label Apart from the additional CalKitLabel parameter the syntax and semantics of this command is identical to Standard types and their parameters Example CORR CKIT FOP WLAB N 50 Ohm New Kit 1 123456 0 4000000000 0 0 50 99 2 3 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 Define the properties of the Open f standard for a N 50 Ω con nector type in the calibration kit...

Page 933: ...ed from Touchstone file using MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa or MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa WLABel The cal kit is identified by its name and label Query parameters TwoPortStandard MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MMLine1 MMLine2 MMLine3 MFLine MFLine1 MFLine2 MFLine3 FFLine FFLine1 FFLine2 FFLine3 MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork Standard type For more information see Table 7 13 C...

Page 934: ...ction COLLect AUTO SAVE 951 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TEMPcomp 951 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE 952 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO UTHRough 953 SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage 953 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels ALL 954 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes 954 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT INSTall 956 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT LOAD 956 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLec...

Page 935: ...Standard types Through Open Short Match Symmetric Net work NET Attenuation ATT Reflect Sliding Match SLIDe Line1 LINE1 and LINE are synonymous Line2 and Line3 esp for TRL calibration Offset Short 1 to 3 OSHort Unknown Through ISOLation is not a physical standard to measure the isolation supported for transmission normalization and TOSM only it is recommended to suitably terminate the related test ...

Page 936: ...ase values the analyzer calculates a linear extrapolation and derives an estimate for the DC phase limit If this DC phase is in the vicinity of 180 deg 180 deg then the transmission factor with negative phase is adop ted If the DC phase is in the vicinity of 0 deg 360 deg then the transmission factor with inverted sign corresponding to a 180 deg phase shift is adopted RST AUTO Example See SENSe Ch...

Page 937: ...mbers must be speci fied The analyzer automatically detects the calibration unit ports connected to each analyzer port Example CORR COLL AUTO 1 2 4 Perform an automatic 3 port calibration at test ports 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 397 SENSe Ch CORRection COLL...

Page 938: ... SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment ALL COUNt to get the number of port assignments of all calibrations Suffix Ch Channel number Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 938 Usage Query only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TestPort1 CalUnitPort1 TestPort2 Manually defines port assignment no Asg for channel no Ch With manual configur...

Page 939: ...ault assignments instead See Chapter 4 5 5 6 Multiple port assignments on page 173 for background infor mation Suffix Ch Number of the channel Asg Number of the port assignment Parameters TestPort1 First test port number CalUnitPort1 Number of the calibration unit port that is assigned to the first test port TestPort2 Second test port number SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik ...

Page 940: ...ted to cal unit port 1 and test port 3 to cal unit port 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment1 ACQUire Perfoms the calibration sweep for port assignment 1 Before starting the calibration sweep for port assignment 2 ensure test ports 3 and 4 are connected to the cal unit in any order SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment2 ACQUire Perfoms the calibration sweep for port assignment 2 auto de...

Page 941: ...ound infor mation Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters TestPort1 Test port number 1 TestPort2 Test port number 2 Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine on page 938 Usage Setting only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine TPORt TestPort1 TestPort2 Similar logic as SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine but initially defines the por...

Page 942: ...nt Asg DEFine on page 938 Usage Setting only SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DELete ALL Deletes all port assignments created using SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine and calibration definitions created using SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure of an ongoing automatic calibration in channel Ch Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Example See SENS...

Page 943: ... unit and store it in the calibration unit SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT SD test1 Generate a cal kit file test1 calkit for the active calibration unit and store it in the calibration unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See File name Comment Optional on page 427 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword Password Enters a password to enable a single password protected action in the autom...

Page 944: ...n be saved to a directory on the analyzer to the calibration unit s internal flash memory or to an SD card inserted at the calibration unit if available Similar logic as SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT but with flexible port assignment Setting parameters Characterization Location of the created characterization cal kit file string parameter extension calkit If a path is specified the file is sa...

Page 945: ...ile stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer TestPort1 Number of first test port CalUnitPort1 Number of the calibration unit port to whom test port Test Port1 is assigned TestPort2 Number of the second test port Example Prerequisite SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess MyCalU Sets MyCalU as the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL PORTs abc Queries the ports of charac...

Page 946: ... the command will fail FRTRans Transmission normalization bidirectional If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization the command will fail FTRans RTRans Transmission normalization forward reverse If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization the command will fail REFL Reflection normalization Open RSHort Reflection no...

Page 947: ...t DEFine DEFault or SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DEFine TPORt DEFault on page 942 If SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO MCONnect is ON this port will be used as the center of all Through measurements If you set up the port assignments manually make sure that every port assignment contains it Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters PortNumber Number of the common port Usage Setting on...

Page 948: ...ctive calibration unit is used A VNA cal kit file name calkit without path refers to a specific cal kit file stored in the internal memory of the active cal ibration unit A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with SD refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit A VNA cal kit file name calkit with path refers to a spe cific cal kit file...

Page 949: ...d initiates an automatic calibration at arbitrary test and calibration unit ports A progress monitor for the calibration sweeps is displayed Tip This command is necessary if the analyzer fails to detect the cal unit ports con nected to each of its ports e g because of a high attenuation in the test setup If auto detection works you can use the simpler command SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TYPE ...

Page 950: ... specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit A VNA cal kit file name calkit with path refers to a spe cific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer TestPort1 Test port number For an n port automatic calibration n arbitrary not necessarily consecutive port numbers must be specified For a one path two port calibration OPTPort the first po...

Page 951: ... data and applies the calibration to the active channel Requires successful calibration sweeps for all related port assignments see SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg ACQuire Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment Asg DEFine Usage Event Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 397 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO TEM...

Page 952: ...bration Type FNPort Full n port UOSM calibration TOSM Full n port calibration with characterized Through If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Through characterization the command silently falls back to a FNPort UOSM calibration FOPort Full one port Refl OSM calibration OPTPort One Path Two Ports calibration If the selected cal unit characterization does not contain a Throug...

Page 953: ...rts 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Calibration Type Source on page 392 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect AUTO UTHRough TestPort1 TestPort2 With this command you can perform the Unknown Through measurement during an automatic UOSM calibration Although it works for all calibration units it...

Page 954: ...anual operation See Calibrate all Channels on page 400 SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes Boolean Toggles the Multiple Calibration TYpes mode that allows you to calibrate a subset of the available channels using channel specific ports and calibration types see Chap ter 4 5 7 Parallel calibration of multiple channels on page 181 Enable the MCTYpes mode before defining the calibrations to be ...

Page 955: ...en connect the Open standard to port 2 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 Acquire calibration data for the open on port 2 needed for cali bration in channel 2 Then connect the Short standard to port 2 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORt 2 Acquire calibration data for short on port 2 needed for calibra tions in channel 1 and 2 Then connect the Match standard to port 2 SENS...

Page 956: ... KitLabel Gender Ports Allows you to load cal kit data by name label and gender From the pool To the given ports or all ports Suffix Ch Channel number Setting parameters CalKitName The name of the cal kit to be loaded KitLabel The label of the cal kit to be loaded Gender MALE FEMale NGENder The gender of the cal kit to be loaded Port Either a comma separated list of port numbers or ALL optional Us...

Page 957: ...N50Male N75Female N75Male PC7 SMAFemale SMAMale PC35female PC35male PC292female PC292male PC24female PC24male PC185female PC185male S7_16female S7_16male BNC50male BNC50female BNC75male BNC75female UFEMale1 UMALe1 UFEMale2 UMALe2 Connector type and gender of the connectors omitted for query The R S ZVR compatible parameters UFEMALE1 and UMALE1 denote the user defined connector type UserConn1 UFEMA...

Page 958: ... ConnectorType Qualifies whether the connector types at the test ports but not their gender are equal or independent Some calibration types require uniform port connector types Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters ConnectorType ALL SINGle ALL equal uniform connector types If the connector type at one port is changed the connector type at all other ports is changed accordin...

Page 959: ...calibration type CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE SEL CORR COLL DEL ALL Calculate the system error correction data and apply it to the active channel then delete the data Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply on page 405 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DETector CalName CalDetectorType Selects the...

Page 960: ...COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect DISCard Usage Event SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire StandardType TestPort1 TestPort2 Starts a fixture compensation sweep in order to acquire measurement data for a test fixture that has its inner conductor terminated with the selected standards Suffix Ch Channel number of the co...

Page 961: ... a fixture compensation measurement for channel 2 The channel 1 data is not affected SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT ACQ SHOR 1 3 Repeat the previous fixture compensation sweep for channel 2 SENS1 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE SENS2 CORR COLL FIXT SAVE Save and apply the compensation data for both channels SENS1 CORR OFFS3 DFC SENS2 CORR OFFS3 DFC Query whether the analyzer uses Direct Compensation results at port 3 T...

Page 962: ... consecutive port numbers must be specified Example RST SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT LMP OFF Activate Direct Compensation SENSe1 CORR COLL FIXT EXP Traces p12_short csv SHOR 1 2 Acquire Direct Compensation data for ports 1 and 2 whose inner connectors have to be terminated with a Short and save the acquired data to file In a subsequent measurement session you can load and apply these data as follows RST ...

Page 963: ...ure ACQuire Manual operation See Auto Length Auto Length and Loss on page 463 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure SAVE Completes a fixture compensation storing and applying the acquired data Suffix Ch Channel number of the corrected channel Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure ACQuire Usage Event Manual operation See Measure Fixture wizard on page 464 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect FIXTure...

Page 964: ...e calls of SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect LOAD SELected CalGroupFile SLIDe TestPort for the same cal group file and test port implicitly increases the position until position 20 has been recorded Subsequent calls will start over at position 1 overwriting the previously loaded data Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters CalGroupFile String parameter to specify the name of the lo...

Page 965: ...Rection COLLect METHod DEFine CalName CalType TestPort1 TestPort2 TestPort3orAdapterCalKit TestPorts Defines the calibration to be performed for channel Ch If multiple channels shall be calibrated in parallel use SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels ALL ON or SENSe CORRection COLLect CHANnels MCTYpes ON before executing this command For background information see Chapter 4 5 7 Paral lel calibration o...

Page 966: ...h CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy TestPorts More ports to be calibrated Example SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT METHOD DEFine Test ARTosm 1 2 Adapter s2p Initiate an Adapter Removal calibration for ports 1 and 2 on channel 1 and store the adapter characterization in MMEMORY CDIR Adapter s2p For another example see SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DUMMy Manual operation See Type Source on...

Page 967: ...at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SAVE SEL DEF Calculate a dummy system error correction for the normalization at port 1 The dummy system error correction provides the reflection tracking error term REFLTRACK CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 Query the dummy system error correction term The response is a 1 written as 1 0 for the real and imaginary part for each sweep point no att...

Page 968: ...ntrast to SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt this command uses a string variable to identify the connector type Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel PhyPt Port numbers of the analyzer If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs ALL then a change of a con nector type is valid for all ports The gender of the conn...

Page 969: ...rk 980 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt 980 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SECond 980 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS AUTO 980 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt FREQuency 981 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SECond FREQuency 981 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet 981 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SECond STATe 982 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt COMPensation STATe 982 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp...

Page 970: ...and error terms refer to Chapter 4 5 1 Calibra tion types on page 146 G and H matrices The 7 term calibration types named Txx e g TOM TRM TRL TNA are based on a network analyzer with two ports i and j each equipped with a test receiver and a refer ence receiver The system errors are described in terms of two error two ports PG and PH The error two port PG is assigned to port i of the analyzer Its ...

Page 971: ...G11 G22 G matrix elements at source port SourcePort see explanation above H11 H22 H matrix elements at load port LoadPort see explanation above Range The error terms are dimensionless complex num bers RST n a SourcePort Source port number LoadPort Load port number If the error term is not related to the load port a dummy number can be used e g CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 CorrectionData Correction data...

Page 972: ...G11 G22 and H11 H12 H22 for reading only the H21 matrix elements are normalized to 1 SENSe Ch CORRection CONNection ConnectorName Mode Gender RelPermittivity RefImpedance Configures the user defined connector types Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters ConnectorName Name of the user defined connectors string parameter Mode TEM WGUide Transverse electric or waveguide type propagation mode Gender GEND...

Page 973: ...e N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit 3653 85054D ZV Z121 ZCAN 50 Ohm ZV Z21 typical 85032B E 85032F 85054B New Kit 1 We assume that a cal kit New Kit 1 with label 2012 05 25 was created before CORRection CKIT LCATalog N 50 Ohm Query cal kits for N 50 Ω connector types with their labels Possible response N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit 3653 85054D ZV Z121 ZCAN 50 Ohm ZV Z21 typical 85032B E 85032F 85054B New Kit 1 2012 05 25 A...

Page 974: ...ber of the calibrated channel Sfk Number of the system error correction Must be omitted or set to 1 Query parameters SfkSettingType ACAL STARt STOP POINts SPOWer STYPe BANDwidth PDLY RATTenuation TYPE PORTs SPORt THRoughs TSTamp LTSTamp TVNA MVNA MTESt CKIT FSMode The requested setting If no SfkSettingType is specified the values for STARt STOP POINts SPOWer and STYPe are returned ACAL 1 for autom...

Page 975: ...arated list of directed port num ber pairs pno1 pno2 TSTamp Timestamp in UTC LTSTamp Timestamp in local time TVNA For calibrations involving switch matrices this indicates the test ports on the VNA itself Returns a comma separated list of port pairs TestPort VnaPort MVNA For calibrations involving switch matrices this indicates the mapping between matrix ports and VNA ports for matrix Index Return...

Page 976: ... page 1067 Example SENSe CORRection DATA PARameter Unrestricted query Result looks like this 100000 8500000000 201 10 LIN SENSe CORRection DATA PARameter STARt SENSe CORRection DATA PARameter STYPe Query settings one by one SENSe CORRection DATA PARameter RATTenuation Query receiver attenuations Result looks like this 1 0 000000 2 0 000000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Apply on page 405 SE...

Page 977: ...p frequency the number of points source power and the sweep type e g 300000 8000000000 201 0 LIN CORR SST Query the calibration status The analyzer returns CAL OFF because the performed one port calibration is not sufficient for the measured transmission S parameter S21 Usage Query only Manual operation See Apply on page 405 SENSe Ch CORRection DELete Cleans the channel s existing calibration data...

Page 978: ...ge 1 to 1E 6 RST 1 00062 Example See SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt ELENgth Manual operation See Permittivity Velocity Factor on page 460 SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt DISTance MechLength Defines the offset parameter for test port PhyPt as a mechanical length Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters MechLength Mechanical length Rang...

Page 979: ...2 CORR EDEL2 Query the value of the delay at port 2 The delay is equal to the electrical length divided by the speed of light in the vacuum so the response is 1 0006922856E 009 CORR LOSS2 2 LOSS2 FREQ 1 5 GHz OFFS 3 dB Define the offset loss parameters at port 2 Manual operation See Delay Electrical Length Mech Length on page 460 SENSe Ch CORRection EDELay PhyPt TIME Delay Defines the offset param...

Page 980: ... frequencies can be set using SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt FREQuency and SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt SECond FREQuency Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters LossAtFrequency Loss at reference frequency Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 001 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Loss at DC Loss at 1st Freq 1st Freq for Loss Use 2nd Freq Loss at 2nd Freq 2nd Fr...

Page 981: ...rence frequency Range Frequency range of the analyzer model Increment 1 MHz RST 1000000000 Hz 1 GHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Loss at DC Loss at 1st Freq 1st Freq for Loss Use 2nd Freq Loss at 2nd Freq 2nd Freq for Loss on page 451 SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet OffsetLoss Defines the frequency independent part DC value of the offset loss Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset co...

Page 982: ...51 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt COMPensation STATe Boolean Toggles length loss fixture compensation for physical port PhyPt ON OFF Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Physical port number Parameters Boolean ON 1 compensation active OFF 0 compensation inactive Manual operation See Active on page 450 SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt DFComp STATe Returns whether a direct fixture compensation has been ...

Page 983: ...rameters Boolean The parameter function depends on whether the command is used as a setting command or as a query For setting command ON no effect OFF resets all length offsets to zero and the reference fre quency to 1 GHz For query 1 at least one length offset parameter is different from its default value 0 all length offsets are zero set to default RST OFF Example RST CORR OFFS Reset the instrum...

Page 984: ...ion Suffix Ch Calibrated channel number PhyPt This suffix is ignored because the port number is specified in the parameter list Setting parameters Wave AWAVe BWAVe B1 B2 B3 B4 AWAVe calibration of reference waves a1 a2 In manual control the reference receiver calibration is included in the source power calibration of each port BWAVe calibration of received wave b1 b2 The port num ber CalPort the u...

Page 985: ...sweep range and query the measurement value The calibrated power of the refer ence wave a1 is approx equal to the default source power value See also example for SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt STATe Usage Setting only Manual operation See Port Overview on page 407 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt AWAVe STATe Boolean Enables or disables the receiver power calibration for channel Ch and for the ref...

Page 986: ...e wave b n CorrData Power correction values either in ASCII or block data format depending on the current FORMat DATA setting Example RST SWE POIN 10 Reset the instrument and reduce the number of sweep points to 10 CORR POW ACQ AWAVe 1 PORT 1 Perform a receiver power calibration of the wave a1 using port 1 as a source port assuming that the transmitted source power a1 is correct No external cablin...

Page 987: ...Quire Manual operation See Port Overview on page 436 SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa ErrorTerm SourceTestPort LoadTestPort SourceVNAPort LoadVNAPort CorrectionData SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa PORT PhyPt ErrorTerm SourceTestPort LoadTestPort SourceVNAPort LoadVNAPort CorrectionData Writes or reads system error correction data in the presence of switching matrices Same command structure and ...

Page 988: ...be selected before the command is executed see example Suffix Ch Channel number of the calibrated channel Example RST CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR STIM Query the stimulus frequencies The response contains 201 fre quency values CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the ...

Page 989: ...es for the different sweep types The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below for more details refer to the data sheet Table 7 15 Frequency ranges of R S ZND analyzers Frequency settings R S ZND with frequency range extension Start Stop 9 kHz to 4 5 GHz 8 5 GHz Center 9 kHz to 4 5 GHz 8 5 GHz Span 1 Hz to 4 499991 GHz 8 499991 GHz SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer 989 SENSe Ch...

Page 990: ...eq Defines the fixed Continuous Wave CW frequency for all sweep types operating at fixed frequency Power Time CW Mode The two command forms SENSe Ch FREQuency CW and SENSe Ch FREQuency FIXed are equivalent The frequency ranges are listed in Table 7 15 Note SENSe Ch FREQuency CW FIXed is equivalent to SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt CW FIXed Source and receiver frequency are always equal the four command...

Page 991: ...ana lyzer fMAX fMIN The range is listed in Table 7 15 Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Span Frequency span of the sweep Increment 0 1 kHz Default unit Hz Example See SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer Manual operation See Start Frequency Stop Frequency Center Frequency Span Frequency on page 358 Note The measurement range defined by means of the span and the current center frequency SENSe Ch FREQuency C...

Page 992: ...s the minimum frequency span SENSe Ch FREQuency SPAN If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency the start fre quency is set to the stop frequency minus the minimum frequency span 7 3 14 9 SENSe HARMonic Implements functions related to harmonic grids for time domain transformation SENSe Ch HARMonic 992 SENSe Ch HARMonic AUTO 992 SENSe Ch HARMonic Queries whether the c...

Page 993: ...o toggle between config ured and default reference impedances Note For a unidirectional R S ZND see Chapter 4 1 4 3 R S ZND unidirectional vs bidirectional operation on page 80 balanced ports are not supported and hence these commands are not available Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Logical port number The logical ports must be defined using SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt PhysicalPort1 PhysicalPort2 An n p...

Page 994: ... Logical port number Parameters arg0 ON 1 Use default impedance s OFF 0 Use the redefined impedances defined via SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence for single ended or via SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZCOMmon and SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDIFferent for balanced logical ports Manual operation See Use Default on page 243 7 3 14 11 SENSe ROSCillator The SENSe ROSCillator commands control the frequency reference sign...

Page 995: ...e 994 Manual operation See Internal External on page 565 7 3 14 12 SENSe SEGMent The SENSe SEGMent Seg commands define all channel settings for a seg mented frequency sweep A segmented sweep is activated via SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE SEGMent The commands in this subsystem do not accept the step parameters UP and DOWN Numeric values can be entered directly or using the DEFault MINimum MAXimum parameters ...

Page 996: ...tings Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential If n segments exist already the added segment must have the segment number n 1 Example SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM2 ADD Create a second sweep segment The frequency range of the second segment will be between 1 5 MHz an...

Page 997: ... use independent bandwidth settings to be defined via SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution OFF reset the bandwidth in all sweep segments to the band width for unsegmented sweeps defined via SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution ON will not restore the previous val ues The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a band width is entered using SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution RST OFF Example RST ...

Page 998: ...s mandatory no default values are provi ded All settings except LO can be changed for existing segments using other com mands of the SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg subsystem Note Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg ADD to create a segment with default channel settings Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert no query to insert a new segment into the current segment list Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Segment...

Page 999: ...me Unused Ignored parameter for compatibility with R S ZVR analyzers Should be set to the default value 0 MeasBandwidth IF bandwidth in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg BWIDth RESolution Default unit Hz LO POSitive NEGative AUTO Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency In remote control this parameter must be set when a sweep segment is created Must be set to ...

Page 1000: ...111 21DBM 0 01S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz and a measurement delay of 10 ms SEGM1 SWE TIME Query the sweep time in the new segment Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 376 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DELete ALL Deletes all sweep segments in the channel SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DELete DUMMy deletes a single segment Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep ...

Page 1001: ...hannel number Seg Sweep segment number Example SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM FREQ CENT SPAN Query the center frequency and span of the created segment The response is 1250000 500000 Usage Query only Manual operation See Table Columns on page 373 Note The frequency range of the sweep segment can be changed via ...

Page 1002: ...ific channel settings Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory no default values are provi ded All settings except LO can be changed for existing segments using other com mands of the SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg subsystem Note Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg ADD to create a segment with default channel settings Use SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg DEFine to change or query all settings of an existing segmen...

Page 1003: ...um sweep time possible Default unit s MeasDelay Delay for each partial measurement in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep DWELl In the setting SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg INSert SELect SWTime this parameter is replaced by SegmentTime Unused Ignored parameter for compatibility with R S ZVR analyzers Should be set to the default value 0 MeasBandwidth IF bandwidth in the segment See SENSe Ch SEGMent ...

Page 1004: ... Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters TimeRef SWTime DWELl SWTime use segment sweep time DWELl use measurement delay RST SWTime Example SEGM1 INS SEL DWEL Select the meas delay to determine the sweep time in a new sweep segment no 1 SEGM1 INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 01S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz and a meas delay of 10 ms SEGM1 SW...

Page 1005: ...SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel OFF reset the power in all sweep segments to the power for unsegmented sweeps defined via SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude ON will not restore the previous values The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment power is entered using SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg POWer LEVel RST OFF Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1...

Page 1006: ...is valid for all sweep seg ments in the current channel Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number Parameters MeasDelay Measurement delay before each partial measurement Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME Range 0 s to 2500 s RST 0 s Default unit s Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment ...

Page 1007: ...ate a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 0 s meas delay SEGM SWE DWELl 0 1 Increase the meas delay to 0 1 s SEGM SWE DWELl CONT OFF Couple the meas delay in all segments and reset the delay in segment no 1 to the initial value of 0 s Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 376 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep POINts SegPoint Defines the total number of measureme...

Page 1008: ...s Changing the duration leaves the number of points unchanged but directly affects the delay Range Minimum value to 1000 s RST Minimum value depending on the channel settings This default value corresponds to automatic sweep time setting in manual control Default unit s Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 SEGM SWE TIME 0 1 Increase the segment sweep time to 0 1 s SEGM ...

Page 1009: ...e the sweep times in all segments and reset the sweep time in segment no 1 to the initial value Manual operation See Optional Columns on page 376 SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME SUM Returns the total duration of the segmented sweep calculated as the sum of the sweep times of the individual segments SENSe Ch SEGMent Seg SWEep TIME Suffix Ch Channel number Seg Sweep segment number This suffix is ign...

Page 1010: ...on page 383 SENSe SWEep COUNt ALL Sweep Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF The setting is applied to all channels Use SENSe Ch SWEep COUNt to define the sweep count for a single channel Setting parameters Sweep Number of consecutive sweeps to be measured Range 1 to 100000 RST 1 Example See Chapter 8 2 4 Data handling on page 1164 Usage Setti...

Page 1011: ... see SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters MeasDelay Measurement delay before each partial measurement Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep SENSe Ch SWEep TIME Range 0 s to 13680 s RST 0 s Default unit s Example RST Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep with the S parameter S21 as a measurement re...

Page 1012: ... ments First Partial Meas ment on page 366 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts SweepPoint Defines the total number of measurement points per sweep Number of Points Values between 1 and 5 001 can be set Suffix Ch Channel number 1 Parameters SweepPoint Number of points per sweep Range see above RST 201 Example RST Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep with 201 sweep points SWE TIME Query total sweep t...

Page 1013: ...e quantity or a ratio is measured the drive port is independent of the mea sured quantity Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Port Logical port number RST 1 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 A1 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity a1 The trace automatically becomes the active trace SENS4 SWE SRCP 2 Select drive port 2 for the active ...

Page 1014: ... points minus one Default unit Hz Example RST SWE STEP Query the default step size Currently for all analyzers the default sweep span is the full frequency range and the default number of points is 201 Hence the response is max frequency min frequency 200 SWE STEP UP Increase the step size FREQ STOP SWE POIN Query the stop frequency of the sweep and the number of points Increasing the step size ha...

Page 1015: ...to 2 s SWE DWEL Query the meas delay for each partial measurement again The delay is increased by 1 s divided by the total number of partial measurements per sweep Manual operation See Stop Time on page 358 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO Boolean When enabled the minimum sweep time is calculated internally using the other chan nel settings and zero delay SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl Note The automatically calcul...

Page 1016: ...SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed but with variable generator power that is swept in linear equidistant steps over a continuous range SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a dB linear power axis CW Time sweep The measurement is performed at constant fre quency SOURce Ch FREQuency PhyPt FIXed and source power SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate ...

Page 1017: ...ding to the next sweep point NONE alternated driving mode on reverse the order of partial measurements and sweeps BLOCk block alternated driving mode RST NONE NumAltBlocks Defines the number of blocks for the Block Alternated driving mode RST 3 Example COUP NONE Activate the alternated driving mode TRIG LINK PPO Set the triggered measurement sequence equal to one partial measurement Each trigger e...

Page 1018: ...e commands affect the source settings of the R S ZND Port specific and general settings The SOURce subsystem comprises channel specific and general settings Chan nel specific settings are valid for the channel specified by the numeric suffix Ch SENSe Ch General settings are valid for all channels the channel suffix is ignored Refer to the description of the individual commands for more information...

Page 1019: ... CW frequency to 100 MHz Manual operation See CW Frequency on page 358 7 3 15 2 SOURce GROup The SOURce GROup commands define the group of un used logical ports SOURce Ch GROup Grp 1019 SOURce Ch GROup Grp CLEar 1020 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs 1020 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts 1020 SOURce Ch GROup Grp arg0 arg1 In set direction this command defines the set of active logical ports the master group as ...

Page 1020: ...umber is used the analyzer generates an error mes sage Example See SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt on page 1043 Usage Setting only SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs arg0 arg1 Defines the set of active logical ports the master group as an arbitrary selection of logical ports The ports do not have to be numbered consecutively as for port groups defined via SOURce Ch GROup Grp See SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt on how to defin...

Page 1021: ...2 Physical VNA port numbers 7 3 15 3 SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect The SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect commands allow you to set up a scalar source power calibration SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt NoReadings Sets a limit for the number of calibration sweeps in the source power calibration The command is valid for all channels and ports Equivalent command SOURce POWer CORRection NR...

Page 1022: ...mand is valid for all chan nels and ports It is not possible to disable flatness calibration and the reference receiver calibration simultaneously see SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect RRECeiver on page 1023 Parameters arg0 Boolean Disables OFF 0 or enables ON 1 the flatness calibration With disabled flatness calibration only one calibration sweep is per formed in order to calibrate the reference re...

Page 1023: ...RONly Reference receiver only The reference receiver will be used to perform a source flatness calibration Ideally the reference receiver was previously calibrated using a power meter Requires SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect RRECeiver OFF RST RRAFter Example See SOURce Ch POWer CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Flatness Cal Pwr Cal Method on page 429 SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect ...

Page 1024: ...3 15 4 SOURce POWer CORRection TCOefficient These commands allow you The Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog allows you to modify the results of a scalar power calibration to account for additional two port devices with known trans mission characteristics in the test setup SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Boolean Selects the position of the additional two port in ...

Page 1025: ... Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr MMEM LOAD CORR TCO C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna PowerMeterCorr Test pmcl Reload the stored power meter correction list file Example SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL1 Delete the first point in the list SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL ALL SOUR POW CORR TCO Clear the entire list Query whether the transmission coefficients are still used The response i...

Page 1026: ...efficient no ListNo Suffix ListNo List entry no only used for queries Parameters Frequency Stimulus frequency value If several points with identical fre quencies are added the analyzer automatically ensures a fre quency spacing of 1 Hz Range Stimulus values outside the frequency range of the analyzer are allowed RST n a Default unit Hz TransCoeff Transmission coefficient Range 300 dB to 200 dB RST...

Page 1027: ...sing SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration Example See SOURce POWer CORRection TCOefficient STATe on page 1029 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Frequency Transm Coefficients Insert Delete Delete All on page 433 SOURce POWer CORRection TCOefficient DELete ListNo DUMMy DeEmbedding Position Deletes entry ListNo from the transmission coefficient list Suffix Ch Calibrated cha...

Page 1028: ...des the points for the transmission coefficient list Parameters DeEmbedding Position BOTH DUT PM Determines the two port the command refers to DUT The two port between VNA and DUT during measurement PM The two port between VNA and PM during power calibration BOTH Both positions parameter omitted If the parameter is omitted the command refers to the two port selected using SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt COR...

Page 1029: ...ff Transmission coefficient Range 300 dB to 200 dB RST n a Default unit dB DeEmbedding Position BOTH DUT PM Determines the two port the command refers to DUT The two port between VNA and DUT during measurement PM The two port between VNA and PM during power calibration BOTH Both positions parameter omitted If the parameter is omitted the command refers to the two port selected using SOURce Ch POWe...

Page 1030: ...rmines the two port the command refers to DUT The two port between VNA and DUT during measurement PM The two port between VNA and PM during power calibration BOTH Both positions parameter omitted If the parameter is omitted the command refers to the two port selected using SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection TCOefficient CALibration SCPI command reference www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 1031: ...PowerMeterCorr Test pmcl DUT Re load the stored power meter correction list file SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL1 DUT Delete the first point in the list SOUR POW CORR TCO DEL ALL DUT SOUR POW CORR TCO DUT Clear the entire list Query whether the transmission coefficients are still taken into account The response is 0 MMEM LOAD CORR TCO C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Traces Test s2p S21 DUT Load a...

Page 1032: ...ed SourcePort Analyzer port number if PORT is the first parameter CalOnlyPortFreq Relevant for frequency conversion measurements only OFF 0 The reference receiver at port CalPort is calibrated for all fre quencies that are relevant for any of the ports ON 1 Only those frequencies are calibrated that are relevant for this port This results in shorter calibration times RST 0 Example SOUR POW CORR OS...

Page 1033: ...ection NREadings 2 SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage NTOLerance 0 5 Increase the number of readings and reduce the power toler ance to improve the accuracy SOURce POWer CORRection ACQuire PORT 1 Perform a source power calibration using port 1 as a source port SOURce POWer CORRection ACQuire VERification RESult Query the result of the verification sweep Possible response Ch1 1 9 9E 002 Usage ...

Page 1034: ...e analyzer returns 10 comma separated real numbers SOUR POW CORR DATA A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Replace the correction values by ten new numbers Manual operation See Apply on page 407 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv Gets settings of the available power calibrations Suffix Ch Number of the calibrated channel Wv Number of the power calibration Use SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection DATA PARa...

Page 1035: ...rations involving switch matrices this indicates the mapping between matrix physical test ports and test ports for matrix Index Returns a comma separated list of port pairs MatrixTestPort TestPort Index If one or more external switch matrices were used during cali bration this refers to the index of a particular switch matrix see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1067 Usage Qu...

Page 1036: ...umber Parameters Boolean ON other sources not necessarily switched off OFF other sources switched off during the calibration sweep RST ON Example See SOURce Ch POWer CORRection ACQuire Manual operation See Switch Off Other Sources on page 428 SOURce POWer CORRection PMETer ID PowerMeter Selects an external power meter for the scalar source power calibration flatness cali bration Note The command c...

Page 1037: ...n page 431 SOURce POWer CORRection PSELect CalPower Defines how to define the source power the R S ZND uses to perform the first calibra tion sweep of the source power calibration Reference Receiver Cal Power Parameters CalPower CPOWer PPOWer CPOWer Calculated port power result PPOWer Predefined port power value see SOURce POWer CORRection PPOWer RST CPOWer Example See SOURce Ch POWer CORRection A...

Page 1038: ...SOURce POWer REDuce SDELay 1041 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt REDuce STATe 1041 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STATe 1042 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt 1042 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP 1042 SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE 1043 SOURce POWer SWEepend SDELay 1043 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection LEVel OFFSet Offset Specifies a gain positive values or an attenuation negative values in the signal path between the source port a...

Page 1039: ...ernal signal source channel base power The setting is valid for all sweep types except power sweep Tip Use SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STARt and SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP to define the sweep range for a power sweep Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored because the selected channel base power applies to all source ports used in the active channel It is po...

Page 1040: ...CPADd ONLY only the port specific power is used the channel power is ignored CPADd the port specific power is added as an offset to the channel power RST CPADd Example RST SOUR POW 6 Reset the instrument activating a frequency sweep and set the internal source power channel power for the default channel 1 to 6 dBm SOUR POW1 OFFS 6 ONLY SOUR POW2 OFFS 6 CPAD Replace the source power at port 1 by 6 ...

Page 1041: ...s i e the time between power up and sweep start when a new sweep is requested This is a global setting Parameters SettlingDelay Settling delay Default unit s Example See SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE on page 1043 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt REDuce STATe ReduceAtSweepEnd Deprecated superseded by SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE Enables disables power reduction at sweep end This is a global setting Suffix Ch Chann...

Page 1042: ...tPower SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt STOP StopPower These commands define the start and stop powers for a power sweep The values also define the left and right edges of a Cartesian diagram A power sweep must be active SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE POWer to use these commands Suffix Ch Channel number PhyPt Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored because the selected power sweep range applies to all s...

Page 1043: ...ple SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE REDuce Reduce power at sweep end SOURce POWer SWEepend SDELay 0 01 Use a settling delay of 10 ms SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE AUTO At sweep end restore the power at sweep start Manual operation See Power Mode at Sweep End on page 550 SOURce POWer SWEepend SDELay SettlingDelay If sweep end mode REDuce or KEEP is active see SOURce POWer SWEepend MODE this defines the set...

Page 1044: ...re not available Suffix Ch Channel number LogPt Identifying number of the newly created balanced or single ended logical port Must be between 1 and the number of physical ports see INSTrument TPORt COUNt If unspecified the numeric suf fix is set to 1 Parameters PhysicalPort Number of first only physical port Range 1 to number of physical ports PhysicalPort Number of second physical port optional f...

Page 1045: ...ONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware CONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev CONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1046 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle 1046 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware ENABle 1046 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev ENABle 1046 STATus QUEStionable EVENt 1047 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt 1047 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware EVENt 104...

Page 1046: ...EStionable LIMit registers see STATus QUEStionable LIMit 1 2 on page 614 Example STAT QUES LIMit COND Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable LIMit1 reg ister to retrieve the current status of the limit check Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ENABle BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware ENABle BitPattern STATus QUEStionable LIMit ...

Page 1047: ...k whether an event has occurred since the last reading Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable NTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable INTegrity HARDware NTRansition BitPattern STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev NTRansition BitPattern Sets the negative transition filters of the QUEStionable status registers If a bit is set a 1 to 0 transition in the ...

Page 1048: ...etes the oldest entry in the error queue Operation is identical to that of SYSTem ERRor NEXT The entry consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard see section Chapter 9 Error messages and troubleshooting on page 1177 Example STAT QUE Query the oldest entry in the error queu...

Page 1049: ...ine 1060 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer DELete 1061 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr SPCorrection STATe 1061 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CATalog 1062 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure ABORt 1062 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END 1062 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt 1063 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure TVNA 1064 SYSTem C...

Page 1050: ...e cal unit Usage Setting only Manual operation See Apply Cancel on page 397 SYSTem COMMunicate AKAL MMEMory STATe Boolean Shows or hides the memory of the active calibration unit see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Setting parameters Boolean ON memory is shown in a separate drive OFF memory is not shown RST OFF Example SYST COMM AKAL MMEM ON Show the memory of the active calibration unit U...

Page 1051: ... on page 566 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF INIT WAIT Boolean Determines queries the execution behavior of INITiate IMMediate commands see Chapter 7 3 8 INITiate commands on page 863 If set to ON an automatic WAI is added see Chapter 7 2 Common commands on page 624 i e the commands execute synchronously Parameters Boolean RST OFF Manual operation See Advanced on page 567 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF...

Page 1052: ...An accidental LF in a data block can be recognized as a terminator and cause an interruption of the data transfer The EOI setting is especially important if commands are transferred in block data for mat because it ensures that the parser for command decoding is activated by the ter minator only after the command has been completely transferred Readout of binary data does not require a change of t...

Page 1053: ...nit named ZV Z52 1234 for calibration CORR COLL AUTO 1 2 4 Perform an automatic 3 port TOSM calibration at test ports 1 2 and 4 using the calibration unit s default calibration kit file and arbitrary test ports of the cal unit Manual operation See Cal Unit on page 391 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL Queries the names USB addresses of all connected calibration units Example See SYSTem C...

Page 1054: ...bration unit selected using SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess is an inline calibration unit ICU this command sets queries the characteri zation to be used for calibrations with this ICU Parameters Characterization Name of a characterization of the related ICU Example Select the ICS SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ZN Z30 02 100010 Query for the connected ICUs SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVic...

Page 1055: ...ions stored on the connected calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL SDATa My_calkit OPEN S11 1 Query the characterization data for the characterization named My_calkit and an open standard one port port restriction A characterization with the queried properties must be available on the cal unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL WARMup Query the warmup status of the calibration unit SYSTem ...

Page 1056: ... Name A possible response is Friday May 26 2011 10 13 40 An empty string is returned if no calibration unit is connected If several cal units are USB connected to the analyzer the command queries the cal unit selected via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Query parameters CalKitName String parameter containing the name of a cal unit characteriza tion calkit file Factory denotes the factory c...

Page 1057: ...d If several cal units are USB connected to the analyzer the command queries the cal unit selected via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess Query parameters CalKitName String parameter containing the name of a cal unit characteriza tion calkit file Factory denotes the factory characterization an empty string denotes the last referenced characterization the pre fix SD indicates that the characte...

Page 1058: ...ion can be queried via SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT STANdard CATalog The factory characterization usually does not contain data for a through standard therefore a query of the type SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL SDATa Factory THR S11 1 2 results in an error message SParameter S11 S12 S21 S22 S parameter of the standard use S11 for one port standards one of the four for 2 port standards Fi...

Page 1059: ...n See Auto Zero on page 260 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer CATalog Queries the numbers of all configured external power meters The response is a string containing a comma separated list of power meter numbers Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET1 DEF USB Power Meter 1 NRP Z55 usb 100045 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF USB Power Meter 2 NRP Z55 usb 100046 Configure two R S NRP power meters as external power met...

Page 1060: ... Power meters can be assigned several times so that the number of configured power meters is practically unlimited Parameters PmtrName Name of the external power meter string parameter An empty string means that no particular name is assigned to the power meter Driver Power meter type string parameter The power meter type is identical with the name of the power meter driver file pwm stored in the ...

Page 1061: ...MM RDEV PMET DEF Query the power meter configuration The analyzer returns an error message because the power meter no 1 is no longer con figured Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 571 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer DELete Clears the configuration table for external power meters Example See SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer Pmtr DEFine Usage Event Manual operation See Configured Dev...

Page 1062: ...ation must be performed within a transaction enclosed by the commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure STARt and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END The modified configuration will not be applied until the end of this transaction The new configuration is discarded i e the previous configuration remains active roll back The transaction wil be terminated Usage Event SYSTem C...

Page 1063: ...SMATrix CONFigure STARt and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END The modified configuration will not be applied until the end of this transaction An RF connection configuration comprises the RF connections between the VNA a set of switch matrices and the DUT test ports At transaction start the R S ZND creates an in memory copy of the active configura tion and strips off all RF conncect...

Page 1064: ...3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 Configure 6 matrix test ports matrix test port i is test port i 1 modulus 6 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END Apply the manual RF connection configuration Usage Event SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure TVNA TestPort1 VNAPort1 Sets gets the test port connections of the VNA in a switch matrix RF connection setup i e the direct assignments of test ports to p...

Page 1065: ...Municate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1067 VNA Port Number Range 1 of RF ports of the VNA Example A switch matrix ZV Z84 02 is used SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix1 CONFigure MLVNA 1A 1 2B 2 VNA ports 1 and 2 are connected to matrix VNA ports 1A and 2B respectively Manual operation See Edit Matrix VNA Port Connections on page 582 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr CONFigure MLTest M...

Page 1066: ...SMATrix CONFigure STARt and SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix CONFigure END The modified configuration will not be applied until the end of this transaction Suffix Matr Index of the switch matrix see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1067 Setting parameters MatrixTestPort Number of the switch matrix test port TestPort Number of the test port Test ports must be numbered subseq...

Page 1067: ...ces see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1067 Usage Query only Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 577 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix Matr DEFine Unused Driver Interface Address This command allows to configure i e register a new switching matrix to modify the management connection settings of an already configured switching matrix to get the management connec...

Page 1068: ...rface specific address string parameter Example SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix1 DEF ZN Z84 42 USB 101142 Register switch matrix no 1 type R S ZN Z84 2x24 with serial number 101142 at USB interface SYST COMM RDEV SMATrix2 DEF ZV Z81 05 LAN 10 10 10 10 Register switch matrix no 2 type R S ZV Z81 model 05 at IP address 10 10 10 10 Manual operation See Add Device on page 578 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice SMATrix...

Page 1069: ...e SMATrix Matr DEFine on page 1067 If the switch matrix is not part of the RF configuration the query returns an Invalid suffix error Usage Query only Manual operation See Configured Devices on page 577 7 3 17 2 SYSTem DATA MEMory These commands allow you to configure memory mapped trace data transfer See Chapter 4 4 3 Memory mapped trace data transfer on page 143 SYSTem DATA MEMory ADD TraceName ...

Page 1070: ... using one or more SYSTem DATA MEMory ADD The buffer is then available in Windows Before the next COMMit the size of the created buffer can be queried using SYSTem DATA MEMory SIZE To delete the buffer and free its memory use SYSTem DATA MEMory DELete ShMemName or SYSTem DATA MEMory RESet For background information see Chapter 4 4 3 Memory mapped trace data transfer on page 143 Setting parameters ...

Page 1071: ...eries the offset in bytes of the last added trace data block relative to the start of the shared memory buffer see SYSTem DATA MEMory ADD The offset is required by processes that want to read the trace data from the buffer For background information see Chapter 4 4 3 Memory mapped trace data transfer on page 143 Usage Query only SYSTem DATA MEMory RESet Deletes all shared memory buffers initialize...

Page 1072: ...em DISPlay XLABels 1076 SYSTem ERRor ALL 1077 SYSTem ERRor COUNt 1077 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor 1077 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO 1077 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay WARNings 1077 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote 1078 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe 1078 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 1078 SYSTem FIRMware UPDate 1079 SYSTem FPReset 1079 SYSTem FREQuency 1079 SYSTem HELP HEADers 1080 SYSTem HELP SYNTax 1080 SYSTem HELP SYNTax ALL 10...

Page 1073: ...rstCal LocationFirstCal SecondCal LocationSecondCal OutputCal LocationOutputCal Command for joining calibrations The query returns whether if the two calibrations FirstCal from LocationFirst Cal and SecondCal from LocationSecondCal are joinable The set command tries to join the two calibrations If successful it stores the resulting calibration as OutputCal in LocationOutput Cal Parameters FirstCal...

Page 1074: ... Raw mode in the IECWIN32 GUI before executing this com mand Setting parameters Dialogs MAIN CKIT MAIN open the Calibration Start Cal softtool tab CKIT open the Calibration Kits dialog Usage Setting only SYSTem DATE Year Month Day The command queries or defines the instrument s current date setting The setting command requires administrator rights refer to User accounts and pass word protection on...

Page 1075: ...atus bar SYSTem DISPlay BAR TITle OFF HKEY OFF MENU OFF Hide the title bar hardkey bar and menu bar Manual operation See Tool Bar on page 538 SYSTem DISPlay COLor ColorScheme Selects the color scheme for all diagram areas in the active recall set Parameters ColorScheme UDEFined DBACkground LBACkground BWLStyles BWSolid DBACkground dark background LBACkground light background BWLStyles black and wh...

Page 1076: ...itching off the display speeds up the measurement This command may have an impact on the update of trace and channel settings see SYSTem SETTings UPDate Parameters Activate ON OFF switch the display on or off If the display is switched on the analyzer shows the diagrams and traces like in manual control ONCE switch the display on and show the current trace This parameter can be used for occasional...

Page 1077: ...e current number of entries in the SCPI error queue Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor Boolean SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO Boolean SYSTem ERRor DISPlay WARNings Boolean Selectively disables or enables the display of information popups for the related event type Information System Error Warning Note that the display of information popups can be globally disabled enabled using SYSTem ERRor DI...

Page 1078: ...47 SYSTem ERRor DISPlay STATe Boolean Globally defines whether instrument events shall be indicated by information popups Display of popups can be limited to certain event types using commands SYSTem ERRor DISPlay INFO SYSTem ERRor DISPlay WARNings SYSTem ERRor DISPlay ERRor and SYSTem ERRor DISPlay REMote Parameters Boolean ON OFF globally enable or disable the display of information popups RST O...

Page 1079: ...pen recall sets or of the active recall set depending on the SYSTem PRESet SCOPe settings and deletes channel 1 in the active recall set As a result the active recall set contains no chan nels traces and diagram areas Example SYST PRES SCOP SING Define the scope of a preset the active recall set is reset only SYST FPR Reset the parameters of the current recall set and delete chan nel 1 Usage Event...

Page 1080: ...mmandDesc String containing the command you want to query Example SYST HELP SYNT SYST ERR Returns the full syntax In this case SYSTem ERRor NEXT Usage Query only SYSTem HELP SYNTax ALL Queries the implemented SCPI commands and their parameters Return values Commands Usage Query only SYSTem IDENtify FACTory Resets the response to the IDN query to the factory default value This command overwrites a ...

Page 1081: ... ON Lock the local keys SYSTem LANGuage Language Specifies the remote language for the analyzer Parameters Language Command syntax for the analyzer string variable SCPI R S ZND specific command set the analyzer supports all commands described in this documentation ZVR ZVABT compatibility with network analyzers of the R S ZVR and R S ZVA B T families PNA HP8510 HP8720 HP8753 HP8714 HP8530 ENA compa...

Page 1082: ...specifying the name and directory of the limit line file to be loaded The default extension manual control for limit line files is limit although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory which can be set queried with MMEMory CDIRectory If omitted the firmware applies default limit lines dBm above below the specified source Power Return values...

Page 1083: ...N OPT on page 567 SYSTem PASSword CENable Password Sends a password to the analyzer enabling a class of service functions to function Command ENable Service functions are activated with the commands of the DIAGnostic system and should be used by a R S service representative only Setting parameters Password Case sensitive string variable Sending an invalid password gen erates error 221 settings con...

Page 1084: ...PRESet DUMMy command The RST com mand always resets all open recall sets Parameters Scope ALL SINGle ALL All open recall sets are deleted and a new recall set Set1 is cre ated according to the current preset mode See SYSTem PRESet USER STATe on page 1085 SINGle The active setup is reset according to the current preset mode the name of the active setup and the parameters of all other set ups remain...

Page 1085: ...l Adds the active user calibration to the memory pool SYSTem PRESet USER CAL Refl1 Trans123 Sets the newly created cal pool member as the preset user cal SYSTem PRESet USER CAL Queries for the preset user cal Returns Refl1 Trans123 SYSTem PRESet USER CAL Restores the default behaviour of the instrument no preset user cal Manual operation See Preset User Cal on page 438 SYSTem PRESet USER NAME Reca...

Page 1086: ...the analyzer operates in single sweep mode INITiate Ch CONTinuous OFF and if the display update is switched off SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF In this scenario a change of the channel or trace settings is usually not taken into account immediately The analyzer waits until the end of the current sweep sequence and changes all settings made during the last sweep period when the next single sweep sequence...

Page 1087: ...nit is omitted Windows is shutdown afer a time out period of 10 seconds Setting parameters Unit HALT REBoot ABORt CLOSe RESTart HALT Windows is shutdown afer a time out period of 20 seconds REBoot Windows is restarted afer a time out period of 20 seconds ABORt Abort a Windows shutdown restart This can only be used during the time out period CLOSe Close the firmware RESTart Restart the firmware Exa...

Page 1088: ...N 1 Previous trace data are deleted This is a global setting that is not affected by an instrument reset Factory default is OFF 0 Manual operation See Restart Set all Traces to 0 on page 545 SYSTem TSLock Type Locks the touchscreen functionality of the R S ZND e g in order to prevent inadver tent entries during remote control Parameters Type OFF DIAGrams SCReen OFF touchscreen e g the remote scree...

Page 1089: ...t TTLout Pt STATe set to ON 1 RST Not affected by RST factory default is OFF Manual operation See TTL Pass Default Values on page 549 SYSTem USER DISPlay TITLe String Defines a title for the remote display i e for the screen that is shown at the instrument if a remote session is established and the standard display is switched off Parameters String Title string A n in the string starts a new line ...

Page 1090: ... bit no 6 User Request is set SYST USER KEY 0 Delete the user key and restore the default keys SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number to which the analyzer complies The analyzer com plies to the final SCPI version 1999 0 Example SYST VERS Query the SCPI version The response is 1999 0 Usage Query only 7 3 18 TRACe commands The TRACe commands handle active trace data and trace data stored in...

Page 1091: ...IMulus ALL TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession DEFine TRACe COPY MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a data trace to a memory trace The trace to be copied can be specified by two alternative methods As the active data trace of channels 1 to 4 CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA If a mathematical trace is active the associated data trace is copied As a trace with a name string variable ...

Page 1092: ...Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Data to Destination on page 283 TRACe COPY MATH MemTraceName DataTraceName Copies a mathematical trace to a memory trace The trace to be copi...

Page 1093: ...LC MATH SDEF Trc1 2 CALC MATH STAT ON Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by 2 Acti vate the mathematical mode and display the mathematical trace instead of the data trace TRAC COPY MATH Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA CALC MATH STAT OFF Copy the current state of the mathematical trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed Switch the display back to the data trace DIS...

Page 1094: ...operation See Delay on page 380 TRIGger Ch SEQuence LINK MeasSequence Selects the triggered measurement sequence The identifier for the sequence is a string variable Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters MeasSequence Triggered measurement sequence string variable SWEep trigger event starts an entire sweep SEGMent trigger event starts a sweep segment if segmented frequency sweep is active see example...

Page 1095: ... Ch SEQuence LINK DelayTime Delay time Range 0 s to 13680 s Increment 10 ms RST 0 s Default unit s Example See TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SOURce Manual operation See Source on page 381 TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SLOPe Num MeasSequence Slope Qualifies whether the multiple trigger events occur on the rising or on the falling edge or on the beginning of the high low level periods of the external ...

Page 1096: ...r event at EXT TRIG IN or Pin 2 of USER PORT EXT2 Trigger event at pin 25 of USER PORT E1A2 Trigger events at EXT1 AND EXT2 E1O2 Trigger event at EXT1 OR EXT2 MANual Trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trigger soft key Example TRIG MULT SOUR SWE EXT1 SOUR POIN EXT2 Select external trigger 1 as a trigger source for the entire sweep external trigger 2 as a trigger source for each point TR...

Page 1097: ...e IMMediate EXTernal MANual MULTiple IMMediate Free run measurement untriggered EXTernal Trigger by external signal applied to the EXT TRIG IN connector or pin 2 of the USER PORT on the rear panel MANual Trigger event generated by pressing the Manual Trigger soft key MULTiple Multiple trigger mode configured by TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple commands Example TRIG SOUR MAN Activate manual trigger mod...

Page 1098: ...t trigger pulses at EXT TRIG OUT The trigger duration must be shorter than the selected sweep interval see TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary INTerval If the trigger duration is too long you can modify one of the following settings Reduce the trigger duration if possible Slow down the sweep select a smaller bandwidth or increase the Sweep Time setting Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters TrigOutDuration ...

Page 1099: ...sitive polarity for the output trigger pulses TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary INTerval Type Specifies whether the trigger output pulses are sent once every partial measurement POINt or once every sweep Suffix Ch Channel number Parameters Type POINt SWEep RST SWEep Example See TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary ENABle TRIGger CHANnel Ch AUXiliary OPOLarity Type Selects the polarity of the output trigger pul...

Page 1100: ...elated to the Rohde Schwarz Health and usage monitoring service HUMS which is available on various Rohde Schwarz instruments For background information see the R S HUMS User Manual SNMP REST commands 1100 System information commands 1104 Device tags commands 1114 Utilization commands 1115 Service date commands 1118 7 4 1 SNMP REST commands These commands configure the SNMP and REST interfaces to R...

Page 1101: ...nicate SNMP COMMunity RW CommunityString This command sets the SNMP community string for read write access Prerequisites for this command Select an SNMP version that supports communities SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion on page 1103 Setting parameters CommunityString String containing the community name Example Set read write access SYST COMM SNMP VERS V12 SYST COMM SNMP COMM RW ABC Usage Setting o...

Page 1102: ...ers Name String containing name of the user Access RO RW Defines the access right a user can have Level NOAuth AUTH PRIVacy Defines the security level Auth_pwd String containing the authentication password Priv_pwd String containing the privacy password Example Create user profile SYST COMM SNMP VERS V123 SYST COMM SNMP USM USER Peter RO PRIV 1234 XYZ Usage Setting only Manual operation See SNMPv3...

Page 1103: ...ge 553 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete ALL This command deletes all SNMP user profiles Example Delete all SNMP user profiles SYST COMM SNMP USM USER DEL ALL Usage Event Manual operation See SNMPv3 Configuration on page 553 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion SnmpVersion This command selects the SNMP version Parameters for setting and query SnmpVersion OFF V12 V123 V3 DEFault OFF SNMP communica...

Page 1104: ...ostic HUMS SAVE 1108 DIAGnostic HUMS SECurity 1108 DIAGnostic HUMS SERVice 1109 DIAGnostic HUMS STATe 1109 DIAGnostic HUMS STORage 1110 DIAGnostic HUMS SW 1111 DIAGnostic HUMS SYSTem INFO 1112 DIAGnostic HUMS SYSTem STATus 1112 DIAGnostic HUMS SYSTem STATus SUMMary 1113 DIAGnostic HUMS ALL This command returns the REST endpoints for the HUMS application in a single query This allows you to read al...

Page 1105: ...eturn values BIOSInfo block_data BIOS information of the connected instrument as block data in a comma separated list manufacturer serialNumber version releaseDate caption isPresent Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number...

Page 1106: ...e following parameters eventID eventTimestamp eventMessage eventDetails eventSeverity Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Binary data in ASCII format Example Ret...

Page 1107: ...ata with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Binary data in ASCII format Example Return device footprint DIAG HUMS EQU Usage Query only DIAGnostic HUMS FORMat DataFormat This command d...

Page 1108: ...S FORMat on page 1107 Return values SecurityInfo block_data Security information of the connected instrument as block data in a comma separated list blockdata antimalware name enabled upToDate timestamp firewallEnabled Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Len...

Page 1109: ...its Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Binary data in ASCII format Example Return service information DIAG HUMS SERV Returns for example 3196 last 2021 01 19T23 00 00Z required 2 calibration last 2021 01 19T23 0...

Page 1110: ...ice2 Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Binary data in ASCII format For each storage device it returns diskname temperature type modelfamily model serialnumber ...

Page 1111: ...eshold 0 type Old_age updated Always whenFailed null rawValue 16856 Usage Query only DIAGnostic HUMS SW This command returns the installed software information of the instrument Depending on the set data format the queried data is either displayed in XML or JSON format For more information about setting the data format see DIAGnostic HUMS FORMat on page 1107 Return values SoftwareInfo block_data F...

Page 1112: ...he binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Binary data in ASCII format Example Return system information DIAG HUMS SYST INFO Usage Query only DIAGnostic HUMS SYSTem STATus This command returns the complete system status information of the instrument Depending o...

Page 1113: ...erity Example Return system status information DIAG HUMS SYST STAT 41874 globalStatus 3 values id 31522816 description RF Overload descriptionExtended null value null unit null upperLimit null lowerLimit null reference null severity 1 Usage Query only DIAGnostic HUMS SYSTem STATus SUMMary This command returns the status summery of the complete system Return values StatusSummary OK The system is OK...

Page 1114: ... TAGS ALL 1 location building_11 2 time zone CET Usage Query only Manual operation See Add Delete Trash Delete All on page 554 DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS VALue ID Key Value DIAGnostic HUMS TAGS VALue ID This command adds or modifies a key value pair device tag The query returns the key value pair for a given ID or an empty string if the ID is unknown Parameters Key String containing key name of the quer...

Page 1115: ...eration See Add Delete Trash Delete All on page 554 7 4 4 Utilization commands Using these commands you can retrieve the utilization information provided by the R S HUMS They all require software option R S ZND 980 DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization 1115 DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization ACTivity TRACking STATe 1116 DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization HISTory 1117 DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization HISTory DELete ALL 1117 DI...

Page 1116: ...CE_SPECIFIC reference null name Self alignments unit counter description Report number of self alignments value 0 startupValue 0 activityTracking true Usage Query only DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization ACTivity TRACking STATe ID State DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization ACTivity TRACking STATe ID This command sets the activity tracking of utilizations Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Tracking activity on OFF 0 ...

Page 1117: ...ata timestamps timestamp1 timestamp2 activity activity1 activity2 Pair of values timestamp1 activity1 timestamp2 activity2 Binary block data with the following syntax Digits Length Binarydata Indicates the start of the binary block Digits Decimal value Gives the number of decimal digits used for the Length value Length Decimal value Number of bytes the follow in the Binary data part Binary data Bi...

Page 1118: ...on DATE CalibrationDate This command sets last date and time the instrument was calibrated in ISO 8601 for mat Parameters CalibrationDate String containing calibration date of the instrument Example Set calibration date DIAG SERV CAL DATE 2019 05 05T00 00 00Z Manual operation See Last Calibration on page 559 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DUE DATE DueDate This command sets next date and time the i...

Page 1119: ...z service Parameters Duration String indicating the calibration interval ISO 8601 duration Example DIAG SERV CAL INT returns P1Y if the recommended calibration interval is 1 year Usage Query only Manual operation See Recommended Calibration Interval on page 558 DIAGnostic SERVice DATE ServiceDate This command sets the last date and time the instrument was serviced ISO 8601 for mat Parameters Servi...

Page 1120: ...ate Ch PARameter DEFine 1123 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth 1125 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DELTa STATe 1125 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion TARGet 1125 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect 1126 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MAXimum 1126 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk MINimum 1126 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch LEFT 1127 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch NEXT 1127 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch...

Page 1121: ... unit must be compatible with the sweep type SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE otherwise the limit line can not be displayed and no limit check is possible The parameters form three groups FLIN FLOG FSEG and FSINgle select frequency units for the limit line TLIN and TLOG select time units PLIN PLOG and PSINgle select power units RST FLIN Default unit Hz for FLIN FLOG FSEG FSINGle s for TLIN TLOG dBm for PLIN PL...

Page 1122: ...n LIMit RDOMain COMPlex and CALCulate Chn LIMit RDOMain SPACing Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Setting parameters UnitRef COMPlex MAGNitude PHASe REAL IMAGinary SWR GDELay L C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values The parameters form four groups COMPlex REAL IMAGinary and SWR select dimensionless numbers U for the limit line MAG Nitude selects relative u...

Page 1123: ...er used to identify the active trace Parameters Boolean ON OFF switch limit check on or off RST OFF Example CALC LIM LOW 10 0 0 10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition CALC LIM UPP 0 5 5 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments CALC LIM LOW STAT ON CALC LIM UPP STAT ON ...

Page 1124: ...2R3 R2R4 R3R1 R3R2 R3R4 R4R1 R4R2 R4R3 Measurement parameter see list of parameters below TestPortNum Test port number drive port for wave quantities and ratios ignored for S parameters Example CALC4 PAR DEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND STAT ON Create diagram area no 1 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generate...

Page 1125: ...the active trace Mk This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4 Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 dB to 100 dB Increment 0 03 dB RST 3 dB Default unit dB Example See CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion DELTa STATe Boolean Switches the delta mode for marker Mk on trace no Chn on or off Note T...

Page 1126: ...elect a search mode and at the same time initiate the search The CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk SEARch CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk MAXimum or CALCulate Ch MARKer Mk MINimum functions also select the search mode Suffix Chn Channel number used to identify the active trace Mk Marker number For a bandfilter search BFILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the band filter search fun...

Page 1127: ...Usage Event CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk SEARch IMMediate Initiates a search according to the search function selected with CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect The marker must be created before using CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk STATe ON Note Together with CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion SELect this command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion EXECute Suffix Chn Channel ...

Page 1128: ...A2 Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by the stored memory trace The mathematical trace is not displayed CALC MATH STAT ON Display the mathematical trace instead of the active data trace DIAGnostic SERVice FUNCtion SFId1 SFId2 Activates a service function mainly for internal use Service functions are identified by groups of numbers separated by dots Parameters SFId1 SFId2 Service ...

Page 1129: ... select a channel number 4 use the generalized command INSTrument NSELect Parameters Channel CHANnel1 CHANnel2 CHANnel3 CHANnel4 Number of the channel to be activated The channel must be created before using CONFigure CHANnel Ch STATe ON RST CHANNEL1 Example CONF CHAN2 STAT ON INST CHANnel2 Create channel no 2 and select it as the active channel OUTPut Chn DPORt Port Selects a source port for the ...

Page 1130: ...ied cal kit does not exist it is created with the specified calibration standard Suffix Ch Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent Parameters ConnType Connector type one of the following identifiers N50 N75 N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7 PC35 PC292 PC 7 PC 3 5 or 2 92 mm connectors USER no User defined connectors UserConn1 UserConn2 SMA User defined ...

Page 1131: ... cal kit file with the extension ck VNA cal kit files calkit can be imported using the MMEMory LOAD CKIT command Keysight cal kit files can be imported manually and converted into calkit files Example CORR CKIT INST C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibration Kits ZCAN ck Load the previously created R S ZVR cal kit file ZCAN ck from the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CKIT ZCAN C Us...

Page 1132: ... number denotes the port 1 or 2 the second number denotes the number of the standard 1 to 3 RST ON Dispersion Optional status parameter for UTHRough standard OFF unknown through standard is non dispersive ON unknown through standard is dispersive RST OFF Delay Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard numeric entry of the delay time in ps for non dispersive standards or of an est...

Page 1133: ...up which does not introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire is taken into account Tip The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own external correction data You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on an o...

Page 1134: ...age Event SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DUMMy Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired one or two port mea surement results SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect ACQuire stores them and applies them to the calibrated channel Ch To avoid incompatibilities older sys tem error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool MMEMory STORe CORRection This command...

Page 1135: ...LLect SAVE DEFault G and H matrices The 7 term calibration types named Txx e g TOM TSM TRM TRL TNA are based on a network analyzer with two ports i and j each equipped with a test receiver and a reference receiver The system errors are described in terms of two error two ports PG and PH The error two port PG is assigned to port i of the analyzer Its transmission matrix G describes how the system e...

Page 1136: ...tch at port 1 SCORR12 reverse transmission tracking between port 2 and port 1 G11 G22 G matrix elements see above H22 H matrix elements see above The error terms are dimensionless complex numbers RST n a Parameter Example See SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms Calibration type Parameter in SENSe Ch CORRec tion ...

Page 1137: ...t of loss offset parameters SENSe Ch CORRection OFFSet PhyPt MAGNitude is equivalent to SENSe Ch CORRection LOSS PhyPt OFFSet Suffix Ch Channel number of the offset corrected channel PhyPt Port number of the analyzer Parameters OffsetLoss Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range 200 dB to 200 dB Increment 0 0001 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB SENSe Ch FREQuency MODE FreqSweep Selects the s...

Page 1138: ...egment number This suffix is ignored the command is instrument specific Parameters Boolean ON OFF No effect RST ON If used as a query the command returns the information that overlapping sweep segments are supported ON SENSe Ch SWEep SPACing StimulusFreq Defines the frequency vs time characteristics of a frequency sweep Lin Frequency or Log Frequency The command has no effect on segmented frequenc...

Page 1139: ...e string parameter defining the sweep type and the param eter to be measured string sweep_type parameter Range See list of strings below RST XFR POW S21 arg1 B1 B2 A1 A2 ABSa1 ABSa2 DCIN1 DCIN2 arg2 B1 B2 A1 A2 ABSa1 ABSa2 DCIN1 DCIN2 Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 The trace automatically becomes the activ...

Page 1140: ... Lev Stability factor K Stability factors μ1 or μ2 VOLTage DC DCIN1 DCIN2 Output DC 1 V DC 10 V DC Input 1 or 2 Note The mnemonics POWer and VOLTage are not used in output strings SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire Sensor Initiates a source power calibration for the source port PhyPt using an external power meter no 1 or 2 To initiate a source power calibration for arbitrary power me...

Page 1141: ...1 to 8 Example SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC COPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 Usa...

Page 1142: ...onse values of the created trace according to the previous format settings Usage Query only TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL Stimulus Returns the stimulus values of the active data trace or memory trace see Table 7 16 Note To read the stimulus values of an arbitrary data or memory trace use CALCulate Chn DATA STIMulus Query parameters Stimulus CH1Data CH2Data CH3Data CH4Data CH1Mem CH2Mem CH3Mem CH4Mem MDA...

Page 1143: ...ming tasks that almost every user will encounter when working with the R S ZND 8 1 1 Typical stages of a remote control program A typical remote control program comprises the following stages 1 Performing the basic instrument settings 2 Adjusting the test setup 3 Initiating the measurement command synchronization 4 Retrieving measurement results Very often steps 3 and 4 or steps 2 to 4 must be rep...

Page 1144: ...rement after one sweep reduce the number of sweep points RST INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF SENSe1 SWEep POINts 2 Avoid a delay time between different partial measurements and before the start of the sweeps is default setting SENSe1 SWEep TIME AUTO ON TRIGger1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate Select the widest bandwidth compatible with your measurement SENSe1 BANDwidth RESolution 10 Adjust your sweep points to...

Page 1145: ...te1 IMMediate WAI Continue program sequence 2 Start single sweep use OPC If OPC follows INITiate Ch IMMediate it places a 1 into the output queue when the sweep is terminated An appropriate condition in the remote control program must cause the controller to wait until OPC returns one The controller is stopped from the moment when the condition is set Start single sweep in channel no 1 indicate th...

Page 1146: ...Lines 2 Read complete trace Select a trace format and read formatted trace data CALCulate1 FORMat MLINear Calculate the linear magnitude of z CALCulate1 DATA FDATa Read the formatted trace data Use CALCulate Chn DATA NSWeep FIRSt to retrieve a particular trace within a group of sweeps 8 1 2 Channel trace and diagram handling The following examples show you how to perform basic tasks related to cha...

Page 1147: ...ces one diagram Reset the instrument creating the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create a second trace in channel 1 assign the format Phase and display the new trace in the same diagram the trace becomes the active trace but is not displayed CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S21 the trace is...

Page 1148: ...NDow3 TRACe3 FEED Trc3 DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe4 FEED Trc4 Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 8 1 2 2 Several traces with different channel settings Programming task Create three channels with 3 1 and 2 traces respectively and display the traces in two diagrams Important remote control features for this program example The following command sequence illustrate...

Page 1149: ...te3 PARameter SDEFine Z_trace Z21 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Y_trace Y21 CALCulate3 PARameter SELect Z_trace the trace created previously becomes the active trace for channel 3 So far only the default trace is displayed Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE 2 Create second diagram and display traces DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Admitt...

Page 1150: ...er settings and for the limit check 2 Diagrams are referenced by a window suffix Wnd An additional suffix WndTr in the DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr commands numbers the dif ferent traces in a diagram 3 The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control 1 Create one channel two traces one diagram Reset the instrument creating the default trace Tr...

Page 1151: ...erence X 4 5 GHz Use the delta marker to search for the minimum of the trace and query the result the query returns the stimulus and the response value at the marker position CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute MIN RES Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Use the CALCulate Chn DATA commands to retrieve the complete trace see Retrieving Measurement Results 3 L...

Page 1152: ...or is not in this section we suggest you to refer to the short command sequences in the reference chapter Proceed as follows 1 Find your subject in the help system preferably using context sensitivity of the help system on your network analyzer or the index 2 Activate the link to the command description 3 A short example appears at the end of each command description The command SYSTem DISPlay UPD...

Page 1153: ...ORe TRACe Trc1 Traces S21 s1p You may also read the default path MMEMory CDIRectory and use the external RC program to build the complete paths 8 2 2 Trace and diagram handling The following sections provide examples for efficient channel and trace definition and convenient diagram handling 8 2 2 1 Assigning channels traces and diagrams The following example is a short version of Chapter 8 1 2 Cha...

Page 1154: ...ULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S21 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc3 S31 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Delete trace CALCULATE1 PARAMETER DELETE Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Assign a trace to a window diagram diagram 1 always exists DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE2 FEED TrcDisp Create diagram 2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE6 FEED Ch4Trc2 DISPLAY...

Page 1155: ... Char DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE3 FEED Mem3x Trc1 TRACE COPY MDATA4 CH1DATA DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Trc1 Create new normal trace on channel 1 assign it to a window CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S22 DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE5 FEED Trc2 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 now active for channel 1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG Create memory trace for Trc2 The memory trace ...

Page 1156: ...CT Trace_Name CALCULATE3 PARAMETER SELECT TRACE COPY XYZ Ch2Trc1 DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE3 FEED XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT XYZ CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT TRACE COPY MDATA4 Ch3Trc1 mixed parameters Char String DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE4 FEED Mem4 Ch3Trc1 Copy to existing memory traces update trace data TRACE COPY MDATA6 CH1DATA TRACE COPY XYZ Ch2Trc1 CALCULATE1 PARAMETER CATALOG CALCULATE2 PARAMETER...

Page 1157: ...for TRC3 TRACE COPY MDATA7 CH1DATA DISPLAY WINDOW1 TRACE3 FEED Mem7 Trc1 TRACE COPY MDATA8 CH2DATA DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE2 FEED Mem8 Trc3 Examples for Trace Mathematics Special operands Data and Mem CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Data Mem CALCULATE1 MATH STATE ON Constants CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE Pi e j Functions CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE linMag 1 dBMag 2 Arg 3 Re 4 Im 5j CALCULATE1 MATH SDEFINE log 2 ln 3 ...

Page 1158: ...etrieve statistical results Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Create new channel and trace CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S11 CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE1 FEED Trc2 SENSE1 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON SENSE2 SWEEP TIME AUTO ON Search full span evaluation range display statistical results CALCulate1 STATistics DOMain USER 0 CALCulate2 STATi...

Page 1159: ...RKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPASs CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPAS Measure single sweep wait until complete sweep is finished INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate WAI CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion EXECute BFILter All markers OFF CALCulate1 MARKer AOFF Bandpass search ref to marker CALCulate1 MARKer1 STATe ON CALCulate1 MARKer1 X 3 0 GHz CALCulate1 MARKer FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPRMarker CALCulate1...

Page 1160: ... to position several dia grams on the screen The remote control commands presented here extend the func tionality of the Display Diagram and Display Split softtool tabs Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Define and display a simple horizontal layout two diagrams side by side DISPlay LAYout DEFine 1 Horizontal 1 00 0 30 0 70 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Define and display a simple vertical l...

Page 1161: ...splay the nested layout DISPlay LAYout JOIN 1 2 2 DISPlay LAYout APPLy 1 Check the last applied i e the joined layout for the correct format DISPlay LAYout EXECute 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 2 1 00 1 00 0 30 1 00 1 1 0 70 1 00 2 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 0 50 1 00 0 50 Set the layout format directly horizontal joined layout DISPlay LAYout EXECute 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 2 1 00 1 00 0 30 1 00 1 1 0 70 1 00 2 1 1 00 1 00 1 00 ...

Page 1162: ...nel no as a numeric suffix The parameter belongs to a trace the assignment channel trace is done via a active trace for each channel CALCULATE1 PARAMETER SELECT Trc1 Marker ON OFF CALCULATE1 MARKER1 ON CALCULATE1 MARKER1 STATE Coupled Markers All markers belonging to channels with the same sweep type FREQUENCY TIME POWER CW FREQUENCY are coupled decoupled CALCULATE1 MARKER COUPLED ON Marker Contin...

Page 1163: ...1 ON SENSE1 FREQUENCY START 1GHZ SENSE1 FREQUENCY STOP 2GHZ Do the marker search in the format DB Magnitude CALCULATE1 FORMAT MLOGARITHMIC Define marker search ranges stimulus range of the marker search Range 0 is always the stimulus range of the trace can t be changed CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION DOMAIN USER 0 CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion DOMain USER START CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion DOMain USER ST...

Page 1164: ... 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH NEXT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH RIGHT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X PEAK LEFT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X 1 5GHZ CALCULATE1 MARKER SEARCH LEFT CALCULATE1 MARKER1 X Maximum peak search functions CALCULATE1 MARKER1 FUNCTION SELECT MAXIMUM Proceed as for minimum search 8 2 4 Data handling The following sections provide example...

Page 1165: ...FEED Trc3 Select sweep time for the channels SENSE1 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE2 SWEEP TIME 1 S SENSE3 SWEEP TIME 1 S Enable single sweep mode for all channels so that channel specific sweep count settings are used INITIATE CONTINUOUS ALL OFF Select single swep mode with channel specific sweep count settings Set sweep counts and start measurement in all channels SENSE1 SWEEP COUNT 1 SENSE2 SWEEP COUNT 2 ...

Page 1166: ... WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Loop over these 2 commands INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 INITIATE IMMEDIATE WAI TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trc1 Continuous sweep mode INITIATE CONTINUOUS ON 8 2 4 3 Retrieving the results of previous sweeps The commands CALCulate Ch DATA NSWeep SDATa Trace_Hist_Count retrieve the results of any sweep within a previously defined single sweep g...

Page 1167: ... for channels no 1 and 2 INITIATE CONTinuous ALL OFF INITIATE IMMEDIATE ALL WAI Read trace data without history i e the last trace acquired in each channel CALCULATE1 DATA SDATA CALCULATE2 DATA SDATA Read last and previous trace data in channels 1 and 2 CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1 last trace data CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 3 previous trace data CALCULATE2 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1 last trace data C...

Page 1168: ...Mory STORe TRACe PORTs 1 ParserTouchstonePorts s4p COMPlex 1 4 3 2 8 2 5 Calibration The following programming examples are related to system error correction and power calibration 8 2 5 1 One and two port calibration The following example calibrates one or two analyzer ports Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Set cal kit as active kit for N50 SENSE CORRECTION CKIT N50 SELECT ZV Z121 ...

Page 1169: ...CQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 2 Apply calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Save load cal files Save calibration in calibration file pool C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Vna Calibratio...

Page 1170: ...nment1 DEFine create the second calibration full one port and factory calkit SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure FOPort the second cal addresses test port 1 and explicitly assigns it to cal unit port 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment2 DEFine 1 1 get the number of port assignments of the current calibration expected result 1 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT AUTO ASSignment COUNt get the num...

Page 1171: ...THROUGH 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 2 Apply calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Save error terms FORMAT RE...

Page 1172: ...ENSe1 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine XYZ TOSM 1 2 Generate a set of default correction data switch on user calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault SENSE1 CORRECTION STATE ON In the previous section the following error terms were saved SCORR1 Forward Directivity SCORR2 Forward Source Match SCORR3 Forward Reflection Tracking SCORR4 Forward Isolation SCORR5 Forward Load Match SC...

Page 1173: ...A SCORR3 scorr3 dat We are omitting the isolation term as it is not implemented on the ZVAB CALCulate1 DATA SCORR4 scorr4 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR5 scorr5 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR6 scorr6 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR7 scorr7 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR8 scorr8 dat CALCulate1 DATA SCORR9 scorr9 dat We are omitting the isolation term as it is not implemented on the ZVAB CALCulate1 DATA SCORR10 scorr10 ...

Page 1174: ... CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 OFF SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 OFF continue with Calkit 1 e g N 50 Ohm ideal Kit adapter side port 2 SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 ON SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT ACQuire SELected MATCh 2 ON non adapter sid...

Page 1175: ... AUTO ASSignment1 ACQUire Step 2 Unknown Through SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO UTHRough 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO SAVE Repeat OSM only SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO CONFigure FNPort SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment DELete ALL SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO ASSignment1 DEFine 1 1 2 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO REPeat we will not repeat step 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect AUTO A...

Page 1176: ...ALCulate FMODel ISD1 DUT STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD2 DUT STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD3 DUT STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD4 DUT STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD1 DUT MEASure CALCulate FMODel ISD1 RUN STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD2 RUN STATe 1 CALCulate FMODel ISD3 RUN STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD4 RUN STATe 0 CALCulate FMODel ISD RUN RUN Measure the DUT together with the test fixture Run the ISD tool an...

Page 1177: ... damage Hardware errors with possible causes and remedies are listed in the following sections Exceptions indicate anomalous or exceptional events that were not properly han dled by the R S ZND firmware Troubleshooting SCPI errors A misspelled command header causes SCPI error 113 Undefined header a misspelled parameter causes SCPI error 141 Invalid character data The GPIB explorer provides a list ...

Page 1178: ...xternal reference check fre quency and level of the supplied ref erence signal 1 Converter clock fre quency lock failure The clock generator for the AD converter clock is phase locked to the reference oscillator The mes sage appears when this PLL fails Oven cold With OXCO option B4 the oven temperature is too low Wait until the oven has been heated up 8 Internal communica tion error A severe unexp...

Page 1179: ...ep points for a time sweep are too close the analyzer cannot process the measurement data until the next sweep point starts Increase stop time reduce no of points increase IF bandwidth If pos sible reduce number of partial mea surements e g by restricting the number of ports measured 12 Port i output power unleveled The level control is unsettled or unstable possibly due to an external disturbing ...

Page 1180: ...l support If you encounter problems that you cannot solve yourself contact your Rohde Schwarz support center see Chapter 9 4 Contacting customer support on page 1182 Our support center staff is optimally trained to assist you in solving problems The support center finds solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide them with information on the instrument and an error description Creating W...

Page 1181: ...oting information This dialog can be opened via the Info button in the SYSTEM SETUP Setup soft tool tab For details on the available information see Chapter 5 17 1 3 Info dialog on page 554 The required troubleshooting information can also be generated in the system Info dialog Create R S Support Information collects the following information Setup option and hardware information error log and sel...

Page 1182: ...ort center A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applica tions of Rohde Schwarz products Contact information Contact our customer support center at www rohde schwarz com support or follow this QR code Figure 9 3 QR code to the Rohde Schwarz support page Contacting customer support www ...

Page 1183: ...ng material designed for the product If you do not have the original packaging use similar materials that provide the same level of protection Securing When moving the product in a vehicle or using transporting equipment make sure that the product is properly secured Only use items intended for securing objects Transport altitude Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet the maximum transport a...

Page 1184: ...z is committed to making careful ecologically sound use of natural resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products Help us by dis posing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact Disposing electrical and electronic equipment A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life Eve...

Page 1185: ...chwarz service Admin account You need administrator rights to install a new firmware See note on User accounts and password protection on page 29 for details To perform a firmware update 1 Copy the setup file to any storage medium accessible from the analyzer This can be either the internal mass storage drive an external storage medium USB mem ory stick external CD ROM drive or a network connectio...

Page 1186: ... the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the analyzer can be obtained in different ways If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally If the network does not support DHCP or if the analyzer is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually...

Page 1187: ...e adapter set tings dialog and right click the local connection Windows 7 open the Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Local Area Connection Status dialog 4 Select Properties and confirm the user account control message depending on your current user account If your current account is an administrator account select Yes If your account is an account with standard user rig...

Page 1188: ...ame can be changed The default instrument name is a case insensitive string with the following syntax ZND serial_number The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument It is the third part of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker ZND 102030 for example 12 1 2 3 Remote Desktop connection Remote Desktop is a Windows application which you can use to access and control the a...

Page 1189: ...bled A remote desktop connection does not require any changes in the firewall settings Admin account You need administrator rights to change the firewall settings See note on User accounts and password protection on page 29 above for details Some actions require a different firewall configuration e g To transfer data with other hosts in the LAN you have to allow File and Printer Sharing To change ...

Page 1190: ...plete 3 Reboot the instrument After the restore upgrade to the desired firmware version see Chapter 12 1 1 Firm ware installation on page 1185 12 3 Interfaces and connectors This chapter provides a detailed description of the rear panel connectors of the R S ZND An overview of the available front and rear panel is given in the Getting Started guide see Chapter 3 2 Instrument tour on page 33 EMI Su...

Page 1191: ...ss fail result of limit check 2 TTL Out Pass 2 15 AGND Ground 16 UC_DRV_PORT1 O Used as drive ports OUTPut UPORt ECBits OFF or channel bits OUTPut UPORt ECBits ON default If used as drive ports DRIVE PORT i is active while test port i is the source port If used as channel bits the pin states can be defined using OUTPut Ch UPORt VALue 17 UC_DRV_PORT2 O 18 UC_DRV_PORT3 O 19 UC_DRV_PORT4 O 20 AGND Gr...

Page 1192: ...r a network interface card and protocols The network interface card supports IEEE 802 3 for a 10 Mbps Ethernet and IEEE 802 3u for a 100 Mbps Ethernet Instrument access is possible via the VXI 11 protocol It is usually achieved from high level programming platforms by using the Virtual Instrument Software Architecture VISA library as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsulates the low leve...

Page 1193: ... GPIB bus interface is intended for remote control of the R S ZND from a controller Characteristics of the interface 8 bit parallel data transfer Bidirectional data transfer Three line handshake High data transfer rate of max 1 MByte s Up to 15 devices can be connected Wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel Pin assignment Bus lines Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7 The transmission...

Page 1194: ... S ZND provides several functions to communicate via GPIB bus They are described in the following sections 12 3 3 1 Interface functions Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different inter face functions The interface functions for the R S ZND are listed in the following table Control character Interface function SH1 Handshake source function source handshake full ...

Page 1195: ...poll state Addressed commands Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners Command QuickBASIC com mand Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal inp...

Page 1196: ...d of a measurement as well as a global limit check result Typically the handler will insert the device to be tested into a test fixture provide a trigger pulse to initiate the measurement remove and replace the device after the measurement is complete and sort it into pass fail bins A sample flow diagram for this process is shown below Figure 12 2 Possible stages of an automated test Preparation o...

Page 1197: ...sing SCPI commands CONTrol HANDler INPut queries the high to low transitions of the Input 1 signal The CONTrol HANDler OUTPut Pt commands set the output signals to a definite state and specify whether this state will change to Low when the Input 1 signal goes to Low This mechanism provides either static output signals or out put signals which are controlled by Input 1 The Index and Ready for Trigg...

Page 1198: ...gnals are usually performed in a preliminary stage before the actual measurement sequence If the Index and Ready for Trigger signals are enabled at this stage see Chapter 12 3 4 1 Control signals on page 1197 they replace the PORT B6 and PORT B7 signals Port B can still be used as a 6 bit parallel input output port Figure 12 4 Data ports and related signals Combined ports ports E F G H A combinati...

Page 1199: ...r is D3 D0 C3 C0 port E B7 B0 A7 A0 port F C3 C0 B7 B0 A7 A0 port G and D3 D0 C3 C0 B7 B0 A7 A0 port H SCPI commands See Chapter 7 3 3 CONTrol commands on page 819 12 3 4 3 Universal iInterface connector The Handler I O Universal Interface option includes a Centronics 36 input output con nector The Handler I O option R S ZN B14 must be installed by a Rohde Schwarz service representative The pin as...

Page 1200: ...ls pins no 3 and 4 change to Low 3 OUTPUT 1 O Changes to Low when the INPUT 1 pin no 2 receives a negative pulse 4 OUTPUT 2 O Changes to Low when the INPUT 1 pin no 2 receives a negative pulse 5 PORT A0 I or O Port A bit no 0 8 bit parallel input or output port 6 PORT A1 I or O Port A bit no 1 7 PORT A2 I or O Port A bit no 2 8 PORT A3 I or O Port A bit no 3 9 PORT A4 I or O Port A bit no 4 10 POR...

Page 1201: ... C bit no 1 24 PORT C2 I or O Port C bit no 2 25 PORT C3 I or O Port C bit no 3 26 PORT D0 I or O Port D bit no 0 4 bit parallel input or output port 27 PORT D1 I or O Port D bit no 1 28 PORT D2 I or O Port D bit no 2 29 PORT D3 I or O Port D bit no 3 30 PORT C STA TUS O Indicates the status of port C Low port C is an input port High port C is an output port 31 PORT D STA TUS O Indicates the statu...

Page 1202: ... V Figure 12 7 Circuit diagram of the input path Digital output signals are low voltage TTL compatible with output voltages between 0 V and 5 V The circuit diagram of the output path is shown below To Universal Interface 100 5 V 22 pF 10 Figure 12 8 Circuit diagram of the output path The default configuration of the signals is listed below Notice that RST or Preset do not change the configuration ...

Page 1203: ... 9 Timing of measurement control signals The figure above corresponds to the default configuration of the PASS FAIL signal For alternative configurations refer to the documentation of the CONTrol HANDler PASSfail commands in Chapter 7 3 3 CONTrol com mands on page 819 The figure contains the following pulse durations and response times Time Description Value T1 Pulse duration of EXTERNAL TRIGGER M...

Page 1204: ...tion 3 Under the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Rohde Schwarz Vna create a new subkey ShowroomMode 4 Within the ShowroomMode subkey create the string value ShowroomSetup 5 Modify the value ShowroomSetup set its value data to the full path of the recall set Use forward slashes as path separators e g C Documents and Settings All Users Rohde Schwarz Vna RecallSets ShowroomSet1 znx After the...

Page 1205: ...SENSe Ch LPORt LogPt ZDEFault STATe CALCulate 1 4 FSIMulator SENDed ZCONver sion PORT i Z0 R numeric SENSe Ch PORT PhyPt ZREFerence CALCulate Ch FSIMulator STATe ON OFF 1 0 n a enabled channel by channel port by port CALCulate 1 4 SELected DATA FDATa CALCulate 1 4 SELected DATA SDATa CALCulate 1 4 SELected DATA FMEMory CALCulate Chn DATA CALCulate Ch SELected FORMat CALCulate Chn FORMat CALCulate ...

Page 1206: ...CALCulate 1 4 SELected MATH MEMorize CALCulate Chn MATH MEMorize CALCulate 1 4 PARameter COUNt numeric CALCulate 1 4 PARameter 1 7 DEFine S11 S21 S31 S41 S12 S22 S32 S42 S13 S23 S33 S43 S14 S24 S34 S44 CALCulate Ch PARameter DEFine CALCulate 1 4 PARameter 1 7 SELect string CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect CALCulate 1 4 SELected SMOothing APERture numeric CALCulate Chn SMOothing APERture CALCulate 1 4...

Page 1207: ... TITLe DATA DISPlay WINDow 1 4 TITLe STATe ON OFF 1 0 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TITLe STATe DISPlay WINDow Ch TRACe Tr MEM ory STATe ON OFF 1 0 TRACe COPY DISPlay WIN Dow 1 4 TRACe 1 7 Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe AUTO DISPlay WINDow 1 4 Y SCALe DIVisions numeric DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow 1 4 Y SCALe RLEVel numeric DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndT...

Page 1208: ... CDSTate MMEMory STORe STATe Always saves measurement conditions and calibra tion state CSTate regardless of what you set it to SENSe 1 4 AVERage CLEar SENSe Ch AVERage CLEar SENSe 1 4 AVERage COUNt numeric SENSe Ch AVERage COUNt SENSe 1 4 AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe Ch AVERage STATe SENSe 1 4 BWIDth RESolution bandwidth SENSe Ch BWIDth RESolution SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect ACQuire LOAD nume...

Page 1209: ...ic1 numeric2 numeric3 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod SOLT4 1 2 3 4 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod RESPonse THRU numeric1 numeric2 SENSe 1 4 CORRection COL Lect METHod TYPE SENSe 1 4 CORRection TYPE 1 4 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine SENSe 1 4 CORRection COLLect SAVE SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect SAVE DUMMy SENSe 1 4 CORRection COLLect UTHRu STATe OFF 0 SENSe Ch CORRection EXTe...

Page 1210: ...MPLi tude numeric SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude SOURce ch POWer pt CORRection STATe ON OFF 1 0 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection STATe SOURce ch POWer pt CORRection COL Lect AVERage COUNt numeric SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage COUNt SOURce POWer pt CORRection COLLect AVER age NTOLerance numeric SOURce POWer CORRection COLLect AVERage NTOLerance SOURce ch POWer pt CORRecti...

Page 1211: ...Ransition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev NTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition numeric STATus QUEStionable LIMit Lev PTRansition SYSTem BEEPer WARNing STATe ON OFF 1 0 CALCulate Chn LIMit SOUNd STATe SYSTem KLOCk KBD ON OFF 1 0 SYSTem KLOCk TRIGger SEQuence SOURce INTernal EXTernal MANual BUS TRIGger Ch SEQuence SOURce ENA emulation commands www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH...

Page 1212: ...been selected as the active trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect trace name Many commands e g TRACE act on the active trace It can be different from the active trace in manual control C Cal pool The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets cal groups that the ana lyzer stores in a common directory Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets Calibration The pr...

Page 1213: ...splay traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings Directivity error Measurement error caused by a coupler or bridge in the analyzer s source port causing part of the generated signal to leak through the forward path into the receive path instead of being transmitted towards the DUT The directivity error can be corrected by means of a full one por...

Page 1214: ...ulation measurement Measurement where the DUT is supplied with two RF signals of equal power but different frequencies termed the upper and lower tone The analyzer measures the frequency converting behavior of the DUT intermodu lation product Intermodulation product Special type of emissions of a nonlinear DUT that is sup plied with a two tone RF signal intermodulation measurement The intermodula ...

Page 1215: ...ts and the data or memory traces of the active recall set Measurement point Result of the measurement at a specified stimulus value fre quency power time Measurement result Set of all measurement points acquired in a measurement e g a sweep The measurement result is displayed in a diagram area and forms a trace Memory trace Trace that is associated to a data trace and stored in the memory Data tra...

Page 1216: ... Value of the sweep variable frequency power time point number where a measurement is taken Also termed sweep point Sweep Series of consecutive measurements taken at a specified sequence of stimu lus values series of consecutive measurement points Sweep point Value of the sweep variable stimulus value frequency power time where a measurement is taken Sweep range Continuous range of the sweep varia...

Page 1217: ...lly matched Beyond that the through must be lossless and its length must be exactly known Especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology TRM A calibration type which requires a low reflection low loss Through standard with an electrical length that may be different from zero a Reflect and a Match Espe cially useful for DUTs in test fixtures TSM A calibration type using three fully known stan...

Page 1218: ...ion CKIT STANdard DATA 927 SENSe CORRection CKIT STANdard LCATalog 932 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT 942 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PASSword 943 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs 944 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO CKIT PORTs ADD 945 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO MCONnect 947 SENSe CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs CONNection 949 SENSe CORRection COLLect AVERage 953 SENSe CORRection ...

Page 1219: ...Lect CKIT INSTall 956 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT LOAD 956 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CKIT PORT PhyPt 956 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection GENDers 958 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs 958 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect CONNection PhyPt 957 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DELete 959 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DETector 959 SENSe Ch CORRection COLLect DISCard 960 SENSe Ch CORRection...

Page 1220: ... CORRection PCAL 983 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer DATA 986 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt ACQuire 984 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt AWAVe STATe 985 SENSe Ch CORRection POWer PhyPt STATe 986 SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa 987 SENSe Ch CORRection SMATrix CDATa PORT PhyPt 987 SENSe Ch CORRection STIMulus 988 SENSe Ch CORRection STATe 988 SENSe Ch COUPle 1017 SENSe Ch FREQuency CENTer 989 SENSe Ch ...

Page 1221: ...E 1010 SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl 1011 SENSe Ch SWEep DWELl IPOint 1012 SENSe Ch SWEep POINts 1012 SENSe Ch SWEep SPACing 1138 SENSe Ch SWEep STEP 1013 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME 1014 SENSe Ch SWEep TIME AUTO 1015 SENSe Ch SWEep TYPE 1016 SENSe Chn CORRection PSTate 988 SENSe Chn CORRection SSTate 989 SENSe Chn FUNCtion ON 1139 SENSe Chn SWEep SRCPort 1013 CALCulate CALValidate CHARacteriza 626 CALCulate CALVa...

Page 1222: ...ulate FMODel DELT RUN 649 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol 649 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol IFBW 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep CONTrol STEP 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MAXimum 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT SWEep FREQuency MINimum 650 CALCulate FMODel DELT TCONfig 651 CALCulate FMODel DELT TDR 651 CALCulate FMODel DELT Ph_pt M1L STATe 648 CALCulate FMODel DELT Ph_pt M2L STATe ...

Page 1223: ...2 CALCulate FMODel ISD PASSivity 662 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT ORDer 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP LEFT 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP NONE 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PORT SKIP RIGHt 663 CALCulate FMODel ISD PRESet 664 CALCulate FMODel ISD RUN RUN 664 CALCulate FMODel ISD SCALe ATTenuation 664 CALCulate FMODel ISD SCALe FREQuency 665 CALCulate FMODel ISD S...

Page 1224: ...e 721 CALCulate Ch PARameter MEASure SENDed 722 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine 722 CALCulate Ch PARameter SDEFine SENDed 725 CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect 725 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters C Cmp 764 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters DATA Port 765 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks BALanced DEEMbedding LogPt PARameters G Cm...

Page 1225: ...rks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters L 1 2 3 786 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId PARameters R 1 2 3 787 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId TNDefinition 788 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir DEEMbedding ListId STATe 788 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId DEFine 789 CALCulate Ch TRANsform VNETworks PPAir EMBedding ListId D...

Page 1226: ...late Chn FORMat WQUType 807 CALCulate Chn GDAPerture SCOunt 808 CALCulate Chn IAVerage MODE 808 CALCulate Chn IAVerage STATe 809 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle CLEar 672 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DATA 672 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle DISPlay STATe 672 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle FAIL 673 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle SOUNd STATe 673 CALCulate Chn LIMit CIRCle STATe 674 CALCulate Chn LIMit CLEar 674 CALCula...

Page 1227: ...lt STATe 705 CALCulate Chn MARKer SEARch BFILter RESult STATe AREA 706 CALCulate Chn MARKer STATe AREA 708 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk AOFF 689 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk BWIDth 689 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk DELTa STATe 693 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk EXCursion 693 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk EXCursion STATe 694 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FORMat 694 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk FUNCtion BWIDth 1125 CALCulate Chn MARKer Mk...

Page 1228: ...Matted STATe 716 CALCulate Chn MATH FORMatted EXPRession SDEFine 713 CALCulate Chn MATH FUNCtion 714 CALCulate Chn MATH MEMorize 715 CALCulate Chn MATH STATe 716 CALCulate Chn MATH WUNit STATe 716 CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession SDEFine 713 CALCulate Chn MATH EXPRession DEFine 1127 CALCulate Chn PHOLd 809 CALCulate Chn RIPPle CLEar 726 CALCulate Chn RIPPle CONTrol DOMain 726 CALCulate Chn RIPPle DAT...

Page 1229: ...TATe 742 CALCulate Chn STATistics STATe AREA 743 CALCulate Chn TRANsform COMPlex 804 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault CENTer 743 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DEFine 744 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault DELete 745 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK COUNt 745 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK DATA FaultNo 746 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK STATe 746 CALCulate Chn TRANsform DTFault PEAK T...

Page 1230: ...ME ID 817 CONFigure TRACe Trc REName 818 CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA 820 CONTrol HANDler A MODE 822 CONTrol HANDler A DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler B MODE 822 CONTrol HANDler B DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler C MODE 822 CONTrol HANDler C DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler D MODE 822 CONTrol HANDler D DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler E DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler F DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler G DATA 821 CONTrol HANDler H DATA 821 CONTro...

Page 1231: ...DIAGnostic HUMS UTILization 1115 DIAGnostic HUMS ALL 1104 DIAGnostic PRODuct OPTion INFO 829 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DATE 1118 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DUE DATE 1118 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration DUE STATe 1119 DIAGnostic SERVice CALibration INTerval 1119 DIAGnostic SERVice DATE 1119 DIAGnostic SERVice FUNCtion 1128 DIAGnostic SERVice RFPower 829 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction 829 DIAG...

Page 1232: ...SPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y OFFSet 849 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe AUTO 849 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe BOTTom 850 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe PDIVision 851 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RLEVel 852 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe RPOSition 853 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr Y SCALe TOP 850 DISPlay WINDow Wnd TRACe WndTr ZOOM BOTTom 854 DISPlay WI...

Page 1233: ...EMory CDIRectory 873 MMEMory CKIT INFO 873 MMEMory COPY 874 MMEMory DATA 874 MMEMory DELete 874 MMEMory DELete CORRection 875 MMEMory FAVorite FavId 875 MMEMory LOAD CABLe 876 MMEMory LOAD CKIT 876 MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa 877 MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa WLABel 878 MMEMory LOAD CKIT UDIRectory 879 MMEMory LOAD CMAP 880 MMEMory LOAD CMAP HCOPy 880 MMEMory LOAD CORRection 880 MMEMory LOAD CORRection MERG...

Page 1234: ...e STATe 900 MMEMory STORe TRACe 901 MMEMory STORe TRACe CHANnel 902 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion BALanced 903 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion COMMent 904 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion DECimals DATA 904 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion DECimals STIMulus 904 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion FORMat 904 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion PLUS 905 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion SSEParator 905 MMEMory STORe TRACe OPTion SYMMetric 903 MM...

Page 1235: ... GROup Grp CLEar 1020 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PORTs 1020 SOURce Ch GROup Grp PPORts 1020 SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt 1043 SOURce Ch LPORt LogPt CLEar 1044 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA 1033 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection DATA PARameter Wv 1034 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection OSOurces STATe 1036 SOURce Ch POWer CORRection ACQuire 1032 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRection COLLect ACQuire 1140 SOURce Ch POWer PhyPt CORRe...

Page 1236: ... SELF RTERminator 1052 SYSTem COMMunicate NET HOSTname 1052 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess 1053 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess ALL 1053 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess SUBModule ALL 1053 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT 1054 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT CATalog 1055 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL CKIT STANdard CATalog 1056 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL DATE...

Page 1237: ...COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete 1103 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP USM USER DELete ALL 1103 SYSTem COMMunicate SNMP VERSion 1103 SYSTem CORRection JOINcal 1073 SYSTem CORRection WIZard IMMediate 1074 SYSTem DATA MEMory ADD 1069 SYSTem DATA MEMory CATalog 1070 SYSTem DATA MEMory COMMit 1070 SYSTem DATA MEMory DELete 1070 SYSTem DATA MEMory INITalize 1071 SYSTem DATA MEMory OFFSet 1071 SYSTem DATA MEMory...

Page 1238: ... PRESet USER NAME 1085 SYSTem PRESet USER STATe 1085 SYSTem PRESet DUMMy 1083 SYSTem SETTings UPDate 1086 SYSTem SHUTdown 1087 SYSTem SMATrix OPTimization 1087 SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe 1087 SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe 1087 SYSTem TIME 1088 SYSTem TRESet STATe 1088 SYSTem TSLock 1088 SYSTem TTLout Pt STATus STATe 1089 SYSTem USER DISPlay TITLe 1089 SYSTem USER KEY 1089 SYSTem VERSion 1090 TRACe CLEar...

Page 1239: ...ZND 1239 User Manual 1173 9557 02 61 TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SLOPe Num 1095 TRIGger Ch SEQuence MULTiple SOURce 1096 TRIGger Ch SEQuence SLOPe 1096 TRIGger Ch SEQuence SOURce 1097 www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Page 1240: ...ion notes 22 Apply System error correction 405 Apply calibration 407 ASCII 540 ASCII csv file 142 ATN 1193 Attention 1193 Auto Config 573 Auto Length 461 Auto Length and Loss 466 Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit 542 Auto scale 62 Auto Scale Diagram 272 Auto Scale Trace 272 Auto Zero 260 Automatic calibration 164 Automatic Harmonic Grid 295 Average 363 Average tab 362 Averaging mode 363 Auto 363 Fla...

Page 1241: ...63 Calibration Manager dialog 436 437 Add 437 Apply 437 Apply to All 437 Channel and calibration properties 439 Channel State 437 Delete from Pool 438 Pool 438 Preset User Cal 438 Replace 437 Resolve Pool Link 438 Calibration pool 163 Calibration Setting wizard 397 Apply 405 Cal Kit 402 Calibration 402 Connectors and Cal Kits 400 Ports and Type 398 Calibration standard 157 Calibration types 146 Ca...

Page 1242: ...AV 1193 dB Mag 266 DC Value 295 DCL 1192 1194 DCL SDC 620 Decouple Active Trace 274 Decouple All Traces 274 Deembedding Balanced 455 Ground Loop 456 457 Impedance Renormalization 457 Port Sets 453 454 Single Ended 452 DEFault 598 Default file locations 869 Default Port Assignment 394 Define Limit Lines dialog 320 Define Ripple Test dialog 327 Define Segments dialog 372 Displayed Columns 375 Define...

Page 1243: ... Export Data ASCII Files dialog Add Ref Impedances 313 Decimal Separator 314 Field Separator 314 Formatted Values 313 Export Data MatLab Files dialog Add Ref Impedances 313 Field Separator 314 Formatted Values 313 Export Data Touchstone Files dialog Normalize with Port Specific Impedances 312 Symmetric Params 312 Export Markers 340 Export snp Files Active Channel 315 All Channels 315 Assign port n...

Page 1244: ...t 402 Sweep segments 375 Import Complex Data dialog 309 Import Data to New Mem 310 Import Data to New Mem 310 Impulse Response 292 In situ De Embedding 213 INFintiy 598 Info dialog 554 Cal Validation tab 558 Hardware tab 557 Options tab 556 Selftest tab 557 Setup tab 555 Info Table 531 Inline calibration 168 1174 Instrument calibration 67 Instrument hardware 604 Instrument Messages 568 1195 Instru...

Page 1245: ...timulus 336 Style 339 Marker coupling 93 Marker Format 338 Marker Info 340 Marker info field 90 Marker Mode Arbitrary 339 Fixed 339 Normal 339 Marker Name 338 Marker Search 340 Max Min 341 Next Peak 341 Peak Left Peak Right 342 Peak Type 341 342 Search Mode 349 Marker search functions 94 Marker softtool 335 Bandfilter tab 349 Info Field tab 355 Marker Coupling tab 355 Marker Props tab 338 Marker S...

Page 1246: ... Compensation 462 Ground Loop 456 Impedance Renormalization 457 Loss 450 Loss active 450 Offset active 450 Port Pairs 483 Port Sets 453 Reset Offsets 450 Reset Offsets and losses 451 Single Ended deembedding 452 Single Ended embedding 452 Offset Embed dock widget 449 Balanced panel 455 Calculation Flow 449 Differential Match panel 458 Ground Loop panel 456 Impedance Renormalization panel 457 Offse...

Page 1247: ... 218 Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog 432 Two Port Configuration dialog 433 Power on and off 27 Power Sensor menu 260 Power Sensor tab 260 Power sweep 369 Power tab 359 361 PPC 1194 PPE 608 613 PPU 1194 Preset 620 Preset Configuration 541 Preset Scope 541 Presets system settings 541 Print 507 Printer 32 Printing data 71 Program example 1168 calibration 1168 Programming examples 1143 PT...

Page 1248: ...s tab 271 Zoom tab 274 Scale Values tab 271 Scale Div 272 Scaling diagrams 59 Scan Instruments external power meters 571 577 SCPI command structure 594 SCPI commands 594 SCPI status register 609 event status register 613 IST flag 613 parallel poll enable register 613 service request enable register 612 status byte 612 STATus OPERation register 614 STATus QUEStionable register 614 STATus QUEStionab...

Page 1249: ...ty tab 259 Standby and ready state 28 Standby key 37 START 81 Start Marker 354 Start Frequency 358 Start Power 359 Startup and shutdown 27 Status bar 50 Status Bar Show hide 537 Status registers 608 Status reporting system common commands 622 624 Error queue 620 Parallel poll 619 Queries 619 Reset values 620 Serial poll 619 Service request 618 STB 608 612 Step Size dialog 58 STIMULUS 35 Stimulus s...

Page 1250: ...CE 35 Trace Colors per Diagram 534 Trace Config Hold 306 Max Hold 306 Min Hold 306 Shift Trace 306 Smoothing 305 Trace Config softtool 276 All Mem All Data tab 284 Distance to Fault tab 516 Hold 304 Mem tab 281 Shift Trace 304 Smooth Shift Hold tab 304 Smoothing 304 Time Domain tab 291 Time Gate tab 296 Trace Data tab 308 Trace Statistics tab 298 Traces tab 276 Trace Data 509 Export 308 Import 308...

Page 1251: ...laces 546 Reset Dialogs 546 Reset Units Prefix 546 Show Sweep Symbols 544 Sounds 544 Transparent Info Fields 544 Units Prefix 546 Use Default Tab for Hardkey 544 USER PORT 39 1190 TTL Pass output 549 UTF 8 540 V Velocity Factor 460 View Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog 420 421 Characteristic impedance Z0 421 Delay 421 Electrical Length 421 Load parameters 421 Loss 421 Offset Loss 421 Offset paramet...

Page 1252: ...Index R S ZND 1252 User Manual 1173 9557 02 61 Start 276 Stop 276 Zoom Reset 276 Zoom Select 275 Zoom tab 274 www allice de Allice Messtechnik GmbH ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for R&S ZND

Reviews:

Allice Messtechnik R&S ZND, User Manual, Page: 555 / 1252

Search results

Summary of Contents for R&S ZND

Reviews: